Quick Setup Guide - Ricohrfg-esource.ricoh-usa.com/stellent/groups/public/documents/service... · 2 Control Panel 1 One Touch keys 2 Job Cancel key 3 Fax and telephone keys 4 Liquid

Before you can use the machine, you must set up the hardware and install the software.Please read this “Quick Setup Guide” for the correct setup procedure and installation instructions.

Keep this “Quick Setup Guide”, User’s Guide and supplied CD-ROM in a convenient place for quick and easy reference at all times.

Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, please be sure to read the Important Information in “User’s Guide” before using the machine.

Step 1

Setting Up the machine

Step 2

Installing the Drivers & Software

Setup is Complete!

Inst

allin

g th

e D

river

s &

Sof

twar

e

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

s®

US

BW

indo

ws®

Par

alle

l

Win

dow

sN

T®

4.0

Par

alle

l

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

Win

dow

s®

Net

wor

k

SP

C21

0SF

Qu

ick

Set

up

Gu

ide

Warning Caution Important

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Improper Setup Note User’s Guide

Alerts you to devices and operations that are not compatible with the machine.

Indicates notes and useful tips to remember when using the machine.

Indicates reference to the User’s Guide.

1

Carton components may differ from one country to another.Save all packing materials and the carton.

*1 The toner cartridges that are supplied with this machine, are starter cartridges. Starter cartridges have approx. half the page yield of the standard toner cartridge, 1,500 pages (Black) and 1,500 pages (Cyan, Magenta and Yellow) at approximately 5% print coverage (Letter size).

Carton Components

Quick Setup Guide

CD-ROM

User’s Guide

OPC Belt Cartridge AC Power Cord Telephone Line Cord

Toner Cartridges (Black, Cyan, Magenta and Yellow)*1

The interface cable is not a standard accessory. Please purchase the appropriate interface cable for the interface you intend to use (Parallel, USB or Network).Do NOT connect the interface cable at this time. Connecting the interface cable is done during the software installation process.■ USB interface cable

Please make sure you use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no longer than 6 feet (2.0 meters).When you use a USB cable, make sure you connect it to the USB port of your computer and not to a USB port on a keyboard or non-powered USB hub.

■ Parallel interface cablePlease make sure you use a Parallel interface cable that is no longer than 6 feet (2.0 meters).Use a shielded interface cable that is IEEE 1284-compliant.

1. Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)2. Control Panel3. Face-down Output Tray with

Support Flap (Support Flap)4. Front Cover

5. Paper Tray6. Power Switch7. Back Cover8. Document Cover9. ADF Document Output Support Flap

1

6

92

3

4

5

8

7

■ Getting Started

2

Control Panel

1 One Touch keys 2 Job Cancel key 3 Fax and telephone keys

4 Liquid Crystal Display 5 Secure Print key 6 Dial Pad

7 Stop/Exit key 8 Start keys 9 Navigation keys

10 Mode keys 11 Copy keys 12 Shift key

For the details of the control panel, see "Control panel overview" in Chapter 1 of the User’s Guide.

■ This machine is heavy and weighs approximately 76.7 lb (34.8 kg). To prevent injuries, use at least two people to lift the machine.

■ When you lift the machine make sure you use the handholds at the bottom four corners of the machine.

12 11 10 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8

3

Table of Contents

Setting Up the machine1. Install the Toner cartridges ............................................................................... 42. Remove the protective parts of the Fusing Unit .............................................53. Install the OPC Belt Cartridge...........................................................................64. Load Paper in the Paper Tray ...........................................................................75. Install the Power Cord and Phone Line ...........................................................86. Setting the Date and Time .................................................................................97. Setting your Station ID ......................................................................................98. Selecting a Receive Mode ...............................................................................109. Selecting Your Language ................................................................................1110. Setting the LCD Contrast ................................................................................11

Installing the Drivers & SoftwareSupplied CD-ROM “Multi-Function Suite”.....................................................................12For USB Interface Cable Users (For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP)....................................................14

For Parallel Interface Cable Users (For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP)....................................................17

For Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0 Users .......................................................20For Network Interface Cable Users (For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/NT/2000 Professional/XP) ..............................................22

■ For Network Users

Installing the BRAdmin Professional Configuration Utility .........................................24Setting your IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway using BRAdmin Professional ...................................................................................................................25

■ Options and Consumables

Options .............................................................................................................................26Replacement Consumables............................................................................................26

Step 1

Step 2

4

Setting Up the machine

Do NOT connect the interface cable.Connecting the interface cable is done when installing the driver.

1 Remove the protective tape.

2 Open the front cover.

3 Remove the protective part.

4 Take out all the toner cartridges from the machine.

5 Carefully pull the protective part out of the machine.

6 Rock the toner cartridge 3 to 4 times.

7 Pull off the tape labeled REMOVE, and then remove the orange protective cover.

1 Install the Toner cartridges

Front cover

REMOVE tape Protective cover

Go to the next page

Step 1

5

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

s®

US

BW

indo

ws®

Par

alle

l

Win

dow

sN

T®

4.0

Par

alle

l

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

Win

dow

s®

Net

wor

k

8 Install the toner cartridge by sliding it into the correct guide. Match the cartridge color label to the corresponding label on the machine.

9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 for the remaining toner cartridges.

0 Close the front cover.

1 Open the back cover (1) and the scanner unit (2) of the machine.

2 Pull out the protective part from both sides of the fusing unit.

3 Close the scanner unit (1) and the back cover (2).

K

Y

M

C

K

Y

M

C

2 Remove the protective parts of the Fusing Unit

6

Do NOT touch the green surface of the OPC belt cartridge or expose it to bright room light or sunlight for more than two minutes to avoid damaging the belt.

1 Open the scanner unit.

2 Open the inside cover so that it latches under the scanner unit.

3 Remove the orange belt tension release pins from both sides of the OPC belt cartridge. Remove the protective sheet.

4 Put the OPC belt cartridge into the machine guides with the flat side facing you.

5 Lock the belt cartridge lock levers.

6 Close the inside cover, and then close the scanner unit.

3 Install the OPC Belt Cartridge

Scanner unit

Inside cover

Protective sheet

Belt tension release pin

OPC belt cartridge

Belt cartridge lock levers

Step 1 Setting Up the machine

7

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

s®

US

BW

indo

ws®

Par

alle

l

Win

dow

sN

T®

4.0

Par

alle

l

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

Win

dow

s®

Net

wor

k

1 Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.

2 While pressing the paper guide release lever, slide the adjusters to fit the paper size. Check that the guides are firmly in the slots.

3 Fan the stack of paper well to avoid paper jams and misfeeds.

4 Put the paper in the paper tray.Check that the paper is flat in the tray and below the maximum paper mark.

5 Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.

4 Load Paper in the Paper Tray

Paper guide

Paper guide

For details on supported paper specifications, see “Acceptable paper and other media” in Chapter 2 of the User’s Guide.

Maximum paper mark

Output paper tray support flap

8

Do not connect the Parallel or USB cable yet.

1 Make sure that the power switch is off.Connect the AC power cord to the machine.

2 Plug the AC power cord into an AC outlet.Turn the power switch on.

3 Connect one end of the telephone line cord to the jack on the machine marked LINEand the other end to a modular wall jack.

Warning■ The machine must be grounded using a 3-prong

plug.■ Since the machine is grounded through the power

outlet, you can protect yourself from potentially hazardous electrical conditions on the telephone network by keeping the power cord connected to your machine when you connect it to a telephone line. Similarly, you can protect yourself when you want to move your machine by disconnecting the telephone line first and then the power cord.

5 Install the Power Cord and Phone Line

If you are sharing one phone line with an external telephone, connect it as shown below.

If you are sharing one phone line with an external telephone answering device, connect it as shown below.

Please set the receive mode to External TAD.For more details, see “Connecting an external telephone answering device (TAD)” in Chapter 3 of the User’s Guide.

TAD

TAD


9

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

s®

US

BW

indo

ws®

Par

alle

l

Win

dow

sN

T®

4.0

Par

alle

l

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

Win

dow

s®

Net

wor

k

The machine displays the date and time, and prints it on every fax you send.

1 Press Menu/Set.

2 Press 0.

3 Press 2.

4 Enter the last two digits of the year on the dial pad, and then press Menu/Set.

(e.g. Enter 0, 5 for 2005.)

5 Enter the two digits for the month on the dial pad, and then press Menu/Set.

(e.g. Enter 0, 3 for March.)

6 Enter the two digits for the day on the dial pad, and then press Menu/Set.

(e.g. Enter 0, 1.)

7 Enter the time in 24-hour format on the dial pad, and then press Menu/Set.

(e.g. Enter 1, 5, 2, 5 for 3:25 P.M.)

8 Press Stop/Exit.

You should store your name and fax number to be printed on all fax pages that you send.

1 Press Menu/Set.

2 Press 0.

3 Press 3.

4 Enter your fax number (up to 20 digits) on the dial pad, and then press Menu/Set.

5 Enter your telephone number (up to 20 digits) on the dial pad, and then press Menu/Set.(If your telephone number and fax number are the same, enter the same number again.)

6 Use the dial pad to enter your name (up to 20 characters), and then press Menu/Set.

7 Press Stop/Exit.

6 Setting the Date and Time

Date/TimeYear:2005

Date/TimeMonth:03

Date/TimeDay:01

Date/TimeTime:15:25

If you make a mistake, press Stop/Exit to start from Step 1.

7 Setting your Station ID

Station IDFax:

Station IDTel:

Station IDName:

■ Refer to the following chart for entering your name.

■ If you need to enter a character that is on the same key as the previous character, press to move the cursor to the right.

Press key

Onetime

Two times

Three times

Four times

2 A B C 23 D E F 34 G H I 45 J K L 56 M N O 67 P Q R S8 T U V 89 W X Y Z

For more details, see “Entering Text” in Appendix B of the User's Guide.

10

There are four possible receive modes; Fax Only,Fax/Tel, Manual and External TAD.Choose the Receive Mode which best suits your needs.

1 Press Menu/Set.

2 Press 0.

3 Press 1.

4 Press or to select the mode.Press Menu/Set.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

8 Selecting a Receive Mode

Are you connecting an external telephone or external telephone answering device to the machine?

Are you using the voice message function of your external telephone answering device?

Do you want the machine to answer fax and telephone calls automatically?

Do you want to use the machine for Fax only?

Fax OnlyThe machine automatically answers every call as a fax.

Fax/TelThe machine controls the line and automatically answers every call. If the call is not a fax, the machine will ring for you to pick up the call.

ManualYou control the phone line and must answer every call yourself.

External TADYour external telephone answering device (TAD) automatically answers every call. Voice messages are stored on the external TAD. Fax messages are printed.

Yes No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

For more details, see “Receiving a fax” in Chapter 6 of the User's Guide.


11

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

s®

US

BW

indo

ws®

Par

alle

l

Win

dow

sN

T®

4.0

Par

alle

l

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

Win

dow

s®

Net

wor

k

1 Press Menu/Set.

2 Press 0.

3 Press 0.

4 Select your language (English or French)by using or , and then press Menu/Set.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

You can change the contrast to help the LCD look lighter or darker.

1 Press Menu/Set.

2 Press 1.

3 Press 7.

4 Press to increase the contrast.—OR—Press to decrease the contrast.Press Menu/Set.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

9 Selecting Your Language

Local LanguageEnglish

10 Setting the LCD Contrast

Go to Next page toinstall the drivers & software

12


The CD-ROM includes the following items:Install Multi-Function Suite

You can install the Multi-Function Suite and multifunction drivers.

Install Optional ApplicationsYou can install additional Multi-Function Suite software utilities.

Documentation*1

View the User’s Guide and other documentation in PDF format (Viewer included).

Repair Multi-Function Suite(For USB and Parallel cable users only.)

If you experience errors while installing the Multi-Function Suite, you can use this function to automatically repair and re-install the software.

Supplied CD-ROM “Multi-Function Suite”

Multi-Function Suite includes Printer Driver, Scanner Driver, ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE, ControlCenter2 and ScanSoft® OmniPage®.PaperPort® 9.0SE is a document management application for viewing scanned documents. ScanSoft® OmniPage®, which is integrated into PaperPort® 9.0SE, is an OCR application that converts an image into text and inserts it into your default word processor.

*1 The User’s Guide on the CD-ROM includes the Software and Network User’s Guide for features available when connected to a computer (e.g. Printing and scanning).

Step 2

13

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

s®

US

BW

indo

ws®

Par

alle

l

Win

dow

sN

T®

4.0

Par

alle

l

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

Win

dow

s®

Net

wor

k

Follow the instructions on this page for your operating system and interface cable.

Step 2

USB Interface Cable Users ..........................................Go to page 14(For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP)

Parallel Interface Cable Users .....................................Go to page 17(For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP)

Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0 Users...........Go to page 20(For Parallel Interface Cable Users)

Network Interface Cable Users....................................Go to page 22

For Network Users........................................................Go to page 24


14

Make sure that you have completed the instructions from Step 1 “Setting Up the machine” on pages 4 - 11.

1 Turn off and unplug the machine from the AC outlet and disconnect it from your computer, if you already connected an interface cable.

2 Turn on your computer.(For Windows® 2000 Professional/XP, you must be logged on with Administrator rights.)

3 Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. If the language screen appears, select your language.

4 The CD-ROM main menu will appear.Click Install Multi-Function Suite.

5 After reading and accepting the ScanSoft®

PaperPort® 9.0SE License Agreement, click Yes.

The installation of PaperPort® 9.0SE will automatically start and is followed by the installation of Multi-Function Suite.

6 When the Multi-Function Suite Software License Agreement window appears, read the agreement, then click Yes if you agree to its terms.

7 Select Local Connection, and then click Next.The installation will continue.

For USB Interface Cable Users (For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP)

Please close any applications running before installing the Multi-Function Suite.

If this window does not appear, use Windows®

Explorer to run the setup.exe program from the root directory of the CD-ROM.

Step 2 Installing the Drivers & Software

15

8 When this screen appears, connect the USB interface cable to your PC, and then connect it to the machine.

(For Windows® XP)

(For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000)

DO NOT connect the machine to a USB port on a keyboard or a non-powered USB hub.

9 Plug in the power cord and turn on the machine.

It will take a few seconds for the installation screen to appear.The installation of the drivers will automatically start. The screens appear one after another. Please wait, it will take a few seconds for all the screens to appear.

DO NOT try to cancel any of the screens during this installation.

0 When the On-Line Registration screen is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

We recommend that you connect the machine directly to your computer.

Continued ...

Inst

allin

g th

e D

river

s &

Sof

twar

e

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

s®

US

B

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

16

A Click Finish to restart your computer.(After restarting the computer, for Windows® 2000 Professional/XP, you must be logged on with Administrator rights.)

The Multi-Function Suite, Printer Driver and Scanner driver have been installed and the installation is now complete.

For USB Interface Cable Users (For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP)


17


1 Turn off and unplug the machine from the AC outlet and disconnect it from your computer, if you already connected an interface cable.

2 Turn on your computer.(For Windows® 2000 Professional/XP, you must be logged on with Administrator rights.)








For Parallel Interface Cable Users (For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP)




Continued ...

Inst

allin

g th

e D

river

s &

Sof

twar

e

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

s®

Par

alle

l

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

Win

dow

s®

US

B

18

8 When this screen appears, connect the parallel interface cable to your PC, and then connect it to the machine.

(For Windows® XP)

(For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000)

DO NOT plug in the power cord before connecting the parallel interface cable. It may cause damage to your machine.


0 For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional users, click Next.

For Windows® XP users, wait for a while since the installation of the drivers will automatically start. The screens appear one after another.


A When the On-Line Registration screen is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

For Parallel Interface Cable Users (For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP)


Caution


19

B When the following screen appears, click Finish and wait as the PC restarts Windows® and continues the installation.

C After the computer restarts, the installation of the drivers will automatically start. Follow the instructions on the screen.(For Windows® 2000 Professional/XP, you must be logged on with Administrator rights.)

D For Windows® 2000 Professional users, if the Digital Signature Not Found dialog boxes appear, click Yes to install the drivers.

The Multi-Function Suite, Printer driver and Scanner driver have been installed and the installation is now complete.

Inst

allin

g th

e D

river

s &

Sof

twar

e

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

s®

Par

alle

l

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

20


1 Turn off and unplug the machine from the AC outlet.

2 Turn on your computer.You must be logged on with Administrator rights.

DO NOT plug in the power cord before connecting the parallel interface cable. It may cause damage to your machine.

3 Connect the parallel interface cable to your computer, and then connect it to the machine.


5 Insert the Supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. If the language screen appears, select your language.






For Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0 Users



Caution




21


0 When the On-Line Registration screen is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

A When the following screen appears, click Finish and wait as the PC restarts Windows® and continues the installation.(You must be logged on with Administrator rights.)

The Multi-Function Suite, Printer driver and Scanner driver have been installed and the installation is now complete.

Inst

allin

g th

e D

river

s &

Sof

twar

e

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

sN

T®

4.0

Par

alle

l

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

22


1 Turn off and unplug the machine from AC outlet.

2 Connect the network cable to the machine, and then connect it to a free port on your hub.


4 Turn on your computer.(For Windows® 2000 Professional/XP/Windows NT® 4.0, you must be logged on with Administrator rights.)Close any applications running before installing the Multi-Function Suite.







For Network Interface Cable Users (For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/NT/2000 Professional/XP)

Before installation, if you are using Personal Firewall software, disable it. Once you are sure that you can print after the installation, re-start your Personal Firewall software.




23

9 Select Network Connection and then click Next.

0 The installation of the drivers will automatically start. The installation screens appear one after another. Please wait, it will take a few seconds for all the screens to appear.


A If the machine is configured for your network, select your machine from the list and then click Next.

B If the machine is not yet configured for use on your network, the Configure IP address window will appear. Enter the IP address information appropriate to your network by clicking OK and following the on-screen instructions.

C When the On-Line Registration screen is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

D When the following screen appears, click Finish and wait as the PC restarts Windows® and continues the installation.(For Windows® 2000 Professional/XP/Windows NT® 4.0, you must be logged on with Administrator rights.)

The Multi-Function Suite, Network Printer driver, Network Scanner driver have been installed and the installation is now complete.

■ For Network installations, the Repair Multi-Function Suite selection from the main menu is not supported.

■ Network Scanning is not supported in Windows NT® 4.0.

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Inst

allin

g th

e D

river

s &

Sof

twar

e

Win

dow

s®

Net

wor

k

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

24

■ For Network Users

The BRAdmin Professional utility is designed to manage your network connected devices such as network-ready Multifunction devices and/or network-ready printers in a Local Area Network (LAN) environment.BRAdmin Professional can also be used to manage devices from other manufacturers whose products support SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol).

1 Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The opening screen will appear automatically. Follow the on-screen instructions.

2 Click the Install Optional Applications icon on the main menu screen.

3 Click BRAdmin Professional and follow the on-screen instructions.

Installing the BRAdmin Professional Configuration Utility

The default password for the print server is “access”. You can use BRAdmin Professional or a web browser to change this password.

25

1 Start BRAdmin Professional, and select TCP/IP.

2 Select Search Active Devices from the Devices menu.BRAdmin will search for new devices automatically.

3 Double-click the new device.

4 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway, and then click the OK button.

5 The address information will be saved to the machine.

Setting your IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway using BRAdmin Professional

For more information on network administration, please see the Network User’s Guide in the programs menu.

Set

ting

Up

the

mac

hine

Win

dow

s®

US

BW

indo

ws®

Par

alle

l

Win

dow

sN

T®

4.0

Par

alle

l

For

Net

wor

k U

sers

Win

dow

s®

Net

wor

k

26

■ Options and Consumables

The machine has the following optional accessories. You can expand the capabilities of the machine by adding these items.

When the time comes to replace consumables, an error message will be indicated on the LCD.

Options

Lower Tray Unit SO-DIMM Memory

Paper Feed Unit Type 1000 Memory Unit Type C (64/128/256 MB)

Second lower paper tray unit expands total input capacity up to 530 sheets.

You can expand the memory up to a total of 576 MB by installing memory modules.The 512 MB memory module is not supplied by us. When you expand the total memory capacity to 576 MB, install the following type of memory module.

Module Type: SO-DIMM (Small Outline Dual-in-line Memory Module)

Memory Type: SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM)Number of Pins: 144 pinsCAS latency: 2 or 3Clock frequency: 100 MHz or more

Legal Paper Tray Unit

Paper Cassette Type 1000

The input capacity is up 250 sheets.

Replacement Consumables

Toner Cartridges Waste Toner Pack

LP Toner Cassette Type 140 / Type 140LY Waste Toner Bottle Type 140

Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow

OPC Belt Cartridge

Photo Conductor Unit Type 140

TrademarksWindows, Microsoft and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft in the U.S. and other countries.PaperPort and OmniPage are registered trademarks of Nuance Communications Inc.Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.All other brand and product names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Copylight © 2005

EN USA G157-3005

User’s Guide

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correctuse, be sure to read the Important Information in this manual before using the machine.

i

Quick Reference GuideSending Faxes

Automatic Transmission

1 If it is not illuminated in blue, press

(Fax).

2 Load your document.

3 Enter the fax number using One-Touch, Speed-Dial, Search or the dial pad.

4 Press Black Start.

Storing numbers

Storing One-Touch Dial numbers

1 Press Menu/Set, 2, 3, 1.

2 Press the One-Touch key where you want to store the number.

NoteTo access One-Touch numbers 9 to 16, hold down Shift as you press the One-Touch key.

3 Select Fax/Tel.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Enter the number (up to 20 digits).

Press Menu/Set.

5 Enter the name up to 15 characters (or leave it blank).

Press Menu/Set.

6 Press Stop/Exit.

Storing Speed-Dial numbers


2 Using the dial pad, enter a three-digit Speed-Dial location number.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Select Fax/Tel.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Enter the number (up to 20 digits).

Press Menu/Set.

5 Enter the name up to 15 characters (or leave it blank).

Press Menu/Set.

6 Press Stop/Exit.

Dialing operations

One-Touch Dialing / Speed-Dialing


(Fax).


3 Press the One-Touch key of the number you want to call.

NoteTo dial One-Touch numbers 9 to 16, hold down Shift as you press the One-Touch key.

—OR—

Press Search/Speed Dial, press #.Press the three-digit Speed-Dial number.


ii

Using Search


(Fax).


3 Press Search/Speed Dial, and then enter the first letter of the name you’re looking for.

4 Press or to search the memory.


Making copies

Single copy

1 Press (Copy) to illuminate it in blue.


3 Press Black Start or Color Start.

Sorting copies using the ADF



3 Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want (up to 99).

4 Press Options and ▲ or ▼ to select Stack/Sort.

Press Menu/Set.

5 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Sort.

Press Menu/Set.


▲

▲

iii

Table of Contents

Section I - General

1 General Information

Using this Guide ..................................................................................................1-1Finding information ........................................................................................1-1Symbols used in this Guide ...........................................................................1-1

How to access the complete User’s Guide..........................................................1-2To view Documentation .................................................................................1-2

Control panel overview ........................................................................................1-3About fax machines .............................................................................................1-5

Custom features ............................................................................................1-5Fax tones and handshake .............................................................................1-6ECM (Error Correction Mode)........................................................................1-6

2 Loading paper and documents

Acceptable paper and other media......................................................................2-1Recommended paper ....................................................................................2-1Type and size of paper ..................................................................................2-1Handling and using special paper .................................................................2-3

Printable area ......................................................................................................2-7Loading paper and envelopes .............................................................................2-8Loading documents ...........................................................................................2-10

Using the ADF (automatic document feeder) ..............................................2-10Using the scanner glass ..............................................................................2-11

3 Setup

Date and Time .....................................................................................................3-1Automatic Daylight Savings Time..................................................................3-1

Station ID.............................................................................................................3-2LCD Contrast .......................................................................................................3-3Phone line settings ..............................................................................................3-3

Tone and Pulse dialing mode ........................................................................3-3Roll over phone lines .....................................................................................3-3Two-line phone system..................................................................................3-3Converting telephone wall outlets..................................................................3-4Installing machine, external two-line TAD and two-line telephone ................3-4Multi-line connections (PBX) .........................................................................3-5Connecting an external or extension telephone ............................................3-5Connecting an external telephone answering device (TAD) .........................3-5

Ecology features..................................................................................................3-7Toner Save ....................................................................................................3-7Sleep Time ....................................................................................................3-8

Mode Timer..........................................................................................................3-8

iv

Paper settings......................................................................................................3-9Paper Type ....................................................................................................3-9Paper Size .....................................................................................................3-9

Volume Settings.................................................................................................3-10Ring Volume ................................................................................................3-10Beeper Volume............................................................................................3-10Speaker Volume ..........................................................................................3-10

4 Security features

Setting Lock .........................................................................................................4-1Setting up the password ................................................................................4-1Changing the Setting Lock password ............................................................4-2Turning Setting Lock on.................................................................................4-2Turning Setting Lock off.................................................................................4-2

Memory Security..................................................................................................4-3Setting up the password ................................................................................4-3Changing the Memory Security password.....................................................4-4Turning Memory Security on .........................................................................4-4Turning Memory Security off .........................................................................4-4

Section II - Fax & Telephone

5 Sending a fax

How to Fax...........................................................................................................5-1Entering Fax mode ........................................................................................5-1Sending a fax from the ADF ..........................................................................5-1Sending a fax from the scanner glass ...........................................................5-1Canceling a fax in progress ...........................................................................5-2Dual Access...................................................................................................5-2

Sending a fax manually .......................................................................................5-3Manual transmission......................................................................................5-3Sending a fax at the end of a conversation ...................................................5-3Out of Memory message ...............................................................................5-3

Broadcasting........................................................................................................5-4Additional Sending Operations ............................................................................5-5

Sending faxes using multiple settings ...........................................................5-5Contrast .........................................................................................................5-5Changing fax Resolution ...............................................................................5-5Real Time Transmission................................................................................5-6Overseas Mode .............................................................................................5-7Delayed Faxing..............................................................................................5-8Delayed Batch Transmission ........................................................................5-8Checking job status and canceling a waiting job ...........................................5-9Composing the electronic Cover Page ..........................................................5-9

v

6 Receiving a fax

Receive Mode......................................................................................................6-1Fax Receive Settings...........................................................................................6-2

Ring Delay .....................................................................................................6-2F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)...............................................................6-3Tray Use for Fax mode..................................................................................6-3Printing a reduced incoming fax (Auto Reduction) ........................................6-4Receiving a fax at the end of a conversation.................................................6-4Changing the remote codes ..........................................................................6-5Easy Receive.................................................................................................6-5Printing a fax from the memory .....................................................................6-6Setting the Print Density ................................................................................6-6Operation from extension telephones............................................................6-6Using a cordless external handset ................................................................6-6For Fax/Tel mode only...................................................................................6-7

7 Dialing and phone options

How to dial...........................................................................................................7-1Manual dialing ...............................................................................................7-1One-Touch Dialing.........................................................................................7-1Speed-Dialing ................................................................................................7-1Search ...........................................................................................................7-2Fax Redial .....................................................................................................7-2

Storing numbers ..................................................................................................7-3Storing a Pause .............................................................................................7-3Storing One-Touch Dial numbers ..................................................................7-3Storing Speed-Dial numbers .........................................................................7-4Changing One-Touch and Speed-Dial numbers ...........................................7-4Setting up Groups for Broadcasting ..............................................................7-5Access codes and credit card numbers.........................................................7-6Tone or Pulse ................................................................................................7-6

Phone line services..............................................................................................7-6Distinctive Ring..............................................................................................7-6Caller ID.........................................................................................................7-8

8 Remote Fax Options

Fax Forwarding....................................................................................................8-1Programming your pager number........................................................................8-2Fax Storage .........................................................................................................8-2PC Fax Receive...................................................................................................8-3Changing Remote Fax Options ...........................................................................8-4

Turning off Remote Fax Options ...................................................................8-4Remote Retrieval.................................................................................................8-5

Setting the Remote Access Code..................................................................8-5Using your Remote Access Code..................................................................8-5

Remote commands..............................................................................................8-6Retrieving fax messages ...............................................................................8-7Changing the Fax Forwarding number ..........................................................8-7

vi

9 Printing reports

Fax reports...........................................................................................................9-1Transmission Verification Report...................................................................9-1Fax Journal (Activity report)...........................................................................9-1

Additional reports.................................................................................................9-2

10 Polling

Polling Operation ...............................................................................................10-1Polling Receive ..................................................................................................10-1

Set up to receive polling ..............................................................................10-1Sequential Polling........................................................................................10-1

Polled Transmit..................................................................................................10-2Setup for Polled Transmit ...........................................................................10-2

Section III - Copy

11 Making copies

How to copy .......................................................................................................11-1Entering Copy mode....................................................................................11-1Printable Area..............................................................................................11-1Making a single copy ...................................................................................11-1Making multiple copies ................................................................................11-2Tray Use for Copy mode .............................................................................11-2Cancel copying ............................................................................................11-2

Copy options......................................................................................................11-3Increasing copy quality ................................................................................11-3Enlarging or reducing the image copied ......................................................11-4Making N in 1 copies or a poster (page layout) ...........................................11-5Sorting copies using the ADF ......................................................................11-7Adjusting Brightness, Contrast and Color....................................................11-7

Out of Memory message ...................................................................................11-9Legal limitations .................................................................................................11-9

Section IV - Software and Network Features

Section V - Appendixes

A Important information

Standard telephone and FCC NoticesThese notices are in effect on models sold and used in the United States only................................................................................................ A-1

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity (USA only) ................................................................................................ A-2

vii

Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only) .............................. A-3For your safety.............................................................................................. A-3Disconnect device ........................................................................................ A-3LAN connection ............................................................................................ A-3Laser safety .................................................................................................. A-3FDA regulations............................................................................................ A-4Important safety instructions......................................................................... A-4

Choosing a location ............................................................................................ A-6To use the machine safely............................................................................ A-7

Trademarks....................................................................................................... A-10

B Menu and Features

On-screen programming..................................................................................... B-1Menu table.................................................................................................... B-1Memory storage............................................................................................ B-1

Menu keys .......................................................................................................... B-2Menu Table......................................................................................................... B-3Copy options key .............................................................................................. B-14Entering Text .................................................................................................... B-15

C Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Troubleshooting.................................................................................................. C-1Error messages ............................................................................................ C-1Document jams............................................................................................. C-6Paper jams ................................................................................................... C-7Paper Jam A1 / Paper Jam A2 ..................................................................... C-8Paper Jam B................................................................................................. C-9Paper Jam C............................................................................................... C-10If you are having difficulty with your machine ............................................. C-11Improving the print quality .......................................................................... C-16Setting Dial Tone Detection........................................................................ C-20Compatibility ............................................................................................... C-20

Routine maintenance........................................................................................ C-20Cleaning the outside of the machine .......................................................... C-21Cleaning the scanner glass ........................................................................ C-22Cleaning to prevent paper jams.................................................................. C-22Cleaning the laser glass ............................................................................. C-24

Replacing the consumable items...................................................................... C-26Toner cartridges ......................................................................................... C-28Waste toner pack........................................................................................ C-31OPC belt cartridge ...................................................................................... C-33

Machine Information ......................................................................................... C-35Checking the Serial Numbers..................................................................... C-35Checking the Page Counters...................................................................... C-35Checking remaining life of parts ................................................................. C-35

viii

D Optional accessories

Optional accessories .......................................................................................... D-1Lower tray unit (Paper Feed Unit Type 1000) ..............................................D-1Memory Unit Type C (64/128/256 MB)......................................................... D-3Installing additional memory ......................................................................... D-3

E Specifications

Product description ............................................................................................. E-1General ............................................................................................................... E-1Print media.......................................................................................................... E-2Fax...................................................................................................................... E-3Copier ................................................................................................................. E-4Scanner .............................................................................................................. E-5Printer ................................................................................................................. E-6Interfaces ............................................................................................................ E-6Computer requirements ...................................................................................... E-7Consumable items .............................................................................................. E-8Network (LAN) .................................................................................................... E-9

F Glossary

G Index

SECTION I GENERAL

Section IGeneral

1. General Information

2. Loading paper and documents

3. Setup

4. Security features

1 - 1

1Using this Guide

Finding information

All the chapter headings and subheadings are listed in the Table of Contents. You will be able to find information about a specific feature or operation by checking the Index at the back of this Guide.

Symbols used in this Guide

Throughout this Guide you will see special symbols alerting you to important warnings, notes and actions. Special fonts identify keys you should press, messages that appear on the LCD, and important points or related topics.

General Information

Bold Bold typeface identifies specific keys on the machine’s control panel.

Italics Italicized typeface emphasizes an important point or refers you to a related topic.

Courier Courier type face identifies the messages on the LCD of the machine.

Warnings or cautions tell you what to do to prevent possible personal injury.

Electrical Hazard icons alert you to a possible electrical shock.

Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch machine parts that are hot.

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Improper Setup icons alerts you to devices and operations that are not compatible with the machine.

Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or give tips about how the operation works with other features.

General Information

1 - 2

1

How to access the complete User’s Guide This User’s Guide does not contain all the information about the machine such as how to use the advanced features of the Fax, Printer, Scanner, PC Fax and Network. When you are ready to learn detailed information about these operations, read the complete User’s Guide located in the ‘Documentation’ section of the CD-ROM.

To view Documentation

1 Turn on your PC. Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

2 If the model name screen appears, click your model name.

3 If the language screen appears, click your language.

The CD-ROM main menu will appear.

NoteIf this window does not appear, use Windows® Explorer to run the setup.exe program from the root directory of the CD-ROM.

4 Click Documentation.

5 Click the documentation you want to read.

• Quick Setup Guide: Setup and Software Installation Instructions

• User’s Guide (3 manuals): User’s Guide for stand-alone operations, Software User’s Guide and Network User’s Guide

• PaperPort® User’s Guide: Document Management Software

How to find Scanning instructions

There are several ways you can scan documents. You can find the instructions as follows:

Software User's Guide:

■ Scanning in Chapter 2

(For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP/Windows NT®

Workstation Version 4.0)

■ ControlCenter2 in Chapter 3

(For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP/Windows NT®


■ Network Scanning in Chapter 4

PaperPort® User's Guide

■ Instructions for scanning directly from ScanSoft® PaperPort®

Chapter 1

1 - 3

Control panel overview

1 One-Touch KeysThese 8 keys give you instant access to 16 previously stored numbers.

2 ShiftTo access One-Touch numbers 9 to 16, hold down Shift as you press the One-Touch key.

3 Copy keys (Temporary settings):

Enlarge/ReduceLets you reduce or enlarge copies depending upon the ratio you select.

OptionsYou can quickly and easily select temporary settings for copying.

4 Mode keys:

FaxLets you access Fax mode.

ScanLets you access Scan mode.

CopyLets you access Copy mode.

5 Menu keys:

Menu/SetThe same key is used for Menu and Set operations.Lets you access the Menu to program and store your settings in the machine.

Volume keys

When listening to the speaker in Fax mode or on standby, you can press these keys to adjust the volume.

▼ Search/Speed DialLets you look up numbers that are stored in the dialing memory. It also lets you dial stored numbers by pressing # and a three-digit number.

Press to scroll forward or backward to a menu selection.▲ or ▼

Press to scroll through the menus and options.

▲

▲

▲

▲

General Information

1 - 4

1

6 Dial PadUse these keys to dial telephone or fax numbers and as a keyboard for entering information into the machine.The # key lets you temporarily switch the dialing mode during a telephone call from Pulse to Tone.

7 Black StartLets you start sending faxes or making copies in black & white.

Color StartLets you start making copies in full color.

8 Stop/ExitStops an operation or exits from the menu.

9 Secure PrintLets you print secured print data saved in the machine’s memory if you enter the four-digit password. (For details about using this feature, see Chapter 1 in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

@ Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)Displays messages on the screen to help you set up and use your machine.

A Fax and telephone keys:

Redial/PauseRedials the last number you called. It also inserts a pause in quick dial numbers.

HookPress before dialing if you want to make sure a fax machine will answer, and then press Black Start. Also, press this key after picking up the handset of an external telephone during the F/T double/pseudo-ring.

ResolutionSets the resolution when you send a fax.

B Print key:

Job CancelYou can cancel a print job and clear the machine’s memory.

Chapter 1

1 - 5

About fax machines

Custom features

Do you have Voice Mail on the phone line?

If you have Voice Mail on the phone line where you will install your new machine, there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail and the machine may conflict with each other while receiving incoming calls.

Why should there be problems?

Since both the machine and Voice Mail will pick up the call, after the number of rings you have set, each of them has the ability to keep the other from receiving calls.

For example, if Voice Mail is set to answer after two rings and your machine is set to answer after four, Voice Mail will stop your machine from receiving faxes.

If you set Voice Mail and the machine to answer after the same number of rings, there is no way of knowing which one will answer first. It is important to remember that neither Voice Mail nor the machine can pass the call back to the other after the call has been answered.

How can you avoid possible problems?

A very good way to avoid problems like the one mentioned, is to get a second phone number on your present phone line.

Many people with Voice Mail choose an alternative service, which is called “Distinctive Ring”, and they are very satisfied with it. (See Distinctive Ring on page 7-6.)

Another way to avoid possible problems is to replace Voice Mail with an answering machine. Your machine is designed to work with an answering machine or TAD (telephone answering device). (See Connecting an external telephone answering device (TAD) on page 3-5.)

General Information

1 - 6

1

Fax tones and handshake

When someone is sending a fax, the fax machine sends fax calling tones (CNG tones). These are quiet, intermittent beeps every 4-seconds. You’ll hear them after you dial and press Black Start and they will continue for about 60 seconds after dialing. During that time, the sending machine must begin the “handshake” or connection with the receiving machine.

Each time you use automatic procedures to send a fax, you are sending CNG tones over the phone line. You will soon learn to listen for these quiet beeps each time you answer a phone on your fax line, so you will know if you are receiving a fax message.

The receiving fax responds with fax receiving tones, which are loud, chirping sounds. A receiving fax chirps for about 40 seconds over the phone line, and the LCD shows Receiving.

If your machine is set to the Fax Only mode, it will answer every call automatically with fax receiving tones. If the other person hangs up, your machine will continue to send the “chirps” for about 40 seconds, and the LCD continues to show Receiving. To cancel receiving, press Stop/Exit.

The fax ‘handshake’ is the time in which the sending machine’s CNG tones and the receiving machine’s “chirps” overlap. This must be for at least 2 to 4 seconds, so both machines can understand how each is sending and receiving the fax. The handshake cannot begin until the call is answered, and the CNG tones only last for about 60 seconds after the number is dialed. So it is important for the receiving machine to answer the call in as few rings as possible.

ECM (Error Correction Mode)

The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is a way for the machine to check a fax transmission while it is in progress. If the machine detects errors during fax transmission, it resends the pages of the fax that had an error. ECM transmissions are only possible between fax machines that both have this feature. If they do, you may send and receive fax messages that are continuously being checked by the machine.

If this feature stops working, delete your faxes from the memory.

2 - 1

2Acceptable paper and other media

Recommended paper

■ To get the best output quality and to avoid any damage, use smooth white paper.

■ Before you buy a lot of paper, please test some to make sure that the paper is suitable.

■ Use neutral paper. Do not use acidic or alkaline paper.

■ Print quality will vary depending on the paper being used.

Type and size of paper

The machine loads paper from the installed standard paper tray or optional lower tray.

Standard paper tray

Since the standard paper tray is a universal type, you can use any of the paper types and sizes (one paper type and size at a time) listed in the table in Paper capacity of the paper trays on page 2-2. The tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper (20 lb or 80 g/m2) or up to 15 envelopes (paper can be loaded up to the top line of the maximum paper mark on the sliding paper width guide).

Optional lower tray (Paper Feed Unit Type 1000)

The optional lower tray can hold up to 530 sheets of Letter/A4 paper (20 lb or 80 g/m2). The maximum capacity is 1.76 in. (44 mm) paper height.

The names for the paper trays in the machine driver and this Guide are as follows:

Loading paper and documents

IMPORTANT

Do not load envelopes, transparencies, labels or thick paper (more than 28 lb or 105 g/m2) into the optional lower tray unit. It may cause paper jams.

Tray and optional unit Name

Standard paper tray Tray 1

Optional lower tray Tray 2


2 - 2

2

Paper capacity of the paper trays

* H/H = High temperature/High humidity

Recommended paper specifications

The following paper specifications are suitable for this machine.

Standard Paper Tray (Tray 1)

Optional lower tray (Tray 2)

Paper size A4, Letter, B5 (JIS/ISO), Executive, A5, COM10, DL, 4.1 x 8.3 in. to 8.5 x 11.7 in. (104.8 x 210 mm to 215.9 x 297 mm)

A4, Letter, B5 (JIS/ISO), Executive

Number of sheets Plain paper Up to 250 sheets

(20 lb or 80 g/m2)

Up to 530 sheets

(20 lb or 80 g/m2)

Thick/Thicker paper

Up to 40 sheets(44 lb or 165 g/m2)

Up to 1.76 in. (44 mm) loading height

Transparencies Up to 50 sheets N/A

Labels Up to 80 sheets N/A

Envelopes Up to 15 sheets or 7 sheets for H/H* condition.

N/A

Basis weight (lb (g/m2)) 16-24 (75-90)

Thickness (µm) 80-110

Roughness (sec.) Higher than 20

Stiffness (cm3/100) 90-150

Grain direction Long grain

Volume resistivity (ohm) 10e9-10e11

Surface resistivity (ohm-cm) 10e10-10e12

Filler CaCO3 (Neutral)

Ash content (wt%) Below 23

Brightness (%) Higher than 80

Opacity (%) Higher than 85

Chapter 2

2 - 3

Handling and using special paper

The machine is designed to work well with most types of xerographic and bond paper. However, some paper variables may have an effect on print quality or handling reliability. Always test samples of paper before purchasing to ensure desirable performance. Some important guidelines when selecting paper are:

■ Supplier should be informed that the paper or envelopes will be used in a color laser machine.

■ Preprinted paper must use inks that can withstand the temperature of the machine's fusing process (392 degrees Fahrenheit or 200 degrees centigrade for a period of 0.1 seconds).

■ If you have selected a cotton bond paper, paper having a rough surface, such as cockle or laid finished paper or paper that is wrinkled or puckered, the paper may exhibit degraded performance.

Types of paper to avoid

IMPORTANT

Some types of paper may not perform well or may cause damage to your machine.

Do not use paper:

■ that is highly textured

■ that is extremely smooth or shiny

■ that is curled or warped

■ that is coated or has a chemical finish

■ that is damaged, creased or folded

■ that exceeds the recommended weight specification in this guide

■ with tabs and staples

■ with letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography

■ that is multipart or carbonless

■ that is designed for inkjet printing

If you use any of the types of paper listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage is not covered under any our warranty or service agreement.


2 - 4

2

Envelopes

Most envelopes will be suitable for your machine. However, some envelopes will have feed and print-quality problems because of the way they have been made. A suitable envelope should have edges with straight, well-creased folds and the leading edge should not be thicker than two pieces of paper. The envelope should lie flat and not be of baggy or flimsy construction. You should buy quality envelopes from a supplier who understands that you will be using the envelopes in a laser machine.

Envelopes can only be fed from Tray#1.

NoteWe will not recommend a particular envelope because envelope manufacturers may change the envelope specifications. You are responsible for the quality and performance of the envelopes you use.

Before you put envelopes in the tray, check the following:

■ Envelopes should have a lengthwise sealing flap.

■ The sealing flaps should be folded crisply and correctly (irregularly cut or folded envelopes may cause paper jams).

■ Envelopes should consist of two layers of paper in the area circled in Figure 1.

Note■ Before you print envelopes, you must ‘fan’

the stack to avoid paper jams and misfeeds.

■ Before you print a lot of envelopes, test one to make sure that the print results are what you want.

■ Envelope joints that are sealed by the manufacturer should be secure.

■ Do not put different types of paper in the paper tray at the same time because it may cause paper jams or misfeeds.

■ For proper printing, you must choose the same paper size from your software application as the paper in the tray.

■ We recommend that you do not print within 0.6 in. (15 mm) of the edges of envelopes.

■ See Acceptable paper and other media on page 2-1.

Feeding direction

Figure 1

Chapter 2

2 - 5

Types of envelopes to avoid

IMPORTANT

Do not use envelopes:

■ that are damaged, curled, wrinkled, or an unusual shape

■ that are extremely shiny or textured

■ with clasps, snaps or tie strings

■ with self-adhesive closures

■ that are of a baggy construction

■ that are not sharply creased

■ that are embossed (have raised writing on them)

■ that were previously printed by a laser machine

■ that are pre-printed on the inside

■ that cannot be arranged neatly when stacked

■ that are made of paper that weighs more than the paper weight specifications for the machine

■ with edges that are not straight or consistently square

■ with windows, holes, cut-outs or perforations

■ with sealing flaps that have not been folded at purchase

■ with sealing flaps as shown in Figure 2

■ with each side folded as shown in Figure 3

If you use any of the types of envelopes listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage is not covered under any our warranty or service agreement.

Figure 2 Figure 3


2 - 6

2

Labels and transparencies

The machine will print on most types of labels and transparencies designed for use with a laser machine. Labels should have an adhesive that is acrylic-based since such material is more stable at the high temperatures in the fusing unit. Adhesives should not come in contact with any part of the machine, because the label stock may stick to the OPC belt or rollers and cause jams and print quality problems. No adhesive should be exposed between the labels. Labels should be arranged so that they cover the entire length and width of the sheet. Using labels with spaces may result in labels peeling off and causing serious jams or print problems.

All labels and transparencies used in this machine must be able to withstand a temperature of 392 degrees Fahrenheit (200 degrees centigrade) for a period of 0.1 seconds.

Label and transparency sheets should not exceed the paper weight specifications described in this User's Guide. Labels and transparencies exceeding this specification may not feed or print properly and may cause damage to your machine.

Transparencies and labels can be fed from Tray 1 only.

Types of labels and transparencies to avoid

Do not use labels or transparencies that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or an unusual shape.

IMPORTANT

■ Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet exposed because your machine will be damaged.

■ When feeding transparencies, use the recommended type for laser machines. For detailed information on the specification of the proper transparencies to purchase, call your dealer or Customer Service.

Chapter 2

2 - 7

Printable areaThe edges of the paper that cannot be printed on are shown below.

Portrait

Landscape

Note

We recommend that you do not print within 0.6 in. (15 mm) of the edges of envelopes.

For all available paper sizes

1 0.17 in. (4.2 mm)

2 0.17 in. (4.2 mm)

3 0.17 in. (4.2 mm)

4 0.17 in. (4.2 mm)

1

2

3

4For all available paper sizes

1 0.17 in. (4.2 mm)

2 0.17 in. (4.2 mm)

3 0.17 in. (4.2 mm)

4 0.17 in. (4.2 mm)

1

2

3

4


2 - 8

2

Loading paper and envelopesThe machine can feed paper from the standard paper tray or optional lower tray.

When you put paper into the paper tray, note the following:

■ The machine detects standard paper sizes in the paper trays. If you load small size paper or envelopes, you will need to manually set the paper size in the Small Paper setting. (See Paper Size on page 3-9.)

■ If your application software supports paper size selection on the print menu, you can select it through the software. If your application software does not support it, you can set the paper size in the printer driver or by using the control panel buttons.

■ Before using paper that has holes in it, such as organizer sheets, you must ‘fan’ the stack to avoid paper jams and misfeeds.

To load paper or other media in the paper tray


2 While pressing the paper guide release lever, slide the adjusters to fit the paper size. Check that the guides are firmly in the slots.

3 Fan the stack of paper well to avoid paper jams and mis-feeds.

Chapter 2

2 - 9

4 Put paper in the paper tray.

5 Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine and unfold the output paper tray support flap before you use the machine.

NoteWhen you put paper in the paper tray, please remember the following:

■ Check that the paper is flat in the tray and below the maximum paper mark, and that the paper guides are touching the sides of the paper stack.

■ The side to be printed on must be face up.

Printing on envelopes

Adjust the paper length and width guides to fit the envelopes that are going to be used.

You can load envelopes into the standard paper tray only.

PAPER

LABEL ENVELOPE

TRANSPARENCY CARDSTOCK

ABC

Output paper tray support flap


2 - 10

2

Loading documentsYou can send a fax, make copies, and scan from the ADF (automatic document feeder) and from the scanner glass.

Using the ADF (automatic document feeder)

The ADF can hold up to 35 pages and feeds each sheet individually. Use standard 20 lb (80 g/m2) paper and always fan the pages before putting them in the ADF.

■ Make sure documents written with ink are completely dry.

■ Documents to be faxed must be from 5.8 to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm) wide and 5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 356 mm) long.

1 Fan the pages well. Make sure you put the documents face up, top edge first in the ADF until you feel them touch the feed roller.

2 Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of your documents.

3 Unfold the ADF document output support flap.

IMPORTANT

■ DO NOT leave thick documents on the scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may jam.

■ DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper-clipped, pasted or taped.

■ DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or fabric.

IMPORTANT

DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.

Chapter 2

2 - 11

Using the scanner glass

You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or scan pages of a book or one page at a time. Documents can be up to 8.5 in. (215.9 mm) wide and 11 in. (297 mm) long.

NoteTo use the scanner glass, the ADF must be empty.

1 Lift the document cover.

2 Using the document guidelines on the left, center the document face down on the scanner glass.

3 Close the document cover.

IMPORTANT

If the document is a book or is thick, do not slam the cover or press on it.

Place documents Face Down on the scanner glass.

3 - 1

3

3

Date and TimeWhen the machine is not in use it will display the date and time. If you set up the Station ID the date and time displayed by your machine will be printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, you may have to reset the date and time. No other settings will be affected.

1 Press Menu/Set, 0, 2.

2 Enter the last two digits of the year.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Enter two digits for the month.

Press Menu/Set.

(For example, enter 09 for September, or 10 for October.)

4 Enter two digits for the day.

Press Menu/Set.

(For example, enter 06 for 6th.)

5 Enter the time in 24-Hour format.

Press Menu/Set.

(For example, enter 15:25 for 3:25 P.M.)

6 Press Stop/Exit.

The LCD now shows the date and time whenever the machine is idle and in Fax mode.

When the machine is in Sleep mode, the LCD shows Sleep. (See Sleep Time on page 3-8.)

Automatic Daylight Savings Time

You can set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Savings Time. It will reset itself forward one hour in the Spring and backward one hour in the Fall. Make sure you have set the correct date and time in the Date/Time setting.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select On (or Off).

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Setup

Initial Setup2.Date/Time

General Setup5.Auto Daylight

Chapter 3

3 - 2

Station IDYou should store your name or company name and fax number so they print on all fax pages you send.


2 Enter your fax number (up to 20 digits).

Press Menu/Set.

3 Enter your telephone number (up to 20 digits).

Press Menu/Set.

(If the telephone number and fax number are the same, enter the same number again.)

Note■ You cannot enter a hyphen in the number.

To enter a space press once between numbers.

■ The telephone number you enter is only used for Cover Page features. (See Composing the electronic Cover Page on page 5-9.)

4 Use the dial pad to enter your name (up to 20 characters). (See Entering Text on page B-15).

Press Menu/Set.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteIf the Station ID has already been programmed, the LCD will ask you to press 1to make a change or 2 to exit without changing.

Initial Setup3.Station ID

▲

NOTICE (For USA)

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such messages clearly contain, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity or individual.

To program this information into your machine, see Date and Time on page 3-1 and Station ID on page 3-2.

Setup

3 - 3

3

LCD ContrastYou can change the contrast to help the LCD look lighter or darker.


2 Press ▲ to increase the contrast.

—OR—

Press ▼ to decrease the contrast.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Phone line settings

Tone and Pulse dialing mode

Your machine comes set for Tone dialing service. If you have Pulse dialing service (rotary), you need to change the dialing mode.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Pulse (or Tone).

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Roll over phone lines

A roll over phone system is a group of two or more separate telephone lines that pass incoming calls to each other if they are busy. The calls are usually passed down or “rolled over” to the next available phone line in a preset order.

Your machine can work in a roll over system as long as it is the last number in the sequence, so the call cannot roll away. Do not put the machine on any of the other numbers; when the other lines are busy and a second fax call is received, the fax call would be transferred to a line that does not have a fax machine. Your machine will work best on a dedicated line.

Two-line phone system

A two-line phone system is nothing more than two separate phone numbers on the same wall outlet. The two phone numbers can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or combined into one jack (RJ14). Your machine must be plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14 jacks may be equal in size and appearance and both may contain four wires (black, red, green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in a two-line phone and see if it can access both lines. If it can, you must separate the line for your machine. (See Easy Receive on page 6-5.)

General Setup7.LCD Contrast

Initial Setup4.Tone/Pulse

Chapter 3

3 - 4

Converting telephone wall outlets

There are three ways to convert to an RJ11 jack. The first two ways may require assistance from the telephone company. You can change the wall outlets from one RJ14 jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or, you can have an RJ11 wall outlet installed and slave or jump one of the phone numbers to it.

The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your machine is on Line 1, plug the machine into L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triple adapter.

Installing machine, external two-line TAD and two-line telephone

When you are installing an external two-line telephone answering device (TAD) and a two-line telephone, your machine must be isolated on one line at both the wall jack and at the TAD. The most common connection is to put the machine on Line 2, which is explained in the following steps. The back of the two-line TAD must have two telephone jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other labeled L2. You will need at least three telephone line cords, the one that came with your machine and two for your external two-line TAD. You will need a fourth line cord if you add a two-line telephone.

1 Place the two-line TAD and the two-line telephone next to your machine.

2 Plug one end of the telephone line cord for your machine into the L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other end into the LINE jack on the back of the machine.

3 Plug one end of the first telephone line cord for your TAD into the L1 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other end into the L1 or L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.

4 Plug one end of the second telephone line cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of the two-line TAD. Plug the other end into the EXT. jack on the left side of the machine.

You can keep two-line telephones on other wall outlets as always. There are two ways to add a two-line telephone to the machine’s wall outlet. You can plug the telephone line cord from the two-line telephone into the L1+L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Or, you can plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack of the two-line TAD.

RJ14

RJ11

RJ14

Triplex AdapterTriplex Adapter Two Line Phone

External Two Line TAD machine

Setup

3 - 5

3

Multi-line connections (PBX)

Most offices use a central telephone system. While it is often relatively simple to connect the machine to a key system or a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), we suggest that you contact the company that installed your telephone system and ask them to connect the machine for you. It is advisable to have a separate line for the machine.

If the machine is to be connected to a multi-line system, ask your installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the unit from being activated each time a telephone call is received.

If you are installing the machine to work with a PBX

1 It is not guaranteed that the unit will operate properly under all circumstances with a PBX. Any cases of difficulty should be reported first to the company that handles your PBX.

2 If all incoming calls will be answered by a switchboard operator, it is recommended that the Receive Mode be set to Manual. All incoming calls should initially be regarded as telephone calls.

Connecting an external or extension telephone

You can connect a separate telephone to your machine as shown in the diagram below.

Connect the telephone line cord to the jack labeled EXT. in the left of the machine.

When you are using an external phone, the LCD shows Telephone.

Connecting an external telephone answering device (TAD)

Sequence

You may choose to connect an external answering device. However, when you have an external TAD on the same telephone line as the machine, the TAD answers all calls and the machine “listens” for fax calling (CNG) tones. If it hears them, the machine takes over the call and receives the fax. If it does not hear CNG tones, the machine lets the TAD continue playing your outgoing message so your caller can leave you a voice message.

Extension Telephone

External Telephone

Chapter 3

3 - 6

The TAD must answer within four rings (the recommended setting is two rings). The machine cannot hear CNG tones until the TAD has answered the call, and with four rings there are only 8 to 10 seconds of CNG tones left for the fax “handshake”. Make sure you carefully follow the instructions in this guide for recording your outgoing message. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your external answering machine if it exceeds five rings.

Note■ If you do not receive all your faxes, reduce

the Ring Delay setting on your external TAD.

■ If You Subscribe to your Telephone Company’s Distinctive Ring Service: You may connect an external TAD to a separate wall jack only if you subscribe to your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service, have registered the distinctive ring pattern on your machine, and use that number as a fax number. The recommended setting is at least four rings on the external TAD when you have the telephone company’s Distinctive Ring Service. You cannot use the Toll Saver setting.

■ If You Do Not Subscribe to Distinctive Ring Service:You must plug your TAD into the EXT. jack of your machine. If your TAD is plugged into a wall jack, both your machine and the TAD will try to control the phone line. (See illustration shown next.)

When the TAD answers a call, the LCD shows Telephone.

Connections

The external TAD must be plugged into the back of the machine, into the jack labeled EXT. Your machine cannot work properly if you plug the TAD into a wall jack (unless you are using Distinctive Ring).

1 Plug the telephone line cord from the telephone wall jack into the back of the machine, in the jack labeled LINE.

2 Plug the telephone line cord from your external TAD into the back of the machine, in the jack labeled EXT. (Make sure this cord is connected to the TAD at the TAD’s telephone line jack, and not its handset jack.)

3 Set your external TAD to four rings or less. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting does not apply.)

4 Record the outgoing message on your external TAD.

Improper Setup

Unless you are using Distinctive Ring, do not connect a TAD elsewhere on the same phone line.

TAD

TAD

Setup

3 - 7

3

5 Set the TAD to answer calls.

6 Set the Receive Mode to External TAD.(See Receive Mode on page 6-1.)

Recording outgoing message (OGM) on an external TAD

Timing is important in recording this message.

1 Record 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. (This allows your machine time to listen for the fax CNG tones of automatic transmissions before they stop.)

2 Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.

3 End your 20-second message by giving your Fax Receive Code for people sending manual faxes. For example:“After the beep, leave a message or send a fax by pressing 51 and Start.”

NoteWe recommend beginning your OGM with an initial 5-second silence because the machine cannot hear fax tones over a resonant or loud voice. You may try omitting this pause, but if your machine has trouble receiving, then you must re-record the OGM to include it.

Ecology features

Toner Save

You can conserve toner using this feature. When you set Toner Save to On, print appears lighter. The default setting is Off.



Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteWe do not recommend Toner Save for printing photo or gray scale images.

Ecology1.Toner Save

Chapter 3

3 - 8

Sleep Time

Setting the Sleep Time reduces power consumption by turning off the fuser inside the machine while it is idle. You can choose how long the machine is idle (from 00 to 99 minutes) before it goes into sleep mode. The timer is automatically reset when the machine receives a Fax or PC data or makes a copy. The factory setting is 30 minutes. While the machine is in sleep mode you will see Sleepon the LCD. If you try to print or copy in sleep mode, there will be a short delay while the fuser warms up to its working temperature.


2 Use the dial pad to enter the length of time the machine is idle before it goes into sleep mode (00 to 99).

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Note■ If you want to turn off sleep mode, press

Start (either Black or Color) and Optionssimultaneously in Step 2.

■ If the machine is in Sleep Mode when you change the Sleep Time, the new setting will take effect the next time the machine copies, prints or is turned off and on.

Mode TimerThe machine has three temporary mode keys on the control panel: Fax, Scan and Copy. You can change the number of seconds or minutes the machine takes after the last Scan or Copy operation before it returns to Fax mode. If you select Off, the machine stays in the mode you used last.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select 0 Sec,30 Secs, 1 Min, 2 Mins, 5 Mins or Off.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Ecology2.Sleep Time

General Setup1.Mode Timer

Setup

3 - 9

3

Paper settings

Paper Type

To get the best print quality, set the machine for the type of paper you are using.


—OR—

If you have the optional paper tray, Press Menu/Set, 1, 2, 1 to set the paper type for Tray#1 or Menu/Set, 1, 2, 2 to set the paper type for Tray#2.

2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Thin, Plain,Thick, Thicker or Recycled Paper.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteThe machine ejects paper with printed surfaces face down onto the output paper tray in the front of the machine. When you use transparencies or labels, remove each sheet immediately to prevent smudging or paper jams.

Paper Size

In the standard paper tray, you can use seven sizes of paper for printing copies: Letter, A4, B5, JISB5, Executive, Com10 and DL and two sizes for printing faxes: Letter and A4. The machine automatically detects A4, Letter and Executive paper size that is in the paper tray. However, if you load paper that is B5 or smaller sizes in the paper tray, you will need to change the Small Paper setting at the same time so your machine can print a reduced copy on the page.


—OR—

If you have the optional paper tray, press Menu/Set, 1, 3, 1 to set the paper size for Tray#1 or Menu/Set, 1, 3, 2 to set the paper size for Tray#2.

2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select B5, DL, Com10 or JISB5.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteIf you select Tray#2 in Step 1, you can only select B5 or JISB5.

General Setup2.Paper Type

General Setup3.Small Paper

Chapter 3

3 - 10

Volume Settings

Ring Volume

You can turn the ring Off or you can select the ring volume level.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Low, Med, Highor Off.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

—OR—

You can adjust the ring volume when your machine is idle (not being used).

In mode (Fax), press or to adjust the volume level. Every time you press these keys, the machine will ring so you can hear the active setting as the LCD shows it. The volume changes with each key press. The new setting will stay until you change it again.

Beeper Volume

You can change the beeper volume. The default setting is Med. When the beeper is on, the machine will beep when you press a key, make a mistake, or after you have sent or received a fax.



Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Speaker Volume

You can adjust the machine’s one-way speaker volume.



Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

—OR—

In Fax mode , you can adjust the speaker volume by pressing Hook, and then selecting a speaker volume level.

Press or to adjust the volume level. The LCD shows the setting you are choosing. Each key press changes the volume to the next setting. The new setting will remain until you change it again.

Volume1.Ring

▲ ▲

Volume2.Beeper

Volume3.Speaker

▲ ▲

4 - 1

4

4

You can set up your machine with multiple levels of security using Setting Lock and Memory Security.

Setting LockSetting Lock lets you prevent unauthorized access to the machine settings.

While Setting Lock is On, the following operations are NOT available without a password:

■ Date & Time

■ Station ID

■ Set Quick-Dial (One-Touch Dial, Speed-Dial and Setup Groups)

■ Mode Timer

■ Paper Type

■ Small Paper

■ Volume

■ Auto Daylight

■ Ecology

■ LCD Contrast

■ Memory Security

Setting up the password

Note■ If you have already set the password, you

will not need to set it, again.

■ If you forget the Setting Lock password, please call Customer Service.


2 Enter a four-digit number for the password.

Press Menu/Set.

The LCD shows Verify:

3 Re-enter the password.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Security features

Security2.Setting Lock

Chapter 4

4 - 2

Changing the Setting Lock password


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Set Password.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Enter the registered four-digit password.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Enter a four-digit number for the new password.

Press Menu/Set.

5 If the LCD shows Verify:, re-enter the new password.

Press Menu/Set.

6 Press Stop/Exit.

Turning Setting Lock on


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select On.

Press Menu/Set.


Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Turning Setting Lock off



Press Menu/Set twice.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteIf you enter the wrong Password, the LCD shows Wrong Password. The machine will stay in Setting Lock mode until the registered password is entered.



Security features

4 - 3

4

Memory SecurityMemory Security lets you prevent unauthorized access to the machine. You will not be able to continue to schedule Delayed Faxes or Polling jobs. However, any pre-scheduled Delayed Faxes will be sent even if you turn on Memory Security, so they won’t be lost.

While Memory Security is on, the following operations are available:

■ Receiving faxes into memory (limited by memory capacity)

■ Fax Forwarding (if Fax Forwarding was already on)

■ Paging (if Paging was already on)

■ Remote Retrieval (if Fax Storage was already on)

While Memory Security is on, the following operations are NOT available:

■ Printing received faxes

■ Sending faxes

■ Copying

■ PC printing

■ Scanning

■ PC Fax Receive

Note■ To print the faxes in memory, turn off

Memory Security.

■ You must turn off PC Fax Receive before you can turn on Memory Security. (See Turning off Remote Fax Options on page 8-4.)

Setting up the password

Note■ If you have already set the password, you

will not need to set it, again.

■ If you forget the Memory Security password, please call Customer Service.


2 Enter a four-digit number for the password.

Press Menu/Set.

The LCD shows Verify:

3 Re-enter the password.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Security1.Mem Security

Chapter 4

4 - 4

Changing the Memory Security password


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Set Password.

Press Menu/Set.


Press Menu/Set.

4 Enter a four-digit number for the new password.

Press Menu/Set.

5 If the LCD shows Verify:, re-enter the new password.

Press Menu/Set.

6 Press Stop/Exit.

Turning Memory Security on


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Set Security.

Press Menu/Set.


Press Menu/Set.

The machine goes offline and the LCD shows Secure Mode.

NoteIf there is a power failure the data will stay in memory for up to 60 hours.

Turning Memory Security off

1 Press Menu/Set.

Enter the registered four-digit password.

2 Press Menu/Set.

Memory Security is automatically turned off and the LCD shows the date and time.

NoteIf you enter the wrong password, the LCD shows Wrong Password and stays offline. The machine will stay in Secure Mode until the registered password is entered.

Security1.Mem Security

SECTION II FAX & TELEPHONE

Section IIFax & Telephone

5. Sending a fax

6. Receiving a fax

7. Dialing and phone options

8. Remote Fax Options

9. Printing reports

10. Polling

5 - 1

5How to Fax

Entering Fax mode

Before sending faxes or changing fax send or

receiving settings, make sure (Fax) is

illuminated in blue. If it is not, press

(Fax) to enter Fax mode. The default

setting is Fax mode.

Sending a fax from the ADF

This is the easiest way to send a fax.

1 If it is not illuminated in blue, press (Fax).

2 Put the document face up in the ADF.

3 Dial the fax number.

Press Black Start.■ If you press Black Start, the machine

starts scanning the first page.

NoteIf the memory is full, the document will be sent in real time.

Sending a fax from the scanner glass

You can use the scanner glass to fax pages of a book. The documents can be up to Letter/A4 size. Put the document face down on the scanner glass.

Note■ Since you can only scan one page at a

time, it is easier to use the ADF if you are sending a multiple page document.

■ Press Stop/Exit at anytime to cancel.


(Fax).

2 Place the first page on the scanner glass.

3 Dial the fax number.

Press Black Start.■ If you press Black Start, the machine

starts scanning the first page.

4 To send more than one page, press 1and go to Step 5.

—OR—

To send a single page, press 2 (or press Black Start again).

The machine starts sending the document.

Sending a fax

Next Page?1.Yes 2.No(Send)

Sending a fax

5 - 2

5

5 Place the next page on the scanner glass.

Press Menu/Set.

The machine starts scanning the page. (Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each additional page.)

NoteIf the memory is full and you are faxing a single page, it will be sent in real time.

Canceling a fax in progress

If you want to cancel a fax, while the machine is scanning, dialing or sending it, press Stop/Exit.

Dual Access

You can dial a number and begin scanning a fax into memory—even when the machine is sending from memory, receiving faxes, or printing PC data. The LCD shows the new job number.

NoteIf you get an Out of Memory message while scanning the first page of a fax, press Stop/Exit to cancel scanning. If you get an Out of Memory message while scanning a subsequent page, you can press Black Startto send the pages scanned so far, or press Stop/Exit to cancel the operation.

Set Next PageThen Press Set

Chapter 5

5 - 3

Sending a fax manually

Manual transmission

Manual transmission lets you hear the dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.


(Fax).


3 Pick up the handset of the external phone and listen for a dial tone.

—OR—

Press Hook and listen for a dial tone. On the external phone, dial the fax number you want to call. If you pressed Hook,dial using the machine dial pad.

4 When you hear the fax tone, press Black Start.

5 If you picked up the handset of an external phone, replace it.

Sending a fax at the end of a conversation

At the end of a conversation you can send a fax to the other party before you both hang up.

1 Ask the other party to wait for fax tones (beeps) and then to press Start or Send key before hanging up.


(Fax).


Press Black Start.

4 Replace the external phone’s handset.

Out of Memory message

If you get an Out of Memory message while scanning the first page of a fax, press Stop/Exit to cancel the fax.

If you get an Out of Memory message while scanning a subsequent page, you will have the option to press Black Start to send the pages scanned so far, or to press Stop/Exitto cancel the operation.

NoteIf you get an Out of Memory message while faxing and you do not want to delete your stored faxes to clear the memory, you can send the fax in real time. (See Real Time Transmission on page 5-6.)

Sending a fax

5 - 4

5

BroadcastingBroadcasting is when the same fax message is automatically sent to more than one fax number. You can include Groups, One-Touch, Speed-Dial numbers and up to 50 manually dialed numbers in the same broadcast.

Press Menu/Set between each of the numbers. Use Search/Speed Dial to help you choose the numbers easily. (To set up Group dial numbers, see Setting up Groups for Broadcasting on page 7-5.)

After the broadcast is finished, a Broadcast Report will be printed to let you know the results.


(Fax).


3 Enter a number using One-Touch, Speed-Dial, a Group number, Search or manual dialing using the dial pad.

Press Menu/Set after each number.

4 After you have entered all the fax numbers, press Black Start.

Note■ If you did not use up any of the numbers

for Groups, access codes or credit card numbers, you can ‘broadcast’ faxes to as many as 266 different numbers.

■ The available memory will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the number of locations used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the maximum numbers available, you will not be able to use Dual Access and Delayed fax.

■ Enter the long dialing sequence numbers as you would normally, but remember that each One-Touch and Speed-Dial number counts as one number, so the number of locations you can store becomes limited. (See Access codes and credit card numbers on page 7-6.)

■ If the memory is full, press Stop/Exit to stop the job or if more than one page has been scanned, press Black Start to send the portion that is in the memory.

To stop a broadcast in progress


The LCD will display the name, if you stored it, or the fax number being dialed.

2 Press Menu/Set.

The LCD will display:

3 Press 1 to Clear.

The LCD will then display the Broadcast job number and 1.Clear 2.Exit.

4 To cancel the Broadcast, press 1.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

XXXXXXXX1.Clear 2.Exit

Chapter 5

5 - 5

Additional Sending Operations

Sending faxes using multiple settings

When you send a fax you can choose any combination of these settings: cover page, contrast, resolution, overseas mode, delayed fax timer, polling transmission or real time transmission.


(Fax).

After each setting is accepted, the LCD will ask if you want to enter more settings:

2 Press 1 to select more settings. The LCD will return to the Setup Sendmenu.

—OR—

Press 2 if you have finished choosing settings and go to the next step.

Contrast

If your document is very light or very dark, you may want to change the contrast.

Use Light to send a light document.

Use Dark to send a dark document.


(Fax).



4 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto, Light or Dark.

Press Menu/Set.

Changing fax Resolution

After you load the document, you can use Resolution to change the setting temporarily

(for this fax only). In Fax mode , press

Resolution and ▲ or ▼ to select the setting you want, and then press Menu/Set.

—OR—

You can change the default setting.


(Fax).


Other Settings1.Yes 2.No

Setup Send1.Contrast

Setup Send2.Fax Resolution

Sending a fax

5 - 6

5

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the resolution you want.

Press Menu/Set.

NoteYou can choose four different resolution settings for black & white faxes.

Real Time Transmission

When you are sending a fax, the machine will scan the documents into the memory before sending. Then, as soon as the phone line is free, the machine will start dialing and sending.

If the memory is full, the machine will send the document in real time (even if Real Time TX is set to Off).

Sometimes, you may want to send an important document immediately, without waiting for memory transmission. You can set Real Time TX to On for all documents or Next Fax:On for the next fax only.

Sending in real time for all faxes


(Fax).



Press Menu/Set.

Standard Suitable for most typed documents.

Fine Good for small print and transmits a little slower than Standard resolution.

S.Fine Good for small print or artwork and transmits slower than Fine resolution.

Photo Use when the document has varying shades of gray or is a photograph. This has the slowest transmission time.

Setup Send5.Real Time TX

Chapter 5

5 - 7

Sending in real time for the next fax only


(Fax).


3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Next Fax:On(or Next Fax:Off).

Press Menu/Set.

NoteIn Real Time Transmission, the automatic redial feature does not work when using the scanner glass.

Overseas Mode

If you are having difficulty sending a fax overseas due to possible interference on the phone line, we recommend that you turn on the Overseas Mode. After you send a fax using this feature, the feature will turn itself off.


(Fax).




Press Menu/Set.

Setup Send5.Real Time TX

Setup Send9.Overseas Mode

Sending a fax

5 - 8

5

Delayed Faxing

During the day you can store up to 50 faxes in the memory to be sent within 24 hours. These faxes will be sent at the time of day you enter in Step 4.


(Fax).



4 Press Menu/Set to accept the displayed time.

—OR—

Enter the time you want the fax to be sent (in 24-hour format).

(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)

Press Menu/Set.

NoteThe number of pages you can scan into the memory depends on the amount of data that is printed on each page and the amount of data already stored in the memory.

Delayed Batch Transmission

Before sending the delayed faxes, your machine will help you economize by sorting all the faxes in the memory by destination and scheduled time. All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be sent at the same time to the same fax number will be sent as one fax to save transmission time.


(Fax).



Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Setup Send3.Delayed Fax Setup Send

4.Batch TX

Chapter 5

5 - 9

Checking job status and canceling a waiting job

Check which jobs are still waiting in the memory to be sent. (If there are no jobs, the LCD shows No Jobs Waiting.) You can cancel a fax job that is stored and waiting in the memory.


2 If you have more than one job waiting, press ▲ or ▼ to select the job you want to cancel.

Press Menu/Set.

—OR—

If you only have one job waiting, go to Step 3.

3 Press 1 to cancel.

To cancel another job waiting, go to Step 2.

—OR—

Press 2 to exit without canceling.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Composing the electronic Cover Page

When you send a fax, you can send a cover page with your fax message. The Cover Page is sent to the receiving party’s machine. Your Cover Page includes the name or number stored in the One-Touch or Speed-Dial memory. If you are dialing manually, the name is not shown on the Cover Page.

The Cover Page shows your Station ID and the number of pages you are sending. (See Station ID on page 3-2.) If you have Cover Page set to On for all faxes (Menu/Set, 2, 2,7), the number of pages is not shown on the cover page.

You can select a comment to include on your Cover Page.

1.Comment Off

2.Please Call

3.Urgent

4.Confidential

Instead of using one of the preset comments, you can enter two personal messages of your own, up to 27 characters long. Use the chart on B-15 for help entering characters. (See Composing your own comments on page 5-10.)

5.(User Defined)

6.(User Defined)

Most of the Setup Send settings are temporary to allow you to make changes for each fax you send. However, when you set up your Cover Page and Cover Page Comments, you are changing the default settings so they will be available while faxing.

Fax6.Remaining Jobs

Sending a fax

5 - 10

5

Composing your own comments

You can set up two comments of your own.


(Fax).


3 Press ▲ or ▼ to choose 5 or 6 for your own comment.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Use the dial pad to enter your customized comment.

Press Menu/Set.

(See Entering Text on page B-15.)

Cover page for the next fax only

If you have not yet set your Station ID this feature will not work. Make sure you have programmed the Station ID before continuing. (See Station ID on page 3-2.) If you only want to send a Cover Page with a particular fax, your machine will ask you to enter the number of pages you are sending so it can be printed on the Cover Page.


(Fax).



4 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Next Fax:On(or Next Fax:Off).

Press Menu/Set.

5 Press ▲ or ▼ to select one of the standard or your own comments.

Press Menu/Set.

6 Enter two digits to show the number of pages you are sending.

Press Menu/Set.

(For example, press 02 for 2 pages or enter 00 to leave the number of pages blank. If you make a mistake, press to back up and re-enter the number of pages.)

Send a cover page for all faxes

If you have not yet set your Station ID this feature will not work. Make sure you have programmed the Station ID before continuing. (See Station ID on page 3-2.)

The number of pages in your fax is not included when you use this setting.


(Fax).



Press Menu/Set.

4 If you selected On, press ▲ or ▼ to select one of the standard or your own comments.

Press Menu/Set.

Setup Send8.Coverpage Msg

Setup Send7.Coverpg Setup

▲


Chapter 5

5 - 11

Using a printed cover page

If you prefer to use a printed cover page that you can write on, you can print the sample page and attach it to your fax.


(Fax).


3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Sample.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Black Start. Your machine prints a copy of your cover page.


6 - 1

6

6

Receive ModeThere are four different Receive Modes for your machine. You can choose the mode that best suits your needs.

Receiving a fax

LCD How it works When to use it

Fax Only

(automatic receive)

The machine automatically answers every call as a fax.

For dedicated fax lines.

Fax/Tel

(fax and telephone)

(with an external or extension telephone only)

The machine controls the line and automatically answers every call. If the call is a fax it will receive the fax. If the call is not a fax it will ring (pseudo/double ring) for you to pick up the call.

Use this mode if you expect to receive lots of fax messages and few telephone calls. You cannot have an answering machine on the same line, even if it is on a separate telephone wall jack on the same line. You cannot use the telephone company’s Voice Mail in this mode.

External TAD

(with an external answering device only)

The external answering device (TAD) automatically answers every call.

Voice messages are stored on the external TAD. If it is a fax call, the machine receives the fax.

Use this mode if you have connected an answering machine to the EXT jack of your machine.

The External TAD setting works only with an external answering machine. Ring Delay does not work in this setting.

Manual

(manual receive)

(with an external or extension telephone only)

You control the phone line and must answer every call yourself unless you are using the Distinctive Ring feature.

Use this mode if you do not receive many fax messages, use Distinctive Ring, or if you are using a computer on the same line.

If you answer and hear fax tones, wait until the machine takes over the call, then hang up. (See Easy Receive on page 6-5.)

Chapter 6

6 - 2

To select or change your Receive Mode


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fax Only,Fax/Tel, External TAD or Manual.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Fax Receive Settings

Ring Delay

The Ring Delay sets the number of times the machine rings before it answers in Fax Onlyor Fax/Tel mode. If you have extension phones on the same line as the machine or subscribe to the telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service, keep the Ring Delay setting of 4.

(See Operation from extension telephones on page 6-6 and Easy Receive on page 6-5.)


(Fax).


3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select how many times the line rings before the machine answers (00 - 04).

Press Menu/Set.

(If you select 00, the line won’t ring at all.)

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Initial Setup1.Receive Mode

Current Receive Mode

Fax : Fax Only

F/T : Fax/Tel

TAD : External TAD

Mnl : Manual

12/10 11:53 Fax

Setup Receive1.Ring Delay

Receiving a fax

6 - 3

6

F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)

If you set the Receive Mode to Fax/Tel,you’ll need to decide how long the machine will signal you with its special pseudo/double-ring when you have a voice call. (If it’s a fax call, the machine receives the fax.)

This pseudo/double-ring happens after the initial ringing from the phone company. Only the machine rings and no other phones on the same line will ring with the special pseudo/double-ring. However, you can still answer the call on any telephone on the same line as the machine. (See For Fax/Tel mode only on page 6-7.)


(Fax).


3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select how long the machine will ring to alert you that you have a voice call (20, 30, 40 or 70 seconds).

Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteEven if the caller hangs up during the pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will continue to ring for the set time.

Tray Use for Fax mode

If your machine does not have the optional tray #2, this setting is not available. The default setting of Auto allows your machine to choose the paper from the optional Tray #2 if Tray #1 is out of paper or if incoming faxes will fit best on the paper in Tray #2.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Tray#1 Only, Tray#2 Only or Auto.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Setup Receive2.F/T Ring Time

General Setup0.Tray Use:Fax

Chapter 6

6 - 4

Printing a reduced incoming fax (Auto Reduction)

If you choose On, the machine automatically reduces an incoming fax to fit on one page of Letter or A4 size paper. The machine calculates the reduction ratio by using the page size of the fax and size of the paper in your tray.


(Fax).


3 Use ▲ or ▼ to select On (or Off).

Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Note■ Turn on this setting if you receive faxes

that are split onto two pages. However, if the document is too long the machine may still print on two pages.

■ If left and right margins are cut off, turn on this setting.

■ When this feature is set to On, the Letter faxes people send to you may appear slightly reduced even though your machine prints them on Letter or A4 paper. This is because the machine has to print the Station ID of the sending machine at the top of the page.

Receiving a fax at the end of a conversation

At the end of a conversation you can ask the other party to fax you information before you both hang up.

1 Ask the other party to place the document in their machine and to press Start or Send key.

2 When you hear the other machine’s CNG tones (beeps), press Black Start.

3 Replace the external phone’s handset.

Setup Receive5.Auto Reduction

Receiving a fax

6 - 5

6

Changing the remote codes

The preset Fax Receive Code is 51. The preset Telephone Answer Code is #51. If you want to, you can replace them with your own codes.


(Fax).



Press Menu/Set.

4 Enter the new Fax Receive Code.

Press Menu/Set.

5 Enter the new Telephone Answer Code.

Press Menu/Set.

6 Press Stop/Exit.

Note■ If you are always disconnected when

accessing your external TAD remotely, try changing the Fax Receive Code and Telephone Answer Code to another three-digit code (such as # # # and 9 9 9).

■ Remote Codes might not work with some telephone systems.

Easy Receive

When you use this feature you do not have to press Black Start or the Fax Receive Code

51 when you answer a fax call. Selecting On allows the machine to receive fax calls automatically, even if you lift the handset of an extension or external phone. When you see Receiving on the LCD or when you hear ‘chirps’ through the handset of an extension phone connected to another telephone wall jack, just replace the handset and your machine will do the rest.

Note■ If this feature is set to On, but your

machine does not connect a fax call when you lift an extension or external phone handset, press the Fax Receive Code

51.

■ If you send faxes from a computer on the same phone line and the machine intercepts them, set Easy Receive to Off.

■ Selecting Off means you’ll have to activate the machine yourself by lifting the handset of an external or extension phone, and then press Black Start on the machine.—OR—by pressing 51 if you are not at your machine. (See Operation from extension telephones on page 6-6.)


(Fax).


3 Use ▲ or ▼ to select On (or Off).

Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Setup Receive4.Remote Codes

Setup Receive3.Easy Receive

Chapter 6

6 - 6

Printing a fax from the memory

If you have selected Fax Storage (Menu/Set, 2, 5, 1), you can still print a fax from the memory when you are at your machine. (See Fax Storage on page 8-2.)



Setting the Print Density

You can adjust print density, making your printed pages darker or lighter.


(Fax).


3 Press ▲ to make the print darker.

—OR—

Press ▼ to make the print lighter.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Operation from extension telephones

If you answer a fax call on an extension telephone or an external telephone connected to the EXT. jack of the machine, you can make your machine take the call by using the Fax Receive Code. When you press the Fax Receive Code 51, the machine starts to receive the fax.

If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, use the Telephone Answer Code #51 to take the call at an extension phone. (See F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only) on page 6-3.)

If you answer a call and no one is on the line, you should assume that you’re receiving a manual fax.

■ Press 51 and wait for the chirp or until the machine’s LCD displays Receiving,and then hang up.

You can also use the Easy Receive feature to make your machine automatically take the call. (See Easy Receive on page 6-5.)

Using a cordless external handset

If your cordless telephone is connected to the EXT. jack of the machine and you typically carry the cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during the Ring Delay. If you let the machine answer first, you will have to go to the machine so you can press Hook to transfer the call to the cordless handset.

Remote Fax Opt3.Print Fax

Setup Receive6.Print Density

Receiving a fax

6 - 7

6

For Fax/Tel mode only

When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will use the F/T Ring Time (pseudo or double-ringing) to alert you to pick up a voice call.

Lift the external telephone's handset, and then press Hook to answer.

Using the remote codes

If you hear the fax machine double-ringing when you are at an extension phone, you’ll need to lift the handset and then press the Telephone Answer Code (#51) between the pseudo/double rings. If no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the machine by pressing the Fax Receive Code ( 51).

7 - 1

7How to dialYou can dial in any of the following ways.

Manual dialing

Press all of the digits of the fax number.

One-Touch Dialing

Press the One-Touch key of the location you want to call. (See Storing One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-3.)

NoteTo dial One-Touch numbers 9 to 16 hold down Shift as you press the One-Touch key.

Speed-Dialing

Press Search/Speed Dial, #, and then the three-digit Speed-Dial number. (See Storing Speed-Dial numbers on page 7-4.)

NoteIf the LCD shows Not Registered when you enter the One-Touch or Speed-Dial number, a number has not been stored at this location.

Dialing and phone options

Three-digit number


7 - 2

7

Search

You can search for names you have stored in the One-Touch and Speed-Dial memories. Press Search/Speed Dial and the menu keys to search. (See Storing One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-3 and Storing Speed-Dial numbers on page 7-4.)

* To search alphabetically, you can use the dial pad to enter the first letter of the name you are looking for.

Fax Redial

If you are sending a fax manually and the line is busy, press Redial/Pause, and then press Black Start to try again. If you want to make a second call to the last number dialed, you can save time by pressing Redial/Pause and Black Start.

Redial/Pause only works if you dialed from the control panel.

If you are sending a fax automatically and the line is busy, the machine will automatically redial one time after five minutes.

NoteIn Real Time TX the automatic redial feature does not work when using the scanner glass.

To search numerically

To search alphabetically*

or

Chapter 7

7 - 3

Storing numbersYou can set up your machine to do following types of easy dialing: One-Touch, Speed-Dial and Groups for Broadcasting faxes. When you dial a quick-dial number, the LCD shows the number and the name, if you stored it.

NoteIf you lose electrical power, the quick-dial numbers that are in the memory will not be lost.

Storing a Pause

Press Redial/Pause to insert a 3.5-second pause between numbers. If you are dialing overseas, you can press Redial/Pause as many times as needed to increase the length of the pause.

Storing One-Touch Dial numbers

Your machine has 8 One-Touch keys where you can store 16 fax or phone numbers for automatic dialing. To access numbers 9 to 16, hold down Shift as you press the One-Touch key.


2 Press the One-Touch key where you want to store a number.

3 Select Fax/Tel.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Enter the phone or fax number (up to 20 digits).

Press Menu/Set.

5 Use the dial pad to enter the name (up to 15 characters).

Press Menu/Set.

(You can use the chart on page B-15 to help you enter letters.)

—OR—

Press Menu/Set to store the number without a name.

6 Go to Step 2 to store another One-Touch number.

—OR—

Press Stop/Exit.

Set Quick-Dial1.One-Touch Dial


7 - 4

7

Storing Speed-Dial numbers

You can store Speed-Dial numbers, so that when you dial you will only have to press a few keys (Search/Speed Dial, #, the three-digit number, and Black Start). The machine can store 200 Speed-Dial numbers.


2 Use the dial pad to enter a three-digit Speed-Dial location number.(001 - 200)

(For example, press 005.)

Press Menu/Set.

3 Select Fax/Tel.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Enter the phone or fax number (up to 20 digits).

Press Menu/Set.

5 Use the dial pad to enter the name (up to 15 characters).

Press Menu/Set.

(You can use the chart on page B-15 to help you enter letters.)

—OR—

Press Menu/Set to store the number without a name.

6 Go to Step 2 to store another Speed-Dial number.

—OR—

Press Stop/Exit.

Changing One-Touch and Speed-Dial numbers

If you try to store a One-Touch or Speed-Dial number where a number has already been stored, the LCD will show the name that has been stored there (or number) and will ask you to do one of the following:

1 Press 1 to change the stored number.

—OR—

Press 2 to exit without making a change.

How to change the stored number or name:

• If you want to change a character, use or to position the cursor under

the character you want to change, and then type over it.

• If you want to erase the whole number or whole name, press Stop/Exit when the cursor is under the first digit or letter. The characters above and to the right of the cursor will be deleted.

2 Enter a new number.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Follow the directions beginning at Step 5 in Storing One-Touch Dial numbers and Storing Speed-Dial numbers. (See Storing One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-3 and Storing Speed-Dial numbers on page 7-4.)

Set Quick-Dial2.Speed-Dial

#005:MIKE1.Change 2.Exit

▲

▲

Chapter 7

7 - 5

Setting up Groups for Broadcasting

Groups, which can be stored on a One-Touch key or a Speed-Dial location, allow you to send the same fax message to many fax numbers by pressing only a One-Touch key and Black Start or Search/Speed Dial, #,the three-digit location and Black Start.

First, you’ll need to store each fax number as a One-Touch or Speed-Dial number. Then, you can combine them into a Group. Each Group uses up a One-Touch key or a Speed-Dial location. You can have up to eight Groups, or you can assign up to 215 numbers to one large Group.

(See Storing One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-3 and Storing Speed-Dial numbers on page 7-4.)


2 Decide where you wish to store the Group.

—AND—

Press a One-Touch key.

—OR—

Press Search/Speed Dial and enter the three-digit location, and then press Menu/Set.

(For example, press One-Touch key 2for Group 1.)

3 Use the dial pad to enter the Group number (1 to 8).

Press Menu/Set.

(For example, press 1 for Group 1.)

4 To include One-Touch or Speed-Dial numbers in the Group, press them as follows:

For example, for One-Touch number 2, press One-Touch key 2. The LCD shows 002. For Speed-Dial location 009, press Search/Speed Dial, and then 009 on the dial pad.

5 Press Menu/Set to accept the numbers for this Group.

6 Use the dial pad and the chart on page B-15 to enter a name for the Group.

Press Menu/Set.

(For example, type NEW CLIENTS).

7 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteYou can print a list of all One-Touch and Speed-Dial numbers. Group numbers will be marked in the GROUP column. (See Printing reports on page 9-1.)

Set Quick-Dial3.Setup Groups

Setup GroupsSetup Group:G01

Setup GroupsG01: 002#009


7 - 6

7

Access codes and credit card numbers

Sometimes you may want to choose from several long distance carriers when you make a call. Rates may vary depending on the time and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access codes or long-distance carriers and credit card numbers as One-Touch and Speed-Dial numbers. You can store these long dialing sequences by dividing them and setting them up on separate One-Touch and Speed Dial numbers in any combination. You can even include manual dialing using the dial pad. (See Storing One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-3 and Storing Speed-Dial numbers on page 7-4.)

For example, perhaps you have stored ‘555’ on One-Touch key 1 and ‘7000’ on One-Touch key 2. If you press One-Touch key 1, One-Touch key 2, and Black Start,you will dial ‘555-7000’.

To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number with manual dialing using the dial pad.For example, to change the number to 555-7001 you could press One-Touch key 1and then press 7001 using the dial pad.

Tone or Pulse

If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need to send Tone signals (for example, for telephone banking), follow the instructions below. If you have Touch Tone service, you will not need this feature to send tone signals.

1 Lift the handset of the external phone and press Hook or the machine’s control panel.

2 Press # on the machine’s control panel. Any digits dialed after this will send tone signals.

When you hang up, the machine will return to the Pulse dialing service.

Phone line servicesYour machine supports the Distinctive Ring and Caller ID subscriber telephone services that some telephone companies offer.

Note■ If you have Voice Mail, Call Waiting, Call

Waiting/Caller ID, RingMaster, an answering service, an alarm system or other custom features on your telephone line, it may affect the way your machine works. (See Custom features on page 1-5 and Custom features on a single line. on page C-12.)

■ If you have Voice Mail on your phone line, please read the following carefully.

Distinctive Ring

We use the term ‘Distinctive Ring’ but different telephone companies have other names for this service such as SmartRing, RingMaster, Teen-Ring, Indent-a-Call or Indent-a-Ring.

What does your telephone company’s ‘Distinctive Ring’ do?

Your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service allows you to have more than one number on the same phone line. If you need more than one phone number, it is cheaper than paying for an extra line. Each phone number has its own distinctive ring pattern, so you will know which phone number is ringing. This is one way you can have a separate phone number for your machine.

NotePlease call your telephone company for availability and rates.

Chapter 7

7 - 7

What does ‘Distinctive Ring’ do?

The machine has a Distinctive Ring feature that allows you to use your machine to take full advantage of the telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service. The new phone number on your line can just receive faxes.

NoteYou must pay for your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service before you program the machine to work with it.

Do you have Voice Mail?

If you have Voice Mail on the phone line that you will install your new machine on, there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail and the machine will conflict with each other while receiving incoming calls. However, the Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use more than one number on your line, so both Voice Mail and the machine can work together without any problems. If each one has a separate phone number, neither will interfere with the other’s operations.

If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring service from the telephone company, you will need to follow the directions on next page to ‘register’ the new Distinctive Ring pattern they give you. This is so your machine can recognize its incoming calls.

NoteYou can change or cancel the Distinctive Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it off temporarily, and turn it back on later. When you get a new fax number, make sure you reset this feature.

Before you choose the ring pattern to register

You can only register one Distinctive Ring pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns cannot be registered. The ring patterns below are supported by your machine. Register the one your telephone company gives you.

NoteIf the ring pattern you received is not on this chart, please call your telephone company and ask for one that is shown.

■ The machine will only answer calls to its registered number.

■ The first two rings are silent on the machine. This is because the fax must «listen» to the ring pattern (to compare it to the pattern that was ‘registered’). (Other telephones on the same line will ring.)

■ If you program the machine properly, it will recognize the registered ring pattern of the ‘fax number’ within 2 ring patterns and then answer with a fax tone. When the ‘voice number’ is called, the machine will not answer.

RingPattern

Rings

1 long-long

2 short-long-short

3 short-short-long

4 very long (normal pattern)


7 - 8

7

Registering the Distinctive Ring pattern

Very important!

After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature to ON, the receive mode is set to Manual automatically. Unless you have a TAD or Voice Mail set up on the Distinctive Ring number, Manual mode means you must answer all the calls yourself. You can not change the receive mode to another mode while the Distinctive Ring is set to on.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Set.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the stored ring pattern you want to use.

Press Menu/Set.

(You will hear each pattern as you scroll through the four patterns. Make sure you choose the pattern that the telephone company gave you.)

4 Press Stop/Exit. Distinctive Ring is now set to on.

Turning off Distinctive Ring


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteIf you turn off Distinctive Ring, the machine will stay in Manual receive mode. You will need to set the Receive Mode again. (See To select or change your Receive Mode on page 6-2.)

Caller ID

NoteThe Caller ID feature lets you use the Caller ID subscriber service offered by many local telephone companies. This service displays the telephone number, or name if it is available, of your caller as the line rings.

After a few rings, the LCD shows the telephone number of your caller (and name, if available). Once you pick up the external phone’s handset, the Caller ID information disappears from the LCD, but the call information remains stored in the Caller ID memory.

■ You will see the first 16 characters of the number (or name).

■ Out of Area display means call originated outside your Caller ID service area.

■ Private Call display means the caller has intentionally blocked transmission of information.

You can print a list of Caller ID information received by your machine. (See Printing Caller ID List on page 7-9.)

Caller ID service varies with different carriers. Call your local telephone company to determine the kind of service available in your area.

Miscellaneous2.Distinctive

Miscellaneous2.Distinctive

Chapter 7

7 - 9

Viewing Caller ID List

Caller ID memory stores information for up to thirty calls. When the thirty-first call comes in, information about the first call is erased. You can scroll through Caller ID information to review those calls made to your machine.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Display#.

Press Menu/Set.

The caller ID of the last call will appear on the display. If no ID is stored, the beeper will sound and No Caller IDwill appear on the display.

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll through the Caller ID memory to select the Caller ID you want to view, and then press Menu/Set.The LCD shows the caller’s number and the date and time of the call.

4 Press to return to the Caller ID listing.

—OR—

Press Stop/Exit.

Printing Caller ID List


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Report.

Press Menu/Set.

If no ID is stored, the beeper will sound and No Caller ID will appear on the display.


4 After printing has finished, press Stop/Exit.

Miscellaneous3.Caller ID

▲

Miscellaneous3.Caller ID

8 - 1

8

8

Note■ You can only use one remote fax option at

a time: Fax Forwarding—OR—Paging—OR—Fax Storage—OR—PC FAX Receive—OR—Off.)

■ If you change the remote fax option and received faxes are left in your machine’s memory, an LCD message will appear. (See Changing Remote Fax Options on page 8-4.)

Fax ForwardingWhen you select Fax Forward, your machine stores the received fax in the memory. The machine will then dial the fax number you have programmed and forward the fax message.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fax Forward.

Press Menu/Set.

The LCD will ask you to enter the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded.

3 Enter the forwarding number (up to 20 digits).

Press Menu/Set.

4 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Backup Print:On or Backup Print:Off.

.

Press Menu/Set.

NoteIf you select Backup Print:On, the machine will also print the fax at your machine so you will have a copy. This is a safety feature in case there is a power failure before the fax is forwarded or a problem at the receiving machine. The machine can store faxes up to 60 hours if there is a power failure.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

Remote Fax Options

Remote Fax Opt1.Fwd/Page/Store

Fax ForwardBackup Print:On

Chapter 8

8 - 2

Programming your pager numberWhen Paging is selected, your machine dials the pager number you’ve programmed, and then dials your Personal Identification Number (PIN). This activates your pager so you will know that you have a fax message in the memory.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paging.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Enter your pager phone number followed by # # (up to 20 digits).

Press Menu/Set.

Do not include the area code if it is the same as that of your machine.

For example, press: 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 # #.

4 If your pager needs a PIN, enter the PIN, press #, press Redial/Pause, enter your fax number followed by # #.

Press Menu/Set.

For example, press: 1 2 3 4 5 # Redial/Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7 8 9 # #

—OR—

If you do not need a PIN, press Redial/Pause, enter your fax number followed by # #.

Press Menu/Set.

For example, press: Redial/Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7 8 9 # #

5 Press Stop/Exit.

Note■ You cannot change a Paging number or

PIN remotely.

■ If you have set Paging, a backup copy of the received fax will automatically be printed at the machine.

Fax StorageIf you select Fax Storage, your machine stores the received fax in the memory. You will be able to retrieve fax messages from another location using the Remote Retrieval commands.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fax Storage.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteIf you have set Fax Storage, a backup copy will automatically be printed at the machine.



Remote Fax Options

8 - 3

8

PC Fax Receive If you turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature your machine will store received faxes in memory and send them to your PC automatically. You can then use your PC to view and store these faxes.

Even if you have turned off your PC (at night or on the weekend, for example), your machine will receive and store your faxes in its memory. The LCD will show the number of stored faxes received, for example: PC Fax Msg:001

When you start your PC and the PC-FAX Receiving software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.

To transfer the received faxes to your PC you must have the PC-FAX Receiving software running on your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX receiving in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

If you select Backup Print:On the machine will also print the fax.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select PC Fax Receive.

Press Menu/Set.


Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Note■ When Backup Print is off, your fax

messages are automatically erased from your machine’s memory when they have been successfully sent to your PC. When Backup Print is on, your fax messages are erased when they have been successfully printed and sent to the PC.

■ In the event of a power failure, the machine will store your faxes in the memory for up to 60 hours. However, if you select Backup Print:On, the machine will print the fax, so you will have a copy if there is a power failure before it is sent to the PC.

■ If you get an error message and the machine cannot print the faxes in memory, you can use this setting to transfer your faxes to your PC. (For details, see Error messages on page C-1.)

■ You cannot turn on Memory Security if PC-Fax Receive is on.

■ PC Fax Receive is not supported when the machine is connected on a network.


PC Fax ReceiveBackup Print:On

Chapter 8

8 - 4

Changing Remote Fax OptionsIf received faxes are left in your machine’s memory when you change to another remote fax option, the LCD will ask you the following message:

—OR—

■ If you press 1, faxes in the memory will be erased or printed before the setting changes. If a backup copy has already been printed it will not be printed again.

■ If you press 2, faxes in the memory will not be erased or printed and the setting will be unchanged.

If received faxes are left in the machine’s memory when you change toPC Fax Receive from another remote fax option (Fax Forward, Paging or Fax Storage), the LCD will ask you the following message:

■ If you press 1, faxes in the memory will be sent to your PC before the setting changes.

■ If you press 2, faxes in the memory will not be erased or transferred to your PC and the setting will be unchanged.

Turning off Remote Fax Options


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off.

Press Menu/Set.

NoteThe LCD will give you options if there are received faxes still in your machine’s memory. (See Changing Remote Fax Options on page 8-4.)

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Erase All Fax?1.Yes 2.No

Print All Fax?1.Yes 2.No

Send Fax to PC?1.Yes 2.No


Remote Fax Options

8 - 5

8

Remote RetrievalYou can call your machine from any touch tone telephone or fax machine, then use the Remote Access Code and remote commands to retrieve fax messages stored in the memory. Be sure to cut out the Remote Retrieval Access Card on the last page and keep it with you at all times.

Setting the Remote Access Code

The remote access code lets you access the Remote Retrieval features when you are away from your machine. Before you use the remote access and retrieval features, you have to set up your own code. The default code is inactive code (--- ).


2 Enter a three-digit code using numbers 0-9, or #.

Press Menu/Set. (The preset ‘ ’ cannot be changed.)

NoteDo not use the same code as your Fax Receive Code ( 51) or Telephone Answer Code (#51). (See Operation from extension telephones on page A-5.)

3 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteYou can change your code at any time by entering a new one. If you want to make your code inactive, press Stop/Exit in Step 2 to restore the inactive setting (--- ) and press Menu/Set.

Using your Remote Access Code

1 Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone.

2 When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by ).

3 The machine signals if it has received fax messages:

1 long beep — Fax messages

No beeps — No messages

4 The machine gives two short beeps to tell you to enter a command. The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30 seconds to enter a command. The machine will beep three times, if you enter an invalid command.

5 Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you’ve finished.

6 Hang up.

NoteIf your machine is set to Manual mode and you want to use the remote retrieval features, you can access your machine by waiting about 2 minutes after it starts ringing, and then entering the Remote Access Code within 30 seconds.

Remote Fax Opt2.Remote Access

Chapter 8

8 - 6

Remote commandsFollow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you call the machine and enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by ), the system will give two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.

Remote commands Operation details

95 Change the Fax Forwarding, Paging or Fax Storage settings

1 OFF You can select Off after you have retrieved or erased all your messages.

2 Fax Forwarding If you hear one long beep, the change has been accepted. If you hear three short beeps, you cannot change it because something has not been set up (for example, perhaps a Fax Forwarding or Paging number had not been registered). You can register your Fax Forwarding number by entering 4. (See Changing the Fax Forwarding number on page 8-7.) Once you have registered the number, Fax Forwarding will work.You can select Off after you have retrieved or erased all your messages.

3 Paging

4 Fax Forwarding number

6 Fax Storage

96 Retrieve a fax

2 Retrieve all faxes Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored fax message(s). (See page 8-7.)

3 Erase faxes from the memory If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased from the memory.

97 Check the receiving status

1 Fax You can check whether your machine has received any faxes. If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear three short beeps.

98 Change the Receive Mode

1 External TAD If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.

2 Fax/Tel

3 Fax Only

90 Exit Press 9 0 to exit Remote Retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then replace the handset.

Remote Fax Options

8 - 7

8

Retrieving fax messages

You can call your machine from any touch tone telephone or fax machine and have your fax messages sent to a fax machine.

1 Dial your fax number.

2 When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by ). If you hear one long beep, you have messages.

3 When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press 9 6 2.

4 Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax messages sent followed by ##(up to 20 digits).

NoteYou cannot use and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to store a pause.


6 Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will call the other fax machine, which will then print your fax messages.

Changing the Fax Forwarding number

You can change the default setting of your fax forwarding number from another telephone or fax machine using touch tone.

1 Dial your fax number.

2 When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by ). If you hear one long beep, you have messages.

3 When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press 9 5 4.

4 Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the new number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax messages forwarded followed by ## (up to 20 digits).

NoteYou cannot use and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to store a pause.


6 Hang up after you hear your machine beep.

9 - 1

9Fax reportsFax reports (Transmission Verification and Fax Journal) can be printed automatically and manually.

Transmission Verification Report

You can use the Transmission Verification Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists the time and date of transmission and whether the transmission was successful (OK). If you select On or On+Image, the report will print for every fax you send.

If you send a lot of faxes to the same place, you may need more than the job numbers to know which faxes you must send again. Selecting On+Image or Off+Image will print a section of the fax’s first page on the report to help you remember.

NoteWhen the Transmission Verification Report is turned Off or Off+Image, the Report will only print if there is a transmission error, with NG in the RESULT column.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, On+Image,Off or Off+Image.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Fax Journal (Activity report)

You can set the machine to print a journal at specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). If you set the interval to Off, you can print the report by following the steps on Additional reports.

The default setting is Every 50 Faxes.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to choose an interval.

Press Menu/Set.

(If you choose 7 days, the LCD will ask you to choose a day on which to begin the 7-day countdown.)

3 Enter the time to begin printing in 24-hour format.

Press Menu/Set.

(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Note■ If you select 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days,

the machine will print the report at the selected time and then erase all jobs from its memory. If the machine’s memory becomes full with 200 jobs before the time you selected has passed, the machine will print the Journal early and then erase all jobs from memory. If you want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it without erasing the jobs from memory.

■ If you select Every 50 Faxes, the machine will print the Journal when the machine has stored 50 jobs.

Printing reports

Report Setting1.Transmission

Report Setting2.Journal Period

Printing reports

9 - 2

9

Additional reportsFollowing reports are available:

How to print a report

1 Press Menu/Set, 5.

2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the report you want.

Press Menu/Set.

—OR—

Enter the number of the report you want to print.

For example, press 2 to print the Help List.


1.TransmissionPrints a Transmission Verification Report for your last transmission.

2.Help ListPrints the Help List so you can see at-a-glance how to quickly program your machine.

3.Quick-DialLists names and numbers stored in the One-Touch and Speed-Dial memory, in numerical order.

4.Fax Journal

Lists information about the last incoming and outgoing faxes.(TX means Transmit.) (RX means Receive.)

5.User SettingsLists your settings.

6.Network ConfigLists your Network settings.

10 - 1

10Polling OperationPolling is the process of retrieving faxes from another fax machine. You can use your machine to 'poll' other machines, or you can have someone poll your machine.

Everyone who is involved in Polling needs to set up their fax machines for Polling. When someone polls your machine to receive a fax, they pay for the call. If you poll someone’s fax machine to receive a fax, you pay for the call.

NoteSome fax machines do not respond to the Polling feature.

Polling ReceivePolling Receive is when you call another fax machine to receive a fax from it.

Set up to receive polling


(Fax).


3 Enter the fax number you are polling.


The LCD shows Dialing.

Sequential Polling

Your machine can ask for faxes from several fax units in a single operation (Sequential Polling Receive). Afterwards, a Sequential Polling Report will be printed.


(Fax).


3 Enter the fax machines you want to poll using One-Touch, Speed-Dial, a Group or the dial pad. You must press Menu/Set between each fax number.

4 Press Black Start. Your machine will poll each number or Group number in turn to receive a fax.

To stop a sequential polling in progress


The LCD will display the name, if you stored it, or the fax number being dialed.

2 Press Menu/Set.

The LCD will display:

3 Press 1 to Clear.

The LCD will then display the sequential polling job number and 1.Clear2.Exit.

4 To cancel the sequential polling, press 1.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

Polling

Setup Receive7.Polling RX

Setup Receive7.Polling RX

XXXXXXXX1.Clear 2.Exit

Polling

10 - 2

10

Polled TransmitPolled Transmit is when you set up your machine to wait with a document so another fax machine can call and retrieve it.

Setup for Polled Transmit


(Fax).




Press Menu/Set.

5 The LCD shows:

6 Press 2 and press Black Start.

NoteThe document will be stored and can be retrieved from any other fax machine until you delete the fax from memory by using the Canceling a Job menu setting. (See Checking job status and canceling a waiting job on page 5-9.)

Setup Send6.Polled TX

Other Settings1.Yes 2.No

SECTION III COPY

Section IIICopy

11. Making copies

11 - 1

11‘

How to copyYou can use your machine as a copier, making up to 99 copies at a time.

Entering Copy mode

Before making copies, make sure that

(Copy) is illuminated in blue. If it is not,

press (Copy) to enter Copy mode. The

default setting is Fax mode. You can change the number of seconds or minutes that the machine stays in Copy mode. (See Mode Timer on page 3-8.)

Printable Area

The printable area of your machine begins at approximately 0.12 in. (3 mm) from both sides and 0.16 in. (4 mm) from the top or bottom of the paper.

Making a single copy


2 Load your document. (See Loading documents on page 2-10.)


NoteTo stop copying, press Stop/Exit.

Making copies

Copy Ratio

The LCD shows the default copy setting

Contrast

Quality

Stack/Sort No. of Copies

Stack Copies:01100% Auto

0.12" (3 mm)

0.16" (4 mm)

Unprintable area

Making copies

11 - 2

11

Making multiple copies





NoteTo sort the copies, press Options and ▲ or ▼to select Stack/Sort. (See Sorting copies using the ADF on page 11-7.)

Tray Use for Copy mode

If your machine does not have the optional Tray#2, this setting is not available. You can change the tray that will be used for next copy only. Normally, the machine uses the paper in Tray#1 first.




4 Press Options and ▲ or ▼ to select Tray Select.

5 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto, #1(xxx)or #2(xxx).

Press Menu/Set.

The ‘xxx’ is the paper size detected by the tray or the small size you set in the Menu/Set, 1, 3.


■ If both trays are using paper that is the same size, Auto will allow your machine to take paper from Tray #2 if Tray #1 is out of paper.

To change the default setting follow the instructions below:

Auto allows your machine to choose the paper from the optional Tray#2 when paper is out in Tray#11 or when the size of the document will fit best on the paper in Tray#2.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Tray#1 Only,Tray#2 Only or Auto.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Note1 Copies will automatically be printed from Tray#2 only if the Paper in Tray#1 was the same size.

Cancel copying

To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.

General Setup9.Tray Use:Copy

Chapter 11

11 - 3

Copy optionsWhen you want to quickly change the copy settings temporarily for the next copy, use the Copy Options keys. You can use different combinations.

Note■ These settings are temporary, and the

machine returns to its default settings 60 seconds after copying, unless you have set the Mode Timer to 30 seconds or less. (See Mode Timer on page 3-8.)

■ You can save some of the copy settings you use most often by setting them as default.

Increasing copy quality

You can select the copy quality. The default setting is Auto.




4 Press Options and ▲ or ▼ to select Quality.

Press Menu/Set.

5 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the copy quality you want (Auto, Text or Photo).

Press Menu/Set.




2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto, Text or Photo.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.Auto Suitable for documents that

contain both text and photographs.

Text Suitable for documents containing only text.

Photo Suitable for copying photographs.

Speed is reduced during color copying.

Copy1.Quality

Making copies

11 - 4

11

Enlarging or reducing the image copied

You can select the following enlargement or reduction ratios.

Custom(25-400%) allows you to enter a ratio from 25% to 400%.



3 Press Enlarge/Reduce.

4 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the enlargement or reduction ratio you want.

Press Menu/Set.

—OR—

Use the dial pad to enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from 25%to 400%.

Press Menu/Set.

(For example, press 5 3 to enter 53%.)


—OR—

Press the Options key for more settings.

Note■ Page Layout Options 2 in 1 (P),

2 in 1 (L), 4 in 1 (P),4 in 1 (L) or Poster(3 x 3) are not available with Enlarge/Reduce.

■ After you choose your settings by pressing Menu/Set, the LCD shows Set temporarily.

PressEnlarge/Reduce

100%

104% EXE→ LTR

141% A5→ A4

200%

Custom(25-400%)

50%

70%

78% LGL→ LTR

83% LGL→ A4

85% LTR→ EXE91% Full Page

94% A4→ LTR

97% LTR→ A4

Chapter 11

11 - 5

Making N in 1 copies or a poster (page layout)

You can reduce the amount of copies by using the N in 1 copy feature. This allows you to copy two or four pages onto one page, allowing you to save paper. It is also possible to create a poster. When you use the Poster feature your machine divides your document into sections, then enlarges the sections so you can assemble them into a poster. If you want to print a poster, use the scanner glass.

Note■ Please make sure paper size is set to

Letter, Legal or A4.

■ You can use N in 1 copy and poster feature with 100% copy size only.

■ (P) means Portrait and (L) means Landscape.

■ For Poster copies, you cannot make more than one copy.




4 Press Options and ▲ or ▼ to select Page Layout.

Press Menu/Set.

5 Press ▲ or ▼ to select 2 in 1 (P),2 in 1 (L), 4 in 1 (P),4 in 1 (L), Poster(3 x 3) or Off(1 in 1).

Press Menu/Set.

6 Press Black Start or Color Start to scan the document.

If you are making a poster or placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the document and starts printing.

If you are using the scanner glass:

7 After the machine scans the page, the LCD shows:

Press 1 to scan the next page.

8 Place the next page on the scanner glass. The LCD shows:

Press Menu/Set.

9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each page of the layout.

0 After all the pages of the document have been scanned, press 2 in Step 7 to end.

Next Page?1.Yes 2.No

Set Next PageThen Press Set

Making copies

11 - 6

11

When using the ADF, insert document face up in the direction shown below.

2 in 1 (P)

4 in 1 (P)

When using the scanner glass, place document face down in the direction shown below.

2 in 1 (P)

4 in 1 (P)

Poster(3 x 3)

You can make a poster size copy of a photograph.

2 in 1 (L)

4 in 1 (L)

2 in 1 (L)

4 in 1 (L)

Chapter 11

11 - 7

Sorting copies using the ADF

You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be stacked in the order (1 2 3), (1 2 3) and so on.




4 Press Options and ▲ or ▼ to select Stack/Sort.

Press Menu/Set.

5 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Sort.

Press Menu/Set.


—OR—

Press the Options key for more settings.

Adjusting Brightness, Contrast and Color

Brightness

You can adjust the copy brightness to make copies darker or lighter.




4 Press Options and ▲ or ▼ to select Brightness.

Press Menu/Set.

5 Press ▲ to make a lighter copy.

—OR—

Press ▼ to make a darker copy.

Press Menu/Set.




2 Press ▲ to make a lighter copy.

—OR—

Press ▼ to make a darker copy.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Copy2.Brightness

Making copies

11 - 8

11

Contrast

You can adjust copy contrast to make copies with more or less contrast.




4 Press Options and ▲ or ▼ to select Contrast.

Press Menu/Set.


—OR—


Press Menu/Set.





—OR—


Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Color saturation

You can only change the default setting for Color saturation.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select 1.Red,2.Green or 3.Blue.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press ▲ to increase the color saturation.

—OR—

Press ▼ to decrease the color saturation.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Return to Step 2 to select the next color.

—OR—

Press Stop/Exit.

Copy3.Contrast

Copy4.Color Adjust

Chapter 11

11 - 9

Out of Memory messageIf the memory becomes full while you are making copies, the LCD message will guide you through the next step.

If you get an Out of Memory message while scanning a subsequent page, you will have the option to press Black Start or Color Startto copy the pages scanned so far, or to press Stop/Exit to cancel the operation.

NoteTo gain extra memory, you can turn off Fax Storage. (See Turning off Remote Fax Options on page 8-4.)

—OR—

Print the faxes that are in the memory. (See Printing a fax from the memory on page 6-6.)

When you get an Out of Memory message, you may be able to make copies if you first print incoming faxes in the memory to restore the memory to 100%.

Legal limitationsColor reproductions of certain documents are illegal and may result in either criminal or civil liability. This memorandum is intended to be a guide rather than a complete listing of every possible prohibition. In case of doubt, we suggest that you check with counsel as to any particular questionable documents.

The following documents issued by the United States/Canadian Government or any of its Agencies may not be copied:

■ Money

■ Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness

■ Certificates of Deposit

■ Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

■ Selective Service or draft papers

■ Passports

■ United States/Canadian Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

■ Food Stamps

■ Immigration Papers

■ Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies

■ Identifying badges or insignias

Copyrighted works cannot be copied. Sections of a copyrighted work can be copied for ‘fair use.’ Multiple copies would indicate improper use.

Works of art should be considered the equivalent of copyrighted works.

Licenses and Certificates of Title to motor vehicles may not be copied under certain state/provincial laws.

SECTION IV SOFTWARE AND NETWORK FEATURES

Section IVSoftware and Network Features

The User’s Guide on the CD-ROM includes the Software and Network User’s Guides for features available when connected to a computer (for example, Printing and Scanning).

■ Printing(For Windows®, see Chapter 1 in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

■ Scanning(For Windows®, see Chapter 2 in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

■ ControlCenter2(For Windows®, see Chapter 3 in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

■ Remote Setup(For Windows®, see Chapter 5 in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

■ PC-FAX software(For Windows®, see Chapter 6 in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

■ Network Scanning(For Windows®, see Chapter 4 in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

■ Network Printing(For Windows®, see Chapter 4 in the Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

NoteSee How to access the complete User’s Guide on page 1-2.

SECTION V APPENDIXES

Section VAppendixes

A. Important information

B. Menu and Features

C. Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

D. Optional accessories

E. Specifications

F. Glossary

A - 1

AStandard telephone and FCC NoticesThese notices are in effect on models sold and used in the United States only.

When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to emergency numbers:

■ Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.

■ Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the backside of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.

You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ11C.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.

The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn’t practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact Customer Service. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified installer.

If you are not able to solve a problem with your machine, call Customer Service.

Important information


A - 2

A

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity (USA only)

Responsible Party:

Ricoh CorporationAddress: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006Telephone number: 973-882-2000

declares, that the products

Product Name: SP C210SF

comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.■ Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver. ■ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Important - about the interface cable

A shielded interface cable should be used to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B digital device.

WARNING

■ For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.

■ This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company or connected to party lines.

■ We cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the result of your use of this information, including direct, special or consequential damages. There are no warranties extended or granted by this document.

■ This machine has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are applied to the USA only. A grounded plug should be plugged into a grounded AC power outlet after checking the rating of the local power supply for the machine to operate properly and safely.

Chapter A

A - 3

Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only)

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

For your safety

To ensure safe operation the supplied three-pin plug must be inserted only into a standard three-pin AC power outlet that is effectively grounded through the normal household or office wiring.

The fact that the equipment operates satisfactorily does not imply that the power is grounded and that the installation is completely safe. For your safety, if in any doubt about the effective grounding of the power, consult a qualified electrician.

Disconnect device

This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of emergencies, you must disconnect the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off power completely.

LAN connection

Laser safety

This equipment is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation.

Since radiation emitted inside the equipment is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.

CAUTION

Do not connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.


A - 4

A

FDA regulations

This laser product complies with FDA raguration performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J.HTJ.

RICOH COMPANY,LTD

3-6 Naka-magome 1-Chome Ohta-ku, Tokyo 143-8555 Japan

Important safety instructions

1 Read all of these instructions.

2 Save them for later reference.

3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

4 Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning inside of the machine. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

5 Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.

6 Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation; to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heater. This product should never be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.

7 This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. Do NOT connect it to a DC power source. If you are not sure, contact a qualified electrician.

8 This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounded plug. This plug will only fit into a grounded power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, call your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounded plug.

9 Use only the power cord supplied with this machine.

WARNING

Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous invisible radiation exposure.

Internal laser radiation

Max. Radiation Power 5 mW

Wave Length 780 - 800 nm

Laser Class Class 3B

Chapter A

A - 5

0 Do not place anything on top of the power cord including this machine. Do not allow the power cord to be stepped on.

A If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere ratings on the products plugged into the extension cord do not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total of all products plugged into the AC power outlet does not exceed 15 amperes (USA only).

B Do not place anything in front of the machine that will block received faxes. Do not place anything in the path of received faxes.

C Wait until pages have exited the machine before picking them up.

D Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots, since they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in the risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Do not attempt to service this product yourself because opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and may void your warranty. Refer all servicing to customer service.

E Unplug this product from the AC power outlet and refer all servicing to Service Personnel authorized by us under the following conditions:

• When the power cord is damaged or frayed.

• If liquid has been spilled into the product.

• If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

• If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.

• If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

• If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.

F To protect your product against power surges, we recommend the use of a power protection device (Surge Protector).

G To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people, note the following:

• Do not use this product near appliances that use water, a swimming pool or in a wet basement.

• Do not use the machine during an electrical storm (there is the remote possibility of an electrical shock) or to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

• Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions.

H Caution - To reduce the risk of fire, use only a No.26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.


A - 6

A

Choosing a locationPlace your machine on a flat, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks. Put the machine near a telephone wall jack and a standard, grounded AC power outlet. Choose a location where the temperature remains between 50°F and 90.5°F (10°C and 32.5°C) and the humidity is between 20% to 80% (without condensation).

The following figure details the recommended area around the machine for proper ventilation, operation and maintenance.

IMPORTANTIMPORTANT

■ Avoid placing your machine in a high-traffic area.

■ Do not place the machine near heaters, air conditioners, refrigerators, water, chemicals or devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields.

■ Do not expose the machine to direct sunlight, excessive heat, open flames, salty or corrosive gasses, moisture, or dust.

■ Do not connect your machine to an AC power outlet controlled by wall switches or automatic timers.

■ Disruption of power can wipe out information in the machine’s memory.

■ Do not connect your machine to an AC power outlet on the same circuit as large appliances or other equipment that might disrupt the power supply.

■ Avoid interference sources, such as speakers or the base units of cordless phones.

■ Do not put objects on top of the machine.

Back

Front

14 in. (35 cm)

8 in. (20 cm)

28 in. (70 cm)

20 in. (50 cm)

Chapter A

A - 7

To use the machine safely

Please keep these instructions for later reference and read them before attempting any maintenance.

IMPORTANTCAUTION

There are high voltage electrodes inside the machine. Before you clean the inside of the machine, make sure you have unplugged the telephone line cord first and then the power cord from the AC power outlet.

Do not handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.

The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during operation. Wait until it has cooled down sufficiently before replacing consumable items.

The fusing unit is marked with a caution label. Please do not remove or damage the label.

To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your hands on the edge of the machine under the document cover or scanner unit.


A - 8

A

■ To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your fingers in the area shown in the illustrations.

■ Do not use a vacuum cleaner to clean up scattered toner. Doing this might cause the toner dust to ignite inside the vacuum cleaner, potentially starting a fire. Please carefully clean the toner dust with a clean dry soft, lint-free cloth and dispose of it according to local regulations.

■ Do not use flammable substances near the machine. Doing this might cause a fire or electrical shock.

■ If the machine becomes hot, blows smoke, or generates obscure odor, immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine from the AC power outlet. Call your dealer or Customer Service.

■ If metal objects, water or other liquids get inside the machine, immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine from the AC power outlet. Call your dealer or Customer Service.

■ Do not put consumable items such as the toner cartridges and the waste toner pack into a fire. Some consumable items can be flammable under certain conditions.

■ Do not look directly at the laser beam light. It might cause damage to your eyesight. Do not remove or break open the machine's safety interlocks.

■ Do not run the machine with the inside cover, front cover and back covers open and the interlocks removed.

IMPORTANTCAUTION

Chapter A

A - 9

IMPORTANTCAUTION

■ This machine is heavy and weighs approximately 76.7 lb (34.8 kg). To prevent injuries, use at least two people to lift the machine. Be careful not to trap your fingers when you set the machine back down.

■ When you lift the machine make sure you use the handholds at the bottom four corners of the machine. Keep the machine horizontal when you carry it.

■ Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the wall jack. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall jack in a wet location.

■ This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of an emergency, you must disconnect the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off the power completely.

■ To reduce the risk of shock or fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.

IMPORTANTIMPORTANT

Lightning and power surges can damage this product! We recommend that you use a quality surge protection device on the AC power line and on the telephone line, or unplug the cords during a lightning storm.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people, including the following:

1. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or washing machine, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

2. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

3. Do not use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

4. Use only the power cord provided with the machine.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS


A - 10

A

TrademarksWindows and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft in the U.S. and other countries.

PaperPort and OmniPage are registered trademarks of Nuance Communications Inc.

Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.

All other brand and product names mentioned in this User’s Guide, the Software User’s Guide, and the Network User’s Guide are registered trademarks of their respective companies.

B - 1

BOn-screen programmingYour machine is designed to be easy to use with LCD on-screen programming using the menu keys. User-friendly programming helps you take full advantage of all the menu selections your machine has to offer.

Since your programming is done on the LCD, we have created step-by-step on-screen instructions to help you program your machine. All you need to do is follow the instructions as they guide you through the menu selections and programming options.

Menu table

The Menu table that begins on page B-3 will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the machine’s programs. Once you become familiar with programming, you can use the Menu table as a quick reference when you want to change your settings.

NoteYou can program your machine by pressing Menu/Set, followed by the menu numbers. For example to set Beeper Volume to Low.Press Menu/Set, 1, 4, 2 and ▲ or ▼ to select Low.Press Menu/Set.

Memory storage

If there is a power failure, you will not lose your menu settings because they are stored permanently. Temporary settings (such as Contrast, Overseas Mode, and so on) will be lost. You may also have to reset the date and time.

NoteYour machine can store the date and time up to 60 hours.

Menu and Features

Menu and Features

B - 2

B

Menu keys You can access the menu mode by pressing Menu/Set.When you enter the menu, the LCD scrolls.

Press 1 for General Setup menu

—OR—

Press 2 for Fax menu

—OR—

Press 3 for Copy menu

Press 0 for Initial Setup

You can scroll more quickly through each menu level or to your next menu selection by pressing the ▲ or ▼ arrow key for the direction you want.

Select an option by pressing Menu/Set when that option appears on the LCD.

The LCD will then show the next menu level.

When you finish setting an option, the LCD shows Accepted.

Access the menuGo to the next menu level

Accept an option

Scroll through the current menu level

Go back to the previous menu level or forward to the next menu level

Exit the menu

Select ▲▼ & Set1.General Setup

Select ▲▼ & Set2.Fax

Select ▲▼ & Set3.Copy

....

Select ▲▼ & Set0.Initial Setup

Chapter B

B - 3

Menu Table

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

1.GeneralSetup

1. Mode Timer — 5 Mins2 Mins1 Min30 Secs0 SecOff

Sets the time to return to Fax mode.

3-8

2. Paper Type 1.Tray#1

(This menu only appears when you have the optional tray #2)

ThinPlainThickThickerRecycled Paper

Sets the type of paper in the paper tray.

3-9

2.Tray#2


ThinPlainThickThickerRecycled Paper

Sets the type of paper in the paper tray.

3-9

3. Small Paper 1.Tray#1


B5DLCom10JISB5

Sets the size of the paper in the paper tray.

3-9

2.Tray#2


B5JISB5

Sets the size of the paper in the paper tray.

3-9

4. Volume 1.Ring HighMedLowOff

Adjusts the ring volume. 3-10

2.Beeper HighMedLowOff

Adjusts the volume level of the beeper.

3-10

3.Speaker HighMedLowOff

Adjusts the speaker volume.

3-10

NoteThe factory settings are shown in Bold.

to exitSelect & Set Select & Set to accept

Menu and Features

B - 4

B

1. GeneralSetup

(Continued)

5.AutoDaylight

— OnOff

Changes for Daylight Savings Time automatically.

3-1

6.Ecology 1.Toner Save OnOff

Increases the page yield of the toner cartridge.

3-7

2.Sleep Time (0-99)30 Min

Conserves power. 3-8

7.LCDContrast

— ▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

Adjust the contrast of the LCD.

3-3

8.Security 1.MemSecurity

Prohibits most operations except receiving faxes into the memory.

4-3

2.SettingLock

Prohibits the settings for Date & Time, Station ID, Quick-Dial and General Setup.

4-1

9.Tray Use: Copy

(This setting only appears when you have the optional tray #2.)

— Tray#1 OnlyTray#2 OnlyAuto

Select the tray that will be used for copying.

11-2

0.Tray Use: Fax

(This setting only appears when you have the optional tray #2.)

— Tray#1 OnlyTray#2 OnlyAuto

Select the tray that will be used for faxing.

6-3




Chapter B

B - 5

2.Fax 1. SetupReceive

(In Fax mode only)

1.Ring Delay 0403020100

Sets the number of rings before the machine answers in Fax Only or Fax/Tel mode.

6-2

2.F/T Ring Time

70 Secs40 Secs30 Secs20 Secs

Sets the pseudo/double-ring time in Fax/Tel mode.

6-3

3.EasyReceive

OnOff

Receives fax messages without pressing Black Start.

6-5

4.RemoteCodes

On( 51, #51)Off

You can answer all calls at an extension or external phone and use codes to turn the machine on or off.You can personalize these codes.

6-5

5.AutoReduction

OnOff

Reduces the size of incoming faxes.

6-4

6.PrintDensity

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

Makes printouts darker or lighter.

6-6

7.Polling RX — Sets up your machine to poll another fax machine.

10-1

2. Setup Send

(In Fax mode only)

1.Contrast AutoLightDark

Changes the lightness or darkness of faxes you send.

5-5

2.FaxResolution

StandardFineS.FinePhoto

Sets the default resolution for outgoing faxes.

5-5

3.Delayed Fax — Sets the time of day in 24 hour format that the delayed faxes will be sent.

5-8




Menu and Features

B - 6

B

2. Fax

(Continued)

2.Setup Send

(In Fax mode only)

(Continued)

4.Batch TX OnOff

Combines delayed faxes to the same fax number at the same time of day into one transmission.

5-8

5.Real Time TX OffOnNext Fax:OnNext Fax:Off

You can send a fax without using the memory.

5-6

6.Polled TX OnOff

Sets up your machine with a document to be retrieved by another fax machine.

10-2

7.CoverpgSetup

OffOnNext Fax:OnNext Fax:OffPrint Sample

Automatically sends a Cover Page you have programmed.

5-10

8.CoverpageMsg

— You can set up your own comments for fax Cover Page.

5-9

9.OverseasMode

OnOff

If you are having difficulty sending faxes overseas, set this to On.

5-7

3.SetQuick-Dial

1.One-TouchDial

— Stores One-Touch Dial numbers, so you can dial by pressing one key (and Black Start).

7-3

2.Speed-Dial — Stores Speed-Dial numbers, so you can dial by pressing only a few keys (and Black Start).

7-4

3.SetupGroups

— Sets up a Group number for Broadcasting.

7-5




Chapter B

B - 7

2.Fax

(Continued)

4. ReportSetting

1.Transmission OnOn+ImageOffOff+Image

Initial setup for Transmission Verification Report and Fax Journal.

9-1

2.JournalPeriod

Every 7 DaysEvery 2 DaysEvery 24 HoursEvery 12 HoursEvery 6 HoursEvery 50 FaxesOff

9-1

5. Remote Fax Opt

(Backup print for Fax Forward/PC Fax Receive)

1.Fwd/Page/Store

OffFax ForwardPagingFax StoragePC Fax Receive

Sets the machine to forward fax messages, to call your pager, to store incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve them while you are away from your machine), or to send faxes to your PC.

If you selected Fax Forward or PC Fax Receive, you can turn on the safety feature Backup Print.

8-18-4

2.RemoteAccess

--- You must set your own code for Remote Retrieval.

8-5

3.Print Fax — Prints incoming faxes stored in the memory.

6-6

6. RemainingJobs

— — Checks which jobs are in the memory and lets you cancel selected jobs.

5-9




Menu and Features

B - 8

B

2. Fax

(Continued)

0. Miscellaneous 1. Compatibility HighNormalBasic

Adjusts the Equalization for transmission problems.

C-20

2.Distinctive OffSet(On)

Uses the Telephone Company’s Distinctive Ring subscriber service to register the ring pattern with the machine.

7-8

3.Caller ID Display#Print Report

View or print a list of the last 30 Caller IDs stored in the memory.

7-8

3. Copy 1.Quality — TextAutoPhoto

Selects the Copy resolution for your type of document.

11-3

2.Brightness — ▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

Adjusts the brightness for copies

11-7

3.Contrast — ▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

Adjusts the contrast for copies.

11-8

4.ColorAdjust

1.Red R:- +R:- +R:- +R:- +R:- +

Adjusts the amount of Red in copies.

11-8

2. Green G:- +G:- +G:- +G:- +G:- +

Adjusts the amount of Green in copies.

11-8

3.Blue B:- +B:- +B:- +B:- +B:- +

Adjusts the amount of Blue in copies.

11-8




Chapter B

B - 9

4.Printer 1. Test Print — — Prints a test page. See Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM

2. ResetPrinter

— — Returns the print settings to the original factory default settings.

3. Calibration — CalibrateReset

Adjusts the color density or returns the color calibration to the factory setting.

5.PrintReports

1. Transmission — — You can print these lists and reports.

9-2

2. Help List — —

3. Quick-Dial — —

4. Fax Journal — —

5. UserSettings

— —

6. NetworkConfig

— —




Menu and Features

B - 10

B

6. LAN 1.SetupTCP/IP

1.BOOT Method AutoStaticRARPBOOTPDHCP

You can choose the BOOT method that best suits your needs.

See Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM

2.IP Address [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

Enter the IP address.

3.Subnet Mask [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

Enter the Subnet mask.

4.Gateway [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

Enter the Gateway address.

5.Node Name BRN_XXXXXX Enter the Node name.

6.WINS Config AutoStatic

You can choose the WINS configuration mode.

7.WINS Server (Primary)[000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255](Secondary)[000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary WINS server.

8.DNS Server (Primary)[000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255](Secondary)[000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary DNS server.

9.APIPA OnOff

Automatically allocates the IP address from the link-local address range.




Chapter B

B - 11

6.LAN

(Continued)

2. SetupInternet

1.MailAddress

(60 characters) Enter the mail address. See Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM

2.SMTP Server [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

Enter the SMTP server address.

3.POP3 Server [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

Enter the POP3 server address.

4.MailboxName

(Up to 20 characters)

Enter the mail box name.

5.Mailbox Pwd Password:******

Enter the password to login to the POP3 server.

3. Setup Mail RX

1.AutoPolling

OnOff

Automatically checks the POP3 server for new messages.

2.PollFrequency

(01-60)10Min

Sets the interval for checking for new messages on the POP3 server.

3.Header All

Subject+From+ToNone

Selects the contents of the mail header to be printed.

4.Del Error Mail

OnOff

Deletes error mails automatically.

5.Notification OnMDNOff

Sends notification messages.




Menu and Features

B - 12

B

6. LAN

(Continued)

4.Setup Mail TX

1.SenderSubject

— Displays the subject that is attached to the Internet Fax data.

See Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM

2.Size Limit OnOff

Displays a warning that the size of the E-mail document is larger than 1 MB. The document will not be sent.

3. Notification OnOff

Sends notification messages.

5.Setup Relay 1.RlyBroadcast

OnOff

Relays a document to another fax machine.

2.RelayDomain

RelayXX:(Up to 30 characters)

Registers the Domain name.

3.RelayReport

OnOff

Prints the Relay Broadcast Report.

6.Setup Misc. 1.Ethernet Auto100B-FD100B-HD10B-FD10B-HD

Selects Ethernet link mode.

2.Time Zone GMT-5:00 Sets the time zone for your country.

7.Scan to E-mail

1.B/W File Type

TIFFPDF

Selects the file type.

2.ColorFileType

JPEGPDF

0.FactoryReset

Restores all Network settings to factory default.




Chapter B

B - 13

7.MachineInfo.

1. Serial No. — — Lets you check the serial number of your machine.

C-35

2. PageCounter

— TotalCopyPrintList/Fax

Lets you check the number of total pages the machine has printed during its life.

C-35

3. Parts Life 1. OPC Belt Life OPC Belt LifeRemaining:XXX%

You can check the percentage of unused (remaining) life for these parts.

C-35

2.Fuser Life Fuser LifeRemaining:XXX%

3. 120K Kit Life 120K Kit LifeRemaining:XXX%

4.PF Kit2 Life PF Kit2 LifeRemaining:XXX%

4. Reset Menu OPC BeltFusing Unit120K KitPF Kit2

Reset the life counter when each part is replaced.These messages are displayed only when the errors occur.

C-34C-35

0.InitialSetup

1. ReceiveMode

— Fax OnlyFax/TelExternal TADManual

You can choose the receive mode that best suits your needs.

6-1

2. Date/Time — — Puts the date and time on the LCD and in headings of faxes you send.

3-1

3. Station ID — Fax:Tel:Name:

Program your name and fax number to appear on each page you fax.

3-2

4. Tone/Pulse — TonePulse

Selects the dialing mode. 3-3

5. Dial Tone — DetectionNo Detection

You can shorten the dial tone detect pause.

C-20

0. LocalLanguage

— EnglishFrench

Allows you to change the LCD language for your country.

See Quick Setup Guide




Menu and Features

B - 14

B

Copy options keyUse the Options key to quickly set the following copy settings temporarily for the next copy. After you choose each setting by pressing Menu/Set, the LCD shows Set temporarily. Press Black Start or Color Start when you have finished choosing settings.

* XXX is the paper size detected by the tray or the small paper size you set in Menu/Set, 1, 3.

Note■ If both trays are using paper that is the same size, Auto will allow your machine to take paper

from Tray#2 if Tray#1 is out of paper.

■ The factory settings are shown in Bold.

Press Options Menu Selections Options Page

Quality Auto

Text

Photo

11-3

Stack/Sort Stack

Sort

11-7

Brightness ▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

11-7

Contrast ▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

▼ - + ▲

11-8

Page Layout Off(1 in 1)

2 in 1 (P)

2 in 1 (L)

4 in 1 (P)

4 in 1 (L)

Poster(3 x 3)

11-5

Tray Select

(This menu only appears when you have the optional tray#2.)

Auto

#1 (XXX)*

#2 (XXX)*

11-2

select select

Chapter B

B - 15

Entering TextWhen you are setting certain menu selections, such as the Station ID, you may need to type text into the machine. Most number keys have three or four letters printed above the keys. The keys for 0, # and do not have printed letters because they are used for special characters.

By pressing the appropriate number key repeatedly, you can access the character you want.

Inserting spaces

To enter a space in the fax number, press once between numbers. To enter a space in the name, press twice between characters.

Making corrections

If you entered a letter incorrectly and want to change it, press to move the cursor under the incorrect character. Then press Stop/Exit. All letters above and to the right of the cursor will be deleted. Re-enter the correct character. You can also back up and type over incorrect letters.

Repeating letters

If you need to enter a character that is on the same key as the previous character, press to move the cursor to the right before you press the key again.

Special characters and symbols

Press , # or 0, and then press or to move the cursor under the special character or symbol you want. Then press Menu/Set to select it.

Press Key

one time

two times

three times

four times

2 A B C 2

3 D E F 3

4 G H I 4

5 J K L 5

6 M N O 6

7 P Q R S

8 T U V 8

9 W X Y Z

▲

▲

▲

▲

Press for (space) ! " # $ % & ’ ( ) + , - . /

Press # for : ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^ _

Press 0 for É À È Ê Î Ç Ë Ö 0

▲

▲

C - 1

C

C

Troubleshooting

Error messages

As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur. If this happens, your machine identifies the problem and displays an error message. The most common error messages are shown below.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

IMPORTANT

For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be made from within that country.

ERROR MESSAGES

ERROR MESSAGE CAUSE ACTION

Calibrate

CalibrationFailed

Toner is getting low. Check that the toner cartridges are not low and try again.

Check Tray#1

Check Tray#2

The indicated tray is not completely closed.

Close the indicated tray properly.

Comm.Error Poor phone line quality caused a communication error.

Send the fax again or connect the machine to another telephone line. If the problem continues, call the telephone company and ask them to check your phone line.

Connection Fail You tried to poll a fax machine that is not in Polled Waiting mode.

Check the other fax machine’s polling setup.

Cover Open

Close the back cover(3)

The back cover is not completely closed.

Close the back cover of the machine.

Cover Open

Close the front cover(2)

The front cover is not completely closed.

Close the front cover of the machine.

Cover Open

Close the inside cover(1)

The inside cover is not completely closed.

Close the inside cover of the machine.

Chapter C

C - 2

Data Remaining Print data is left in the machine’s memory.

Re-start printing from your computer.

Print data is left in the machine’s memory. The interface cable was unplugged while the computer was sending the data to the machine.

Press Job Cancel. The machine will cancel the job and clear it from the memory. Try to print again.

Disconnected The other person or other person’s fax machine stopped the call.

Try to send or receive again.

Document Jam The document was not inserted or fed properly, or the document scanned from the ADF was too long.

See Document jams on page C-6.

See Using the ADF (automatic document feeder) on page 2-10.

DR Mode in Use The machine is set to Distinctive Ring mode. You can not change the Receive Mode from Manual to another mode.

Set Distinctive Ring to Off.

See Turning off Distinctive Ring on page 7-8.

Near Waste Toner The waste toner pack is nearly full. Replace the waste toner pack. (See Replacing the waste toner pack on page C-32.)

No OPC Belt The OPC belt cartridge is not installed. Install the OPC belt cartridge. (See Replacing the OPC belt cartridge (Photo Conductor Unit Type 140) on page C-33.)

No Paper Fed The machine is out of paper or paper is not properly loaded in the indicated paper tray.

Refill the paper in the paper tray.

—OR—

Remove the paper and load it again.

No Response/Busy The number you dialed does not answer or is busy.

Verify the number and try again.

No Toner X

X = C, M, Y, K (K: Black, C: Cyan, M: Magenta, Y: Yellow)

The toner cartridge is not installed properly.

Reinstall the X toner cartridge. (See How to replace a toner cartridge on page C-30 and follow the steps for properly taking out and inserting the cartridge.)

Not Registered You tried to access a One-Touch or Speed Dial number that is not programmed.

Set up the One-Touch or Speed Dial number. (See Storing One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-3 and Storing Speed-Dial numbers on page 7-4.)

ERROR MESSAGES



C - 3

C

Out of Memory The machine’s memory is full. (Fax sending or copy operation in progress)

Press Black Start or Color Start to send or copy the scanned pages.

—OR—

Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other operations in progress have finished and then try again.

—OR—

Clear the faxes from the memory. (See Out of Memory message on page 5-3.)

(Printing operation in progress)

Reduce print resolution. (See Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

—OR—

Clear the faxes from the memory. (See Out of Memory message on page 5-3.)

—OR—

Add more memory. (See Installing additional memoryon page D-3.)

Paper Jam A1

Paper Jam A2

Paper Jam B

Paper Jam C

Remove the jammed paper. See the alphanumerical diagram to check on the location.

(See Paper jams on page C-7.)

Replace 120K Kit It is time to replace the 120K kit. Call Customer Service to replace the 120K kit.

Replace OPC Belt It is time to replace the OPC belt cartridge.

Replace the OPC belt cartridge. (See Replace OPC belt cartridge message on page C-33.)

Replace PF Kit2 It is time to replace the PF kit2. Call Customer Service to replace the PF kit2.

Stacker Full The output tray is full of paper. Remove the paper from the output tray.

Toner Empty X

X = C, M, Y, K

The toner is used up and printing is not possible.

Replace the used toner cartridge with a new one. (See Replacing a toner cartridge on page C-29.)

Toner Error The machine has detected an incompatible toner cartridge.

Use only our genuine toner cartridges.

Toner Low X

X = C, M, Y, K

The indicated color toner is nearly empty.

Order a new toner cartridge now.

ERROR MESSAGES


Chapter C

C - 4

Unable to Init.

(Initialize)

Unable to Print

Unable to Scan

The machine has a mechanical problem.

Turn off the machine's power switch and then turn it on again. If the error message continues leave the machine for several minutes and then try it again. (The machine can be turned off for up to 60 hours without losing faxes stored in the memory. If the machine will be off longer than 60 hours, you can save the faxes in your PC. See Transferring faxes to your PC on page C-5.)

Waste Toner Full The waste toner pack is full. Replace the waste toner pack. (See Replacing the waste toner pack on page C-32.)

ERROR MESSAGES



C - 5

C

Checking if the machine has faxes in its memory


2 If the LCD shows No Data, there are no faxes left in the machine’s memory.

—OR—

If the LCD shows Enter Fax No.there are faxes in the machine’s memory.

• You can transfer the faxes to another fax machine. (See Forwarding faxes to another fax machine.)

• You can transfer the faxes from the machine’s memory to your PC. (See Transferring faxes to your PC.)

NoteYou can transfer the Fax Journal report to another fax machine by pressing Menu/Set, 9, 0, 2 in Step 1.

Forwarding faxes to another fax machine

If you have not set up your Station ID you cannot enter fax transfer mode.

1 Enter the fax number to which the faxes will be forwarded.


Transferring faxes to your PC

You can transfer the faxes from your machine’s memory to your PC.

1 Press Stop/Exit.

2 Make sure you have installed Multi-Function Suite on your PC, and then turn on PC Fax Receiving on the PC. (For details about PC Fax Receive, see PC-FAX software in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

3 Make sure you have set PC Fax Receive on the machine. (See PC Fax Receive on page 8-3.)

During setup the LCD will ask if you want to transfer the faxes to your PC.

4 To transfer all faxes to your PC, press 1.

—OR—

To exit and leave the faxes in the memory, press 2.

NoteIf there is an error on the machine’s LCD, after the faxes have been transferred disconnect the machine from the power source for several minutes, and then reconnect it.

Chapter C

C - 6

Document jams

If the document is jammed, follow the steps below.

Document is jammed in the top of the ADF unit

1 Take out any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.

2 Open the ADF cover.

3 Pull the jammed document out to the left.

4 Close the ADF cover.

Press Stop/Exit.

NoteTo avoid future document jams close the ADF cover properly by pushing it gently in the center.

Document is jammed under the document cover

1 Take out any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.

2 Lift the document cover.

3 Pull the jammed document out to the right.

4 Close the document cover.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

Document is jammed at the output tray

1 Pull the jammed document out to the right.

2 Press Stop/Exit.


C - 7

C

Paper jams

If paper jams inside the machine, the machine will stop. One of the following LCD messages will appear to tell you where to find the jammed paper.

Paper may jam in the paper tray, inside the machine, at the back cover, or where the paper comes out of the machine. Check where the jam is and follow the instructions on the next few pages to remove the jammed paper.

If the error message still appears on the LCD after you remove the jammed paper, there may be more paper jammed somewhere else. Please check the machine thoroughly.

After you have followed the instructions, the machine will resume printing automatically.

After a paper jam has occurred, data usually stays in the machine’s memory.

After removing the jammed paper, and the next printed page is stained with toner, print several test pages before restarting your print job.

A1

C

B

A2

Paper Jam A1

Paper Jam A2

Paper Jam B

Paper Jam C

Paper jam in the standard paper tray (TRAY1)

Paper jam in the optional lower tray (TRAY2)

Paper jam inside the machine.

Paper jam where the paper comes out of the machine.

CAUTION

The fusing unit and the parts around it are hot! Never touch the shaded areas shown below.

Chapter C

C - 8

NoteDo not use the following paper:

■ Bent/curled paper

■ Moist paper

■ Paper that does not meet specifications

Paper Jam A1 / Paper Jam A2

If there is a paper jam in the paper tray, follow these steps:

1 Pull out the paper tray.

2 Take out the jammed paper.

3 Put the paper tray back in the machine.

4 Open the back cover. If there is any jammed paper where the paper comes out, remove it.

5 Close the back cover.

IMPORTANT

■ Do not touch the toner surface of the jammed paper. It might stain your hands or clothes.

■ Remove the jammed paper carefully to prevent spreading toner.

■ Take care not to stain your hands and clothes. Wash toner stains immediately with cold water.

■ Never touch the transfer roller.

■ If the paper in the paper tray is creased at the edges, paper jams can occur. To prevent this, please turn the paper over.

Paper Jam A1

Paper Jam A2


C - 9

C

Paper Jam B

If paper is caught inside the machine, follow these steps:

1 Open the back cover.

2 If the paper jammed while exiting the paper tray, remove the jammed paper by holding it with both hands and pulling it slowly toward you.

3 If the paper is caught in the registration roller (1), remove the jammed paper by holding it with both hands and pulling it slowly toward you.

4 If the paper is caught in the fusing roller, release the fusing unit pressure release levers on both sides.

5 Remove the jammed paper at the back of the machine by holding it with both hands and pulling it slowly toward you.

6 Lock the fusing unit pressure release levers.


CAUTION

These paper jams are near the fusing roller, which is extremely hot during operation. Remove the paper carefully.

Paper Jam B

1

Chapter C

C - 10

Paper Jam C

If paper has passed behind the back cover and there is a paper jam where the paper comes out, follow the steps below:

1 Open the back cover and release the fusing unit pressure release levers.

2 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out slowly.

3 Reset the fusing unit pressure release levers.


Paper Jam C


C - 11

C

If you are having difficulty with your machine

If you think there is a problem with the way your faxes look, make a copy first. If the copy looks good, the problem is probably not your machine. Check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips.

DIFFICULTY SUGGESTIONS

Printing or Receiving Faxes

Condensed print and horizontal streaks or the top and bottom of sentences are cut off.

You probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.

Poor print quality See Improving the print quality on page C-16.

Horizontal streaks; lines are missing.

You may get a fax with horizontal streaks or with missing lines. Usually this is caused by a poor telephone connection. Ask the other party to send the fax again.

Received faxes appear as split or blank pages.

If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra blank page, turn on the Auto Reduction menu setting. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax (Auto Reduction) on page 6-4.)

Phone Line or Connections

Dialing does not work. Check for a dial tone. Change Tone/Pulse setting. (See Tone or Pulse on page 7-6.) Check all line cord connections. Check power cord connection. Send a manual fax by pressing Hook or by lifting the handset of the external phone and dialing the number. Wait to hear fax receiving tones before pressing Black Start.

The machine does not answer when called.

Make sure the machine is in the correct receiving mode for your setup. (See Receive Mode on page 6-1.) Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check the telephone line cord connection. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone company to check the line.

Chapter C

C - 12

Sending Faxes

Poor fax send quality Change your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your machine’s scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner. (See Cleaning the scanner glass on page C-22.)

Transmission Verification Report says ‘RESULT:NG’.

There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.

If you send a PC FAX message and get ‘RESULT:NG’ on the Transmission Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To gain extra memory, you can turn off Fax Storage, Paging or PC-FAX receive (see Turning off Remote Fax Options on page 8-4), print fax messages in memory (see Printing a fax from the memory on page 6-6) or cancel a Delayed Fax or Polling Job (see Canceling a fax in progress on page 5-2). If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to check your phone line.

If you frequently get transmission errors due to possible interference on the phone line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Normal or Basic.(See Compatibility on page C-20.)

Vertical black lines when sending. If the copy you made shows the same problem, your scanner is dirty. (See Cleaning the scanner glass on page C-22.)

Handling Incoming Calls

Machine ‘Hears’ Voice as CNG Tone.

If Easy Receive is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a calling fax machine and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Easy Receive to Off.(See Easy Receive on page 6-5.)

Sending a Fax Call to the machine. If you answered on an external or extension phone, press your Fax Receive Code (default setting is ( 51). When your machine answers, hang up.

Custom features on a single line. If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, RingMaster, Voice Mail, an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single phone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving faxes.

For Example: Your machine handles the Caller ID subscriber service. However, if you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax, the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. The ECM feature should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your business, a separate line with no custom features is recommended.

Menu Setting Difficulties

The machine beeps when you try to access the Setup Receive and Setup Send menus.

If the Fax key is not illuminated, press it to turn on Fax mode. The Setup Receive setting (Menu/Set, 2, 1) and Setup Send setting (Menu/Set, 2, 2) are available only when the machine is in Fax mode.

Copy Quality Difficulties

Vertical streaks appear in copies. Sometimes you may see vertical streaks on your copies. The scanner glass may be dirty. (See Cleaning the scanner glass on page C-22.)



C - 13

C

Printing Difficulties

The machine does not print. Please make sure:

• The machine is plugged in and the power switch is turned On.

—OR—

• The toner cartridge and the OPC belt cartridge are installed properly. (See Replacing a toner cartridge on page C-29 and Replacing the OPC belt cartridge (Photo Conductor Unit Type 140) on page C-33.)

—OR—

• The interface cable is securely connected between the machine and computer. (See the Quick Setup Guide).

—OR—

• The correct printer driver has been installed and selected.

—OR—

• Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message. (See Error messages on page C-1.)

—OR—

• The machine is online. Click Start and then Printers and Faxes. Select ‘SP C210SF’ and right-click. Make sure that “Use Printer Offline” is unchecked.

The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbage.

Turn off the machine's power switch and then turn it on again. If the error message continues leave the machine for several minutes and then try it again. (The machine can be turned off for up to 60 hours without losing faxes stored in the memory.) Check the settings in your application software to make sure it is set up to work with your machine

The machine prints first couple of pages correctly, then some pages have text missing.

Your computer is not recognizing the machine’s input buffer full signal. Please make sure you connect the interface cable to the machine correctly. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)

The machine cannot print full pages of a document.Out of Memory message occurs.

Reduce the printing resolution. (See Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Reduce the complexity of your document and try again. Reduce the graphic quality or the number of font sizes within your application software.

—OR—

Add more memory. See Installing additional memory on page D-3.

My headers or footers appear when I view my document on the screen but do not appear when I print them.

There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom. Adjust the top and bottom margins in your document to allow for this.

Scanning Difficulties

TWAIN errors appear while scanning.

Make sure the TWAIN driver is selected as the primary source. In PaperPort®,click Scan in the File menu and select the TWAIN driver.


Chapter C

C - 14

Software Difficulties

Cannot install software or print. Run the Repair Multi-Function Suite program on the CD-ROM. This program will repair and reinstall the software.

Cannot perform ‘2 in 1’ or ‘4 in 1’ printing.

Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the same.

Machine does not print from Adobe Illustrator

Try to reduce the print resolution. (See Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

—OR—

Add more memory. See Installing additional memory on page D-3.

When using ATM fonts, some characters are missing or some characters are printed in their place.

If you are using Windows® 98/98SE/Me, select ‘Printer Settings’ from the ‘Start’ menu. Select the properties of the ‘SP C210SF’. Click ‘Spool Setting’ on the ‘Details’ tab. Select ‘RAW’ from ‘Spool Data Format.’

‘Unable to write to LPT1’ or ‘LPT1 already in use’ Error Message appears.

1. Make sure the machine is on (plugged into the AC power outlet and the power switch turned on) and that it is connected directly to the computer using the IEEE-1284 bi-directional parallel cable. The cable must not go through another peripheral device (such as a Zip Drive, External CD-ROM Drive, or Switch box).

2. Make sure the machine is not displaying an error message on the LCD Display.

3. Make sure no other device drivers, which also communicate through the parallel port, are running automatically when you boot up the computer (such as, drivers for Zip Drives, External CD-ROM Drive, etc.) Suggested areas to check: (Load=, Run=command lines in the win.ini file or the Setup Group)

4. Check with your computer manufacturer to confirm that the computer’s parallel port settings in the BIOS are set to support a bi-directional machine; i.e. (Parallel Port Mode – ECP)

‘MFC is Busy’ Error Message appears.

Paper Handling Difficulties

The machine does not load paper.

The LCD shows No Paper Fed or Paper Jam.

If there is no paper, load a new stack of paper into the paper tray. If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight. If the paper is curled, you should straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper, turn the stack over and put it back into the paper tray. Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again.

If the LCD shows Paper Jam and you still have a problem, see Paper jams on page C-7.

How can I load envelopes? You can only load envelopes into the standard paper tray. To check that you are loading them properly, see Loading paper and envelopes on page 2-8.

Make sure your application software is set up to print the envelope size you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup or Document Setup menu of your software. Please refer to the manual provided with your software application.

What paper can I use? You can use plain paper, recycled paper, envelopes, transparencies and labels that are made for laser machines. (For information on paper you can use, see Acceptable paper and other media on page 2-1.)

How can I clear paper jams? See Paper jams on page C-7.



C - 15

C

Print Quality Difficulties

Printed pages are curled. Low quality thin or thick paper can cause this problem. Make sure you select the Paper Type that suits the media type you use. (See Acceptable paper and other media on page 2-1.)

Printed pages are smeared. The Paper Type setting may be incorrect for the type of print media you are using—OR—The print media may be too thick or have a rough surface. (See Acceptable paper and other media on page 2-1 and Basic tab in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Printouts are too light. If this problem occurs when making copies or printing received faxes, turn off Toner Save mode in the machine’s menu settings. (See Toner Save on page 3-7.)

Set Toner Save mode to off in the Advanced tab in the printer driver. (See Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Network Difficulties

I cannot print over the Network See Printing Problems in the Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM

—OR—

1. Make sure that your machine is powered on and is online and in Ready mode. 2. Print a Network Configuration list and check the current Network settings printed in this list. (See Printing reports on page 9-1.)

3. Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify that the cabling and network connections are good. If possible, try connecting the machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable.

4. Contact your Network Administrator to check if the settings are correct.

The network scanning feature does not work.

Firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary network connection. Follow the instructions below to disable the Firewall. If you are using a personal Firewall software, please refer to the User’s Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer.

<Windows® XP SP2 users.>

1. Click the ‘Start’ button, ‘Settings’, ‘Control Panel’ and then ‘Windows Firewall’. Make sure that Windows Firewall on the ‘Basic’ tab is set to On.

2. Click the ‘Exceptions’ tab and ‘Add port’ button.

3. Enter any name, port number (54295 for network scanning), select ‘UDP’ and click OK.

4. Make sure if the new setting is added and is checked, and then click OK.

For Windows® XP SP1 users, contact your service representative.

Your computer cannot find your machine.

Firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary network connection. For detail, see the instruction above.


Chapter C

C - 16

Improving the print quality

If you are having problems with print quality, please do a test print first (Menu/Set, 4, 1).If the problem appears on the printout, then match it to one of the examples below and follow the recommendation. If the problem does not appear on the test print, please check driver settings and the interface cables as the problem may not lie with the machine.

Examples of poor print quality Recommendation

White lines or bands or ribbing across the page

■ Check that the machine is on a solid level surface.

■ Check that the back cover is closed properly.

■ Check that the toner cartridges are installed properly.

■ Shake the toner cartridges gently.

■ Check that the transfer roller is installed properly.

Colors are light or unclear on the whole page

■ Check that the recommended paper was used. (See Recommended paper on page 2-1.)

■ Change the paper to freshly unpacked paper, and then check that the problem is solved.


■ Shake the toner cartridges gently.

■ Clean the laser glass. (See Cleaning the laser glass on page C-24.)

■ Turn off Toner Save. (See Toner Save on page 3-7.)

White streaks or bands down the page

Clean the laser glass. (See Cleaning the laser glass on page C-24.)

Identify the missing color and replace that toner cartridge. (See Replacing a toner cartridge on page C-29.)

The toner has probably reached the end of its life.

However, when you see a white vertical line on the toner roller, try the following procedure.

■ Cut a sheet approx. 1.97 in. x 1.97 in. (50 mm x 50 mm) out of a transparency film.

■ Insert the film about 2.54 in. (10 mm) into the gap between the toner roller and the blade.

■ Slide the film and pull it out as shown below.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

RABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.



R


C - 17

C

Colored streaks or bands down the page

■ Identify the color and replace that toner cartridge. (See Replacing a toner cartridge on page C-29.)

■ Replace the OPC belt cartridge. (See Replacing the OPC belt cartridge (Photo Conductor Unit Type 140) on page C-33.)

Colored lines across the page ■ Clean the registration roller, the paper pick-up roller, the transfer roller guide and the exit roller. (See Cleaning to prevent paper jams on page C-22.)

■ If the problem continues, identify the color and replace that toner cartridge. (See Replacing a toner cartridge on page C-29.)

White spots or hollow print ■ Change the paper to freshly unpacked paper.

■ Check that the recommended paper was used. (See Recommended paper on page 2-1.)

■ Check that the room temperature is higher than 50 °F (10 °C)

Completely blank or some colors are missing


■ Check that the front cover is closed properly.

■ Identify the missing color and check that the toner cartridge is installed properly.

■ Replace the toner cartridge. (See Replacing a toner cartridge on page C-29.)


Colored spots or Toner stain ■ Identify the color causing the problem and replace the toner cartridge. (See Replacing a toner cartridge on page C-29.)










R

Chapter C

C - 18

Toner scatter or toner stain ■ Identify the color causing the problem and replace that toner cartridge. (See Replacing a toner cartridge on page C-29.)


The color of your printouts is not what you expected


■ Check that the toner cartridges are not empty. (See Toner empty message on page C-29.)

■ Perform the calibration. (Menu/Set, 4, 3)

■ Adjust the color by using the custom setting in the driver. Colors the machine can print and colors you see on a monitor are different. The machine may not be able to reproduce the colors on your monitor.

■ Check to make sure the recommended paper was used. (See Recommended paper on page 2-1.)

All one color Replace the OPC belt cartridge. (See Replacing the OPC belt cartridge (Photo Conductor Unit Type 140) on page C-33.)

Shade on the transparency ■ Change to the recommended type of transparency, and then check that the problem is solved.

■ Check that the media type mode is selected properly.

Color mis-registration ■ Check that the OPC belt cartridge is installed properly.

■ Check that the cleaning roller is installed properly.


Uneven density appears periodically across the page


■ Check that the OPC belt cartridge is installed properly.

■ Check that the cleaning roller is installed properly.


■ Check that the fusing unit is installed properly.




R



RRRABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.


C - 19

C

Missing image at edge ■ Check that the toner cartridges are installed properly.

■ Check that the OPC belt cartridge is installed properly.

■ Identify the color causing the problem and replace the toner cartridge. (See Replacing a toner cartridge on page C-29.)


Wrinkle ■ Change to a recommended type of paper, and then check that the problem is solved. (See Recommended paper on page 2-1.)



■ Check that the fusing unit is installed properly.

Mixed color image ■ Check that the front cover is closed properly.



■ Replace the toner cartridges. (See Replacing a toner cartridge on page C-29.)

Insufficient gloss Check that the recommended paper is being used. (See Recommended paper on page 2-1.)

Offset image Check that the recommended paper is being used. (See Recommended paper on page 2-1.)

Poor fixing ■ Check that the recommended paper is used. (See Recommended paper on page 2-1.)

■ Check that the media type mode is selected properly.

■ Check that the release lever of the fusing unit is set properly.

Poor fixing when printed on thick paper

Set the machine to thick paper mode through the control panel or the printer driver. (See the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)



R





R

Chapter C

C - 20

Setting Dial Tone Detection

Setting the dial tone to Detection will shorten the dial tone detect pause.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Detection or No Detection.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Compatibility

If you are having difficulty sending or receiving a fax due to possible interference on the phone line, we recommend that you adjust the Equalization for compatibility to reduce the modem speed for fax operations.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Basic or Normal or High.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Note■ Basic reduces the modem speed to 9600

bps. Unless interference is a recurring problem on your phone line, you may prefer to use it only when needed.

■ Normal sets the modem speed at 14400 bps.

■ High sets the modem speed at 33600 bps

■ When you change the Compatibility to Basic, the ECM feature is not available.

Routine maintenance

We recommend cleaning the following parts of the machine every 20,000 printed pages or every 12 months:

■ Paper guides of the paper tray

■ Registration roller

■ Paper pick-up roller

■ Transfer roller unit

■ Transfer roller guide

■ Exit roller

■ Laser unit

■ Laser glass

Initial Setup5.Dial Tone

Miscellaneous1.Compatibility

IMPORTANT

If toner scatters and your hands or clothes get dirty, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.


C - 21

C

Cleaning the outside of the machine

Clean the outside of the machine as follows:


2 Wipe the outside of the machine with a soft cloth to remove dust.

3 Remove any paper that is stuck inside the paper tray.

4 Wipe the inside and the outside of the paper tray with a soft cloth to remove dust.

5 Re-load the paper and put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.

IMPORTANT

■ Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine will damage the outside surface of the machine.

■ Do not use cleaning materials that contain ammonia.

■ Do not use isopropyl alcohol to remove dirt from the control panel. It may crack the panel.

Chapter C

C - 22

Cleaning the scanner glass

Lift the document cover. Clean the scanner glass and white plastic above it with isopropyl alcohol on a soft lint-free cloth.

In the ADF unit, clean the white plastic bar and the scanner glass strip under it with isopropyl alcohol on a lint-free cloth.

Cleaning to prevent paper jams

When you clean the inside of the machine, pay attention to the following:

White Plastic

Scanner glass

Document Cover

Glass Strip

White Plastic Bar

CAUTION

■ The fusing unit and the parts around it are hot! Never touch the shaded areas shown below.

■ Be careful not to inhale the toner.

IMPORTANT

■ When you clean parts inside the machine, use a clean, dry soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use Isopropyl alcohol.

■ If your clothes are smeared with toner, wipe off the toner with a dry cloth. Immediately wash your clothes in cold water to avoid stains.

■ Never touch or clean the transfer roller because print quality may be adversely affected.


C - 23

C

1 Turn off the machine’s power switch. Unplug the telephone line cord first, and then unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet. Open the back cover of the machine.

2 Clean the registration roller and the paper pick-up roller with a dry soft, lint-free cloth to prevent paper jams.

3 Clean the transfer roller unit and the transfer roller guide with a dry soft, lint-free cloth to prevent paper jams.

CAUTION

■ Be careful you do not break the actuator while cleaning the registration roller and paper pick-up roller.

■ Make sure you do not put too much pressure on the registration roller and paper pick-up roller. This could damage them and cause poor print quality.

Chapter C

C - 24

4 Clean the exit roller. This will help to prevent paper jams at the paper exit and dirt from appearing on your printouts.


6 Plug the machine’s power cord back into the AC power outlet first, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine’s power switch.

Cleaning the laser glass

1 Turn off the machine’s power switch. Unplug the telephone line cord first, and then unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.



4 To release the lock, push the green belt cartridge lock levers that are on both sides inwards.

5 Remove the OPC belt cartridge from the machine.


C - 25

C

6 Place the OPC belt cartridge on a flat surface and cover the shiny green OPC belt with a piece of paper to prevent exposing it to light.

7 Open the front cover of the machine.

8 Take all the toner cartridges out of the machine.

9 Clean the surface of the laser unit with a dry soft, lint-free cloth.

0 Open the laser glass cover.

A Clean the surface of the laser glass with a dry soft, lint-free cloth.

B Close the laser glass cover.

C Put all the toner cartridges and the OPC belt cartridge back in the machine. Do not try to push or lock the new toner cartridge in. It must rest loosely in the guide rails.

D Close the front cover and the inside cover, and then close the scanner unit.

E Plug the machine’s power cord back into the AC power outlet first, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine’s power switch.

IMPORTANT

■ Do not touch the OPC belt surface with your hands.

■ Do not expose the OPC belt cartridge to bright room light or sunlight (a light source of 74.3 footcandles or 800 lux) for more than two minutes to avoid damaging the belt.

CAUTION

Do not use volatile liquids such as thinner or benzene for cleaning the laser glass. This might cause poor print quality.

Chapter C

C - 26

Replacing the consumable itemsYou will need to replace the following consumable items regularly. When the time comes to replace consumable items, the following messages will appear on the LCD.

The machine will stop printing when the following maintenance messages appear on the LCD.

The following are maintenance messages that appear on the LCD in the Ready mode. These messages provide advanced warnings to replace the consumable items before they run out. To avoid any inconvenience, you may wish to buy spare consumable items before the machine stops printing.

NoteThe toner cartridges that come supplied with this machine are starter toners.

Starter toners, are toner cartridges with approx. half the page yield of the standard toner cartridge, approx. 1,500 pages (Black) and approx. 1,500 pages (Cyan, Magenta and Yellow) at approximately 5% print coverage (Letter/A4 size).

LCD messages Consumable item to replace

Approximate life1 How to replace

Order No.

Toner cartridge

X = C, M, Y, KC = Cyan,

M = Magenta,Y = Yellow,K = Black

■ Type 14010,000 pages (Black)2

6,600 pages (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow)2

■ Type 140LY5,000 pages (Black)2


See Toner empty message on page C-29.

Waste toner pack 12,000 images See Waste toner pack full messageonpage C-31.

Waste Toner Bottle Type 140

LCD message Consumable part to replace


Order No.

Toner cartridge

X = C, M, Y, KC = Cyan, M = Magenta,

Y = Yellow,K = Black

■ Type 14010,000 pages (Black)2


■ Type 140LY5,000 pages (Black)2


See Toner nearly empty message on page C-28.

Toner Empty X

Waste Toner Full

Toner Low X


C - 27

C

The following are maintenance messages that appear alternatively with the normal message on the upper row of the LCD when the machine is in the Ready mode. These messages advise you that you will need to replace each of the consumable items as soon as possible, since the consumable item’s end of life has been reached. The machine will continue printing when any of these messages appear on the LCD.

1 Definition of pages: actual output page number.Definition of images: If the image on a page contains only one color of either Cyan, Magenta, Yellow or Black =>1 image, two colors => 2 images, three colors => 3 images, four colors => 4 images.

2 At 5% coverage print (Letter/A4 size).

LCD messages Consumable part to replace


Order No.

Waste toner pack 12,000 Images See C-31. Waste Toner Bottle Type 140

OPC belt cartridge 60,000 images(Continuously printed)

See C-33. Photo Conductor Unit Type 140

Transfer belt cleanerTransfer rollerPaper pick-up rollerSeparator pad

Transfer belt

120,000 pages2 Call Customer Service to replace the 120K kit.

Paper feeding kit 2.(Paper pick-up roller Separator pad)

Call Customer Service to replace the paper feeding kit 2.

Near Waste Toner

Replace OPC Belt

Replace 120K Kit

Replace PF Kit2

Chapter C

C - 28

Note■ Discard the used consumable item according to local regulations, keeping it separate from

domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office. Be sure to re-seal the consumable item tightly so that the material inside does not spill.

■ We recommend placing used consumable items on a piece of paper or cloth to prevent accidentally spilling or scattering the material inside.

■ If you use paper that is not a direct equivalent for the recommended paper, the life of consumable items and machine parts may be reduced.

■ The projected life for each of the items listed is based on an average of 5% coverage of the printable area using any color toner cartridge. Frequency of replacement will vary depending on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage and type of media used.

Toner cartridges

A new toner cartridge contains enough toner to print approx. 10,000 pages for Black and approx. 6,600 pages for Cyan, Magenta and Yellow Letter/A4-size single-sided pages at about 5% coverage.

Note■ The amount of toner used varies

depending on how much print is on the page and the print density setting.

■ If you change the print density setting for lighter or darker printing, the amount of toner that is used will change.

Toner nearly empty message

Check printed pages, page counter, and display messages regularly. If you see the message below, the machine has nearly run out of the indicated toner or the indicated toner is not evenly distributed inside the cartridge. Make sure you have a new toner cartridge ready for replacement.

X = C, M, Y, K

C stands for Cyan, M stands for Magenta and Y stands for Yellow, K stands for Black.

Although you can print approx. 300 (Black) and approx. 500 (Cyan, Magenta and Yellow) additional pages (at 5% coverage) after the Toner Low message first appears, you should replace the toner cartridge with a new one before it becomes completely empty.

Toner Low X


C - 29

C

Toner empty message

When the following message appears on the LCD and the machine stops printing, you need to replace the toner cartridge.

Replacing a toner cartridge

The toner cartridge can print approx. 10,000 pages for Black, 6,600 pages for Cyan, Magenta and Yellow. When the toner cartridge is running low, the LCD show the below message. X shows the toner color that is nearly empty. (C = Cyan, M = Magenta, Y = Yellow, K = Black) When the toner becomes empty, this message will change to Toner Empty X.

Actual page count will vary depending on your average type of document (i.e., standard letter, detailed graphics).

NoteWe recommend that you clean the machine when you replace a toner cartridge.

WARNING

Do not put the toner cartridge into a fire. It could explode.

Toner Empty X

Toner Low X

IMPORTANT

■ We strongly recommend that you do not refill the toner cartridges provided with your machine. We also strongly recommend that you continue to use only our genuine replacement toner cartridges. Use or attempted use of potentially incompatible toner and/or cartridges in the machine may cause damage to the machine and/or may result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our warranty coverage does not apply to any problem that is caused by the use of unauthorized third party toner and/or cartridges. To protect your investment and obtain premium performance from the machine, we strongly recommend the use of our genuine supplies.

■ Printing with a third-party toner or third-party toner cartridges may reduce not only the print quality but also the quality and life of the machine itself. It may also cause serious damage to the performance and life of a OPC belt cartridge. Warranty coverage does not apply to problems caused by the use of third-party toner or third-party toner cartridges.

■ Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until immediately before you install it in the machine. If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long period of time, the toner life is shortened.

Chapter C

C - 30

How to replace a toner cartridge


2 Pull out the used toner cartridge.

3 Take the new toner cartridge out of the box.

Note■ Discard the used toner cartridge

according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste.

■ Be sure to seal the toner cartridge tightly so toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.

4 Hold the cartridge level with both hands and gently rock it from side to side three to four times to spread the toner evenly inside the cartridge. Remove the tape labeled REMOVE and the orange protective cover from the new toner cartridge.

Note■ Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until

immediately before you put it in the machine. If toner cartridges are left unpacked for a long time, the toner life will be shortened.

■ Put the toner cartridge into the machine immediately after you have removed the protective cover. To prevent degradation to the print quality, do not touch the shaded parts shown.

IMPORTANT

Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.


C - 31

C

5 Put in the new toner cartridge by positioning it in the guide. Slide it gently into the machine. Do not try to push or lock the new toner cartridge in; it must rest loosely in the guide rails and will automatically be positioned properly when the front cover is closed. Note that each color cartridge is individually keyed to prevent improper installation. Match each cartridge color label to the same color label on the machine.


Waste toner pack

After you have printed approximately 12,000 images at 5% coverage, you must change the waste toner pack. When the waste toner pack is nearly full a warning message will be displayed.

Waste toner pack full message

When the waste toner pack is full, the following message appears on the LCD and the machine will stop printing. When you see this message, you must replace the waste toner pack.

IMPORTANT

■ If you use consumable items other than our genuine supplies or if you use refilled toner cartridges, the machine could be damaged or might not work properly. This may void your warranty.

■ Do not stand a toner cartridge on its end or turn it upside down.

K

Y

M

C

K

Y

M

C

CAUTION

■ Do not re-use the waste toner pack.

■ Do not put the waste toner pack into a fire. It could explode.

■ Be careful not to spill the toner. Do not inhale or allow it to get into your eyes.

Near Waste Toner

Waste Toner Full

Chapter C

C - 32

Replacing the waste toner pack


2 Remove the waste toner pack from the holder at the lower right hand side of the machine. Be careful not to spill the toner.

3 Take the cap off the new waste toner pack, and put the cap on the used waste toner pack.

Note■ When you discard the used waste toner

pack, place it in the plastic bag included with the replacement waste toner pack.

■ Discard the used waste toner pack according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.

4 Put the new waste toner pack into the waste toner pack holder.


IMPORTANT

Handle the waste toner pack carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.


C - 33

C

OPC belt cartridge

Replace OPC belt cartridge message

When the OPC belt cartridge runs out, the following message appears on the LCD. When you see this message, you must replace the OPC belt cartridge:

Replacing the OPC belt cartridge (Photo Conductor Unit Type 140)

1 Turn off the machine’s power switch.



4 To release the lock, push the green belt cartridge lock levers on both sides inwards.

5 Remove the OPC belt cartridge from the machine.

6 Remove the tension release pins from both sides of the new OPC belt cartridge.

IMPORTANT

■ Do not touch the green film of the OPC belt cartridge. If you touch it, it could degrade print quality.

■ Do not expose the OPC belt cartridge to bright room light or sunlight (a light source of 74.3 footcandles or 800 lux) for more than two minutes to avoid damaging the belt.

■ Damage caused by improper handling of the OPC belt cartridge may void your warranty.

Replace OPC Belt

Chapter C

C - 34

7 Remove the protective sheet from the new OPC belt cartridge. Do not touch the green part of the OPC belt cartridge.

8 Put the new OPC belt cartridge into the machine guides with the flat side facing you.

9 To lock the cartridge into the machine, push the belt cartridge lock levers that are on both sides of the OPC belt cartridge outwards.

0 Close the inside cover, and then close the scanner unit.

A Turn the machine’s power switch back on.

Reset the OPC belt life counter


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select OPC Belt

and press Menu/Set.

The confirmation message appears on the LCD.

3 Press 1 to reset the life counter.

—OR—

Press 2 to cancel.

OPC Belt1.Reset 2.Exit


C - 35

C

Machine Information

Checking the Serial Numbers

You can view the machine’s serial number on the LCD.


2 Press Stop/Exit.

Checking the Page Counters

You can view the machine’s page counters for copies, printed pages, reports and lists, faxes or a summary total.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Total, Copy,Print or List/Fax.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Checking remaining life of parts

You can view the remaining life of these parts on the LCD.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select 1.OPC Belt Life, 2.Fuser Life,3.120K Kit Life or 4.PF KIT2 Life.

Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteThe life check of a part will be accurate only if you have reset that part’s life counter when you installed a new part. It will not be accurate if you have reset that part’s life counter during the life of a usedpart.

Serial No.XXXXXXXXX

Machine Info.2.Page Counter

Page CounterTotal :XXXXXX

Page CounterCopy :XXXXXX

Page CounterPrint :XXXXXX

Page CounterList/Fax :XXXXXX

OPC Belt LifeRemaining:XXX%

D - 1

DOptional accessoriesLower tray unit (Paper Feed Unit Type 1000)

See Lower tray unit (Paper Feed Unit Type 1000) on page D-1.

SO-DIMM memory

See Memory Unit Type C (64/128/256 MB) on page D-3.

Lower tray unit (Paper Feed Unit Type 1000)

The lower tray unit (Tray 2) is an optional device that can hold up to 530 sheets of extra paper (20 lb (80 g/m2)). You can put Letter, A4, B5 (JIS and ISO) or Executive size (176 x 250 to 215.9 x 297 mm) paper in this tray.

How to install the lower tray unit

1 Turn off the machine's power switch. Then, unplug the telephone line cord from the telephone wall jack.

2 Unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet. Disconnect the interface cable from the machine.

3 Place the lower tray unit on a flat table, and then remove the protective parts.

4 Remove the paper tray from the lower tray unit.

Optional accessories

CAUTION

■ This machine is heavy and weighs approximately 76.7 lb (34.8 kg). To prevent injuries, use at least two people to lift the machine.

■ When you lift the machine make sure you use the handholds at the bottom four corners of the machine.

■ When placing the machine on top of the lower tray unit, be careful not to catch your fingers between them.

■ Do not carry the machine when the lower tray unit is attached.

IMPORTANT

When moving or lifting this machine, keep the machine flat. To avoid spills, you must first remove the toner cartridges and waste toner pack.


D - 2

D

5 Remove the protective parts and then put the paper tray back in the lower tray unit.

6 Check the two alignment pins on the lower tray unit. Use two people to lift the machine and place it on top of the lower tray unit. Make sure you use the handholds at the bottom four corners of the machine. Check that the pins are properly inserted into the machine. Check that the connector is inserted.

7 Install the two stopper fittings on the right and left hand sides of the lower tray unit.

8 Cover the gap on the right hand side with the right-hand side cover by first inserting the hook at the back. Cover the gap on the left hand side with the left-hand side cover by first inserting the hook at the back.

Close both of the side covers by putting the notch over the hook of the lower tray unit.

9 To level the machine, adjust the feet of the lower tray unit at the front and back on the right-hand side. Turn the feet to move them up or down until they touch the work surface and the tray unit is level.

Turn the lock screw on each foot to secure it.

Chapter D

D - 3

Putting paper in the lower tray unit

After you have installed the lower paper tray, you can put paper in it the same way you put paper in the upper paper tray.

Memory Unit Type C (64/128/256 MB)

The memory board is installed on the main controller board inside the machine. When you add the optional memory board, it increases the performance for both copy and print operations.

The machine has 64 MB of standard memory and a slot for optional additional memory. The memory can be expanded by installing an optional memory (Memory Unit Type C (64/128/256 MB)).

You can expand the memory up to a total of 576 MB by installing memory modules.

The 512 MB memory module is not supplied by us. When you expand the total memory capacity to 576 MB, install the following type of memory module.

Module Type: SO-DIMM (Small Outline Dual-in-line Memory Module)

Memory Type: SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM)

Number of Pins: 144 pins

CAS latency: 2 or 3

Clock frequency: 100 MHz or more

Installing additional memory

1 Turn off the machine's power switch.

2 Unplug first the telephone line cord from the telephone wall jack, and then unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

Prohibit

Do not put transparencies, labels or envelopes in the paper tray of the optional lower tray unit. This might cause paper jams.

CAUTION

Make sure you turn the machine OFF and unplug the machine before you install or remove the SO-DIMM. Installing optional accessories without unplugging the machine could result in electric shock hazard.


D - 4

D

3 Unscrew the screw holding the side cover, and then slide the side cover to remove it.

4 Unscrew the screw holding the metal shield plate, and then remove the metal shield plate.

5 Unpack the SO-DIMM and hold it by the edges.

6 Hold the SO-DIMM with your fingers on the side edges and your thumb on the back edge. Align the notch on the SO-DIMM with the protrusions with the SO-DIMM slot. (Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open or facing outwards.)

7 Press the SO-DIMM straight into the slot (press firmly). Make sure the locks on each side of the SO-DIMM click into place.

NoteTo remove the SO-DIMM, open the retaining clips on both sides of the SO-DIMM by pushing them outward, grasp both edges of the SO-DIMM and pull it out straight.

8 Secure the metal plate with the screw.

IMPORTANT

SO-DIMM boards can be damaged by even a small amount of static electricity. Do not touch the memory chips or the board surface. Wear an antistatic wrist strap when you install or remove the board. If you do not have an antistatic wrist strap, keep touching the bare metal on the machine.

Chapter D

D - 5

9 Put the side cover back on by sliding it into the guide rails, and then secure it with the screw.

0 Reconnect the interface cable (machine cable) to your computer. Then, plug the machine's power cord back into the AC power outlet first, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine's power switch.

NoteTo check that you have installed the SO-DIMM properly, you can print the User Settings listing that shows the current memory size. To print the User Settings listing, see How to print a report on page 9-2.

E - 1

E

E

Product description

General

Specifications

Memory Capacity 64 MB (expandable to 576 MB)

ADF (automatic document feeder)

Up to 35 pagesTemperature: 68°F - 86°F (20°C - 30°C)

Humidity: 50% - 70%Paper: 20 lb (80 g/m2) Letter

Paper Tray 250 Sheets (20 lb (80 g/m2))

Printer Type Laser

Print Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser beam scanning

LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) 16 characters x 2 lines

Power Source 120V AC 50/60Hz

Power Consumption Copying: Average 615 WSleep: Average 16 WStandby: Average 155 W

Dimensions

19 in.(482 mm)

17.4 in.(437 mm)

21 in.(534 mm)

Chapter E

E - 2

Print media

Weight With OPC belt/Toner cartridges: 76.7 lb (34.8 kg)

Noise Operating: LWAd = 6.7 bels or less

Standby: LWAd = 5.4 bels or less

Temperature Operating: 50°F - 90.5°F (10 - 32.5°C)Storage: 32°F - 104°F (0 - 40°C)

Humidity Operating: 20 to 80% (without condensation)Storage: 10 to 90% (without condensation)

Paper Input Paper Tray■ Paper type:

Thin, Plain, Thick, Thicker, Recycled paper or Transparencies1

■ Paper size:Letter/A4, Executive, A5, B5, COM10 and DLFor more details, see Acceptable paper and other media on page 2-1.

■ Paper Weight:16 - 55 lb (60 - 210 g/m2)17 - 24 lb (64 - 90 g/m2) for ADFMaximum paper tray capacity: Up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2)plain paper or up to 50 transparencies

Paper Output Up to 250 sheets of Letter/A4 size plain paper2

(Face down print delivery to the output paper tray)

1 For transparencies and labels, we recommend removing printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine to avoid the possibility of smudging.

2 Based on the Recommended paper on page 2-1. The number of pages will vary depending on the paper being used. Some paper can not be stacked up to 250 sheets.

Specifications

E - 3

E

Fax

Compatibility ITU-T Group 3

Coding System MH/MR/MMR

Modem Speed Automatic Fallback: 33600 bps

Document Size ADF Width: 5.8 to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm)ADF Height: 5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 356 mm)Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)Scanner Glass Height: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)

Scanning Width Max. 8.2 in. (208 mm)

Printing Width Max. 8.2 in. (208 mm)

Gray Scale 256 levels

Polling Types Standard, Sequential

Contrast Control Automatic/Light/Dark (manual setting)

Resolution • Horizontal 203 dot/inch (8 dot/mm)• Vertical

Standard - 98 line/inch (3.85 line/mm) (Black)Fine - 196 line/inch (7.7 line/mm) (Black)Photo - 196 line/inch (7.7 line/mm) (Black)Superfine - 392 line/inch (15.4 line/mm) (Black)

One-Touch Dial 16 (8 x 2)

Speed-Dial 200 stations

Broadcasting 266 stations

Automatic Redial 1 time after 5 minutes

Auto Answer 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 rings

Communication Source Public switched telephone network.

Memory Transmission Up to 5001 /4002 pages

Out of Paper Reception Up to 5001 /4002 pages

1 “Pages” refers to the “Standard Chart No. 1” (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, MMR code). Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.

2 “Pages” refers to the "ITU-T Test Chart #1" (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, MMR code). Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.

Chapter E

E - 4

Copier

Color/Black Color/Black

Document Size ADF Width: 5.8 to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm)ADF Height: 5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 356 mm)Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)Scanner Glass Height: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)

Copy Speed ColorUp to 8 pages/minute (Letter/A4 paper)1

BlackUp to 31 pages/minute (Letter/A4 paper)1

First Copy Approx. 20 seconds (Black)Approx. 30 seconds (Color)

Multiple Copies Stacks or Sorts up to 99 pages

Reduce/Enlarge 25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)

Resolution Scan: Up to 600 x 300 dpi (600 x 600 dpi or more in Photo mode)

Print: Up to 600 x 600 dpi

1 Does not include the warm up time for the 1st printed page.

Based on standard pattern. (Stack Copy)

Copy speeds vary with the complexity of the document.

Specifications

E - 5

E

Scanner

Color/Black Color/Black

TWAIN Compliant Yes (Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP/Windows NT®


WIA Compliant Yes (Windows® XP)1

Color Depth 48 bit color processing (Input)24 bit color processing (Output)

Resolution Up to 9600 x 9600 dpi (interpolated)Scanner glass: Up to 1200 x 2400 dpi (optical)

ADF: Up to 1200 x 600 dpi (optical)

Document Size ADF Width: 5.8 to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm)ADF Height: 5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 356 mm)Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)

Scanner Glass Height: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)

Scanning Width Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)

Gray Scale 256 levels

1 Maximum 1200 x 1200 dpi scanning with Windows® XP (resolution up to 9600 x 9600 dpi can be selected by using the scanner utility)

Chapter E

E - 6

Printer

Interfaces

Emulations Printing System for Windows®

Printer Driver Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP/Windows NT®

Workstation Version 4.0 driver supporting native compression mode and bi-directional capability

Resolution 600 x 600 dpi (Max. 2400 dpi class)

Print Quality Normal printing mode

Economy printing mode (Toner Save mode)

Print Speed Up to 31 pages/minute (Letter/A4 size) (Black)1

Up to 8 pages/minute (Letter/A4 size) (Color)1

First Print Average 13 seconds (Black)Average 19 seconds (Color)

1 Based on standard pattern.

Does not include the warm up time for the 1st printed page.

Interface Recommended Cable

Parallel A bi-directional shielded parallel cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant and no longer than 6 feet (2.0 m).

USB A USB 2.0 cable that is no longer than 6 feet (2.0 m).Your machine has a High-Speed USB 2.0 interface.

The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a USB 1.1 interface.

LAN cable Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.

(Cables are not included.)

Specifications

E - 7

E

Computer requirements

Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions

Computer Platform & Operating System Version

Supported PC Software Functions

PC Interface

MinimumProcessor

Minimum RAM

Recommended RAM

Available Hard Disk Space

for Drivers

for Applications

Windows®

Operating System

98, 98SE

Printing, Scanning1,PC Fax2,3

USB, Parallel, Ethernet

Pentium®IIor

equivalent

32 MB 128 MB

90 MB 130 MB

MeUSB,

Parallel, Ethernet

NT® Workstation 4.0Parallel, Ethernet

64 MB 256 MB

2000 ProfessionalUSB,

Parallel, Ethernet

XP Home XP Professional

USB, Parallel, Ethernet

128 MB 256 MB 150 MB 220 MB

1 Network Scanning not supported in Windows NT® Workstation 4.0.2 PC Fax send only for network users.3 PC Fax supports black & white faxing only.

All registered trademarks referenced herein are the property of their respective companies.

Chapter E

E - 8

Consumable items

Toner Cartridge Life Starter Toner CartridgesBlack: Approx. 1,500 pages1

Yellow, Cyan and Magenta: Approx. 1,500 pages1,2

Replacement Toner CartridgesBlack: Approx. 10,000 pages1 (Type 140)

Approx. 5,000 pages1 (Type 140 LY)Yellow, Cyan and Magenta: Approx. 6,600 pages1,2 (Type 140)

Approx. 3,000 pages1,2 (Type 140 LY)

Waste Toner Pack Life Expectancy (Waste Toner Bottle Type 140)

Up to 12,000 images2

OPC Belt Life Expectancy (Photo Conductor Unit Type 140)

Approx. 60,000 images by continuous printing2

1 When printing on letter or Letter/A4 size paper at 5% print coverage2 Definition of pages: actual output page number.

Definition of images:

If the image on a page contains only one color of either Cyan, Magenta, Yellow or Black =>1 image,

two colors => 2 images, three colors => 3 images, four colors => 4 images.There are many factors that determine the actual consumable items’ life, such as temperature, humidity, type of paper, toner you use and the number of pages per print job.

Specifications

E - 9

E

Network (LAN)

NoteSMTP/POP3 E-mail Services are required for Internet Fax.

LAN You can connect your machine to a network for the Internet FAX, Network Printing, Network Scanning and PC Fax Send. Also included is the BRAdmin Professional Network Management software.

Support for Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP/Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.01

Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX Auto Negotiation

Protocols TCP/IPARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP), NetBIOS, WINS, DNS Resolver, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, POP3, SMTP Client, IPP, FTP Server, mDNS, TELNET, SNMP, HTTP, TFTP

Included Utilities:BRAdmin Professional (Windows®)

1 Network Scanning is not available for Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0.

F - 1

F Glossary

ADF (automatic document feeder)The document can be placed in the ADF and scanned one page at a time automatically.

Auto ReductionReduces the size of incoming faxes.

Automatic fax transmissionSending a fax without picking up the handset of an external phone.

Automatic RedialA feature that enables your machine to redial the last fax number after five minutes if the fax did not go through because the line was busy.

Backup PrintYour machine prints a copy of every fax that is received and stored in memory.This is a safety feature so you will not lose messages during a power failure.

Batch Transmission As a cost saving feature, all delayed faxes to the same fax number will be sent as one transmission.

Beeper VolumeVolume setting for the beep when you press a key or make an error.

BroadcastingThe ability to send the same fax message to more than one location.

Caller IDA service purchased from the telephone company that lets you see the number (or name) of the party calling you.

Cancel JobCancels print jobs and programmed fax jobs, such as Delayed Fax or Polling, from the machine's memory.

CNG tonesThe special tones (beeps) sent by fax machines during automatic transmission to tell the receiving machine that a fax machine is calling.

Coding methodMethod of coding the information contained in the document. All fax machines must use a minimum standard of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine is capable of greater compression methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified Modified Read (MMR) and JPEG, if the receiving machine has the same capability.

Communication error (or Comm. Error)

An error during fax sending or receiving, usually caused by line noise or static.

Compatibility groupThe ability of one fax unit to communicate with another. Compatibility is assured between ITU-T Groups.

ContrastSetting to compensate for dark or light documents, by making faxes or copies of dark documents lighter and light documents darker.

Delayed FaxSends your fax at a specified time later that day.

Distinctive RingA subscriber service purchased from the telephone company that gives you another phone number on an existing phone line. The machine uses the new number to simulate a dedicated fax line.

Dual AccessYour machine can scan outgoing faxes or scheduled jobs into memory at the same time it is sending a fax from memory or receiving or printing an incoming fax.

Glossary

F - 2

F

Easy ReceiveEnables your machine to respond to CNG tones if you interrupt a fax call by answering it.

ECM (Error Correction Mode)Detects errors during fax transmission and resends the pages of the fax that had an error.

Extension phoneA telephone on the fax number that is plugged into a separate wall jack.

External phoneA telephone that is plugged into the EXT jack of your machine.

F/T Ring TimeThe length of time that the machine rings (when the Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify you to pick up a voice call that it answered.

Fax ForwardingSends a fax received into the memory to another pre-programmed fax number.

Fax JournalLists information about the last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes. TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.

Fax Receive CodePress this code ( 5 1) when you answer a fax call on an extension or external phone.

Fax StorageYou can store received faxes in memory.

Fax tonesThe signals sent by sending and receiving fax machines while communicating information.

Fax/TelYou can receive faxes and telephone calls. Do not use this mode if you are using a telephone answering device (TAD).

Fine resolutionResolution is 203 x 196 dpi. It is used for small print and graphs.

Gray scaleThe shades of gray available for copying and faxing photographs.

Group numberA combination of One-Touch and Speed-Dial numbers that are stored in a One-Touch key or Speed-Dial location for Broadcasting.

Help listA printout of the complete Menu table that you can use to program your machine when you do not have the User’s Guide with you.

Journal PeriodThe pre-programmed time period between automatically printed Fax Journal Reports. You can print the Fax Journal on demand without interrupting the cycle.

LCD (liquid crystal display)The display screen on the machine that shows interactive messages during On-Screen Programming and shows the date and time when the machine is idle.

Manual faxWhen you lift the handset of your external telephone or press Hook so you can hear the receiving fax machine answer before you press Black Start to begin sending.

Menu modeProgramming mode for changing your machine’s settings.

OCR (optical character recognition)The bundled ScanSoft® OmniPage®

software application convert an image of text to text that you can edit.

Chapter F

F - 3

One-TouchKeys on the machine’s control panel where you can store numbers for easy dialing. You can store a second number on each key if you press Shift and the One-Touch key together.

Out of Paper ReceptionReceives faxes into the machine’s memory when the machine is out of paper.

Overseas ModeMakes temporary changes to the fax tones to accommodate noise and static on overseas phone lines.

PagingThis feature enables your machine to call your pager when a fax is received into its memory.

PauseAllows you to place a 3.5 second delay in the dialing sequence stored on One-Touch keys and Speed-Dial numbers. Press Redial/Pause as many times as needed for longer pauses.

Photo resolutionA resolution setting that uses varying shades of gray for the best representation of photographs.

Polling The process of a fax machine calling another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax messages.

Pulse A form of rotary dialing on a telephone line.

Quick Dial ListA listing of names and numbers stored in One-Touch and Speed-Dial memory, in numerical order.

Real Time TransmissionWhen memory is full, you can send faxes in real time.

Remaining jobsYou can check which jobs are waiting in memory and cancel jobs individually.

Remote Access CodeYour own four-digit code (--- ) that allows you to call and access your machine from a remote location.

Remote Retrieval Access The ability to access your machine remotely from a touch tone phone.

ResolutionThe number of vertical and horizontal lines per inch. See: Standard, Fine, Super Fine and Photo.

Ring DelayThe number of rings before the machine answers in Fax Only and Fax/Telmode.

Ring VolumeVolume setting for the machine’s ring.

ScanningThe process of sending an electronic image of a paper document into your computer.

SearchAn electronic, alphabetical listing of stored One-Touch, Speed-Dial and Group numbers.

Speed-DialA pre-programmed number for easy dialing. You must press the Search/Speed Dial key, #, and the three-digit code, and Black Start to start the dialing process.

Standard resolution203 x 97 dpi. It is used for regular size text and quickest transmission.

Station IDThe stored information that appears on the top of faxed pages. It includes the sender’s name and fax number.

Glossary

F - 4

F

Super Fine resolution203 x 392 dpi. Best for very small print and line art.

TAD (telephone answering device)You can connect an external device or answering machine to the EXT. jack of your machine.

Telephone Answer Code (for Fax/Tel mode only)

When the machine answers a voice call, it pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at an extension phone by pressing this code (# 5 1).

Temporary settingsYou can select certain options for each fax transmission and copy without changing the default settings.

ToneA form of dialing on the telephone line used for Touch Tone telephones.

TransmissionThe process of sending faxes over the phone lines from your machine to the receiving fax machine.

Transmission Verification ReportA listing of each fax sent, that shows its date, time and number.

User Settings A printed report that shows the current settings of the machine.

G - 1

GAAccess codes, storing and dialing ........... 7-6ADF (automatic document feeder) ........ 2-10

ADF cover ........................................... C-6Answering machine (TAD) ...................... 3-5

connecting ............................................ 3-6Automatic

fax receive ............................................ 6-1Easy Receive .................................... 6-5

fax redial ............................................... 7-2

BBroadcasting ........................................... 5-4

setting up Groups for ............................ 7-5

CCaller ID .................................................. 7-8

Out of Area ........................................... 7-8print list ................................................. 7-9view list ................................................. 7-9

CancelingFax Forwarding .................................... 8-1jobs awaiting redial ............................... 5-9Paging .................................................. 8-6

Checkingmachine information .......................... C-35

Cleaningoutside of machine ............................ C-21scanner glass .................................... C-22

CNG tones .............................................. 1-6Connecting

external TAD ........................................ 3-5external telephone ................................ 3-5two-line external TAD or telephone ...... 3-4

Consumable items ........................C-26, E-8Control panel overview .....................1-3, 1-4Copy

brightness ........................................... 11-7color ................................................... 11-7color adjust ......................................... 11-8contrast .............................................. 11-7Enlarge/Reduce key ........................... 11-4enter Copy mode ................................ 11-1multiple copies ................................... 11-2

Options key ........................................ B-14Out of Memory ....................................11-9page layout .........................................11-5poster ..................................................11-5printable area ......................................11-1quality .................................................11-3single copy ..........................................11-1sort ......................................................11-7speed ..................................................11-3

Cordless phone .......................................6-6Cover page

custom comments ..............................5-10for all faxes .........................................5-10for next fax only ..................................5-10printed form ........................................5-11

Credit card numbers ................................7-6

DDate and Time .........................................3-1Delayed Batch Transmission ...................5-8Dialing

a pause .................................................7-3access codes and credit card numbers ................................................7-6automatic fax redial ..............................7-2Groups ..................................................5-4manual ..................................................7-1One-Touch ............................................7-1Speed-Dial ............................................7-1

Distinctive Ring ........................................7-6setting ring pattern ................................7-8turning off ..............................................7-8

Dual Access .............................................5-2

EEasy Receive ...........................................6-5ECM (Error Correction Mode) ..................1-6Envelopes ........................................ 2-4, 2-5Equalization ..........................................C-20Error messages on LCD

Comm. Error ........................................ C-1Not Registered ..............................7-1, C-2Out of Memory .....................................C-3

while scanning a document .............11-9Unable to Init. ...................................... C-4

Index

Index

G - 2

Unable to Print .................................... C-4Unable to Scan ................................... C-4

Extension telephone, using ..................... 6-6External telephone, connecting ............... 3-5

FFax codes

changing .............................................. 6-5Fax Receive Code ............................... 6-6Remote Access Code .......................... 8-5setting .................................................. 8-5Telephone Answer Code ..................... 6-6

Fax Forwardingchanging remotely .........................8-6, 8-7programming a number ........................ 8-1

Fax Storage ............................................. 8-2printing from memory ........................... 6-6turning on ............................................. 8-2

Fax, stand-alonereceiving ............................................... 6-1

at the end of a conversation .............. 6-4compatibility ................................... C-20Fax Forwarding ................................. 8-1from extension phone ....................... 6-6Paging ............................................... 8-2Polling Receive ............................... 10-1reducing to fit on paper ..................... 6-4retrieving from a remote site ............. 8-7Ring Delay, setting ............................ 6-2Sequential Polling ........................... 10-1

sending ................................................ 5-1at the end of a conversation .............. 5-3Broadcasting ..................................... 5-4canceling fax jobs in memory ............ 5-9compatibility ................................... C-20contrast ............................................. 5-5delayed ............................................. 5-8Easy Receive .................................... 6-5enter Fax mode ................................. 5-1from ADF ........................................... 5-1from memory (Dual Access) ......5-2, 7-2from scanner glass ............................ 5-1Out of Memory .................................. 5-3overseas ........................................... 5-7Polled Transmit ............................... 10-2printing a fax from the memory ......... 6-6Real Time Transmission ................... 5-6redial ................................................. 7-2resolution .......................................... 5-5

Station ID (fax header) ......................3-2Fax/Tel mode

answering at extension phones ............6-6double-ringing (voice calls) ...................6-3F/T Ring Time .......................................6-3Fax Receive Code ................................6-6receiving faxes .....................................6-7Ring Delay ............................................6-2Telephone Answer Code ......................6-6

FCC notices ............................................ A-1

GGray scale .......................................E-3, E-5Groups for Broadcasting ..........................7-5

HHELP

LCD messages .................................... B-1using menu keys .............................. B-2

Menu Table ..................................B-1, B-3Hook key ..................................................1-4

JJacks

convert to RJ11 jacktriplex adapter ....................................3-3

EXTexternal telephone .............................3-5TAD (answering machine) .................3-5

Jamsdocument ............................................. C-6paper ................................................... C-7

LLabels ......................................................2-6LCD (liquid crystal display) ..............B-1, B-2Lower tray (option) .................................. D-1

loading paper ....................................... D-3

MMachine information ............................. C-35Maintenance, routine ............................ C-20

replacingOPC belt cartridge .......................... C-33toner cartridges .................... C-28, C-29waste toner pack ............................ C-31

G - 3

Manualdialing ................................................... 7-1receive .................................................. 6-1

Manual transmission ............................... 5-3Memory

adding SO-DIMM (option) ................... D-3installing ........................................... D-3

Memory Security ..................................... 4-3Memory Storage ......................................B-1Menu Table .............................................B-1Mode, entering

Copy ................................................... 11-1Fax ....................................................... 5-1Scan ..................................................... 1-3

Multi-line connections (PBX) ................... 3-5

OOne-Touch

changing ............................................... 7-4setting up .............................................. 7-3using ..................................................... 7-1

Options (accessories)lower tray unit ...................................... D-1SO-DIMM ............................................ D-3

Options key ...........................................B-14Out of Memory message ......................... 5-3

PPaging ..................................................... 8-2

programming your pager number ......... 8-1Paper ............................................... 2-1, E-2

how to load ........................................... 2-8size ....................................................... 3-9size of document ................................ 2-10type ...................................................... 3-9

Phone Lineconnections .......................................... 3-6difficulties .......................................... C-11multi-line (PBX) .................................... 3-5roll over lines ........................................ 3-3two-line phone system ......................... 3-3

Polling ................................................... 10-1Polled Transmit .................................. 10-2Polling Receive .................................. 10-1Sequential Polling .............................. 10-1

Poster .................................................... 11-5Power failure ...........................................B-1

Printdifficulties ........................................... C-11drivers .................................................. E-6fax from memory ...................................6-6paper jams ........................................... C-7quality ..................................2-1, 3-9, C-16report ....................................................9-2resolution ............................................. E-6specifications ....................................... E-6

Programming your machine ............B-1, B-2

QQuick-Dial

Access codes and credit card numberssetting up ...........................................7-6

Broadcasting .........................................5-4using Groups .....................................5-4

Group dialchanging ............................................7-4setting up Groups for Broadcasting ...7-5

One-Touch dialchanging ............................................7-4setting up ...........................................7-3using ..................................................7-1

Search ..................................................7-2Speed-Dial

changing ............................................7-4setting up ...........................................7-4using ..................................................7-1

RReceive Mode ..........................................6-1

External TAD ........................................6-1Fax Only ...............................................6-1Fax/Tel ..................................................6-1Manual ..................................................6-1

Redial/Pause key ............................. 7-2, 7-3Reducing

copies .................................................11-4incoming faxes ......................................6-4

Remote Retrieval .....................................8-5access code ..........................................8-5commands ............................................8-6getting your faxes .................................8-7

Reports ....................................................9-1Caller ID List .........................................7-9Fax Journal ...........................................9-2

Journal Period ...................................9-1

Index

G - 4

Help List ............................................... 9-2how to print .......................................... 9-2Network Configuration ......................... 9-2Quick-Dial List ...................................... 9-2Transmission Verification ..................... 9-1User Settings ....................................... 9-2

Resolutioncopy .....................................................E-4fax (Standard, Fine, SuperFine, Photo) ..................................................E-3print ......................................................E-6scan .....................................................E-5setting for next fax ................................ 5-5

Ring Delay, setting .................................. 6-2

SSafety Instructions ........................... A-4, A-7Setting Lock ............................................ 4-1Sleep Time .............................................. 3-8Speed-Dial

changing .............................................. 7-4setting up ............................................. 7-4using .................................................... 7-1

TTAD (telephone answering device), external .....................................3-4, 3-5, 6-1

connecting .....................................3-5, 3-6receive mode ....................................... 6-1recording OGM .................................... 3-7with two-line jack .................................. 3-4

Text, entering ........................................B-15special characters ..............................B-15

Transparency .......................................... 2-6Tray use, setting

copy ................................................... 11-2fax ........................................................ 6-3

Troubleshooting ..................................... C-1document jam ..................................... C-6if you are having difficulty

incoming calls ................................ C-12Network .......................................... C-15paper handling ............................... C-14phone line ...................................... C-20printing ........................................... C-11printing difficulties .......................... C-13

paper jam ............................................ C-7Two-line phone system ........................... 3-3

VVolume, setting ......................................3-10

beeper ................................................3-10ring .....................................................3-10speaker ...............................................3-10

WWaste toner pack .................................. C-31

Copylight © 2005

EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS(Canada only)

NOTICE

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.

NOTICE

The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.

User’s G

uide

EN USA G157-3105

Software User’s Guide

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correctuse, be sure to read the Important Information in “User’s Guide” before using the machine.

i

Table of Contents

Section I Windows®

1 Printing

Using the printer driver ............................................................................................1-1Printing a document.................................................................................................1-1

Manual Duplex Printing ......................................................................................1-2Simultaneous scanning, printing and faxing............................................................1-2Printer operation key ...............................................................................................1-2

Job Cancel .........................................................................................................1-2Secure Print key .................................................................................................1-3Test Print ............................................................................................................1-4Restoring default printer settings........................................................................1-4Calibration ..........................................................................................................1-5

Status Monitor .........................................................................................................1-6Turning on the status monitor.............................................................................1-6Monitoring and viewing the machine’s status.....................................................1-6

Printer driver settings...............................................................................................1-7Accessing the printer driver settings........................................................................1-7Features in the Native Driver...................................................................................1-8

Basic tab.............................................................................................................1-8Advanced tab ...................................................................................................1-11Print Quality......................................................................................................1-12Duplex ..............................................................................................................1-13Watermark........................................................................................................1-14Page Setting.....................................................................................................1-15Device Options .................................................................................................1-15Accessories tab ................................................................................................1-19

2 Scanning

Scanning a document using the TWAIN driver........................................................2-1TWAIN compliant ...............................................................................................2-1Access the Scanner ...........................................................................................2-2Scanning a document into the PC......................................................................2-3Settings in the Scanner window .........................................................................2-5

Scanning a document using the WIA driver (For Windows® XP only).....................2-8WIA compliant ....................................................................................................2-8Accessing the scanner .......................................................................................2-8Scanning a document into the PC......................................................................2-9

ii

Using the Scan key (For USB or Parallel cable users)..........................................2-12Scan to E-mail ..................................................................................................2-12Scan to Image ..................................................................................................2-13Scan to OCR ....................................................................................................2-13Scan to File ......................................................................................................2-13

Using ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE and OmniPage® OCR ..................................2-14Viewing items ...................................................................................................2-15Organizing your items in folders.......................................................................2-15Quick links to other applications.......................................................................2-16ScanSoft® OmniPage® OCR lets you convert image text into text

you can edit...................................................................................................2-16Importing items from other applications ...........................................................2-16Exporting items in other formats.......................................................................2-17How to Uninstall PaperPort® 9.0SE and ScanSoft® OmniPage® OCR ............2-17

3 ControlCenter2

Using ControlCenter2..............................................................................................3-1Turning the AutoLoad feature off........................................................................3-2SCAN .................................................................................................................3-2CUSTOM SCAN.................................................................................................3-2COPY .................................................................................................................3-3PC-FAX ..............................................................................................................3-3DEVICE SETTING .............................................................................................3-3

SCAN.......................................................................................................................3-4Image (example: Microsoft Paint).......................................................................3-4OCR (Word Processing program) ......................................................................3-6E-mail .................................................................................................................3-6File attachments .................................................................................................3-7File......................................................................................................................3-8

CUSTOM SCAN......................................................................................................3-9Customizing a user-defined button...................................................................3-10

COPY ....................................................................................................................3-13PC-FAX .................................................................................................................3-14

Send.................................................................................................................3-14Receive / View Received..................................................................................3-15Address Book ...................................................................................................3-15Setup ................................................................................................................3-15

DEVICE SETTING.................................................................................................3-16Remote Setup ..................................................................................................3-16Quick-Dial.........................................................................................................3-16Status Monitor ..................................................................................................3-16

iii

4 Network Scanning

Before using Network Scanning ..............................................................................4-1Network License.................................................................................................4-1Configuring Network Scanning...........................................................................4-2

Using the Scan key..................................................................................................4-4Scan to E-mail (PC)............................................................................................4-4Scan to E-mail (E-mail server) ...........................................................................4-5Scan to Image ....................................................................................................4-6Scan to OCR ......................................................................................................4-6Scan to File ........................................................................................................4-7

5 Remote Setup

Remote Setup..........................................................................................................5-1

6 PC-FAX software

PC-FAX sending......................................................................................................6-1Setting up user information ................................................................................6-1Sending setup ....................................................................................................6-2Address Book .....................................................................................................6-3Setting up a Cover Page ....................................................................................6-4Entering Cover Page Information .......................................................................6-4

Speed-Dial setup.....................................................................................................6-5Address Book .....................................................................................................6-5Setting up a Member in the Address Book.........................................................6-6Setting up a Group for Broadcasting ..................................................................6-6Editing Member information ...............................................................................6-7Deleting a Member or Group..............................................................................6-7Exporting the Address Book...............................................................................6-8Importing to the Address Book ...........................................................................6-9Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Facsimile style user interface...............6-10Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Simple style user interface...................6-11

PC-FAX receiving..................................................................................................6-12Turn on the machine’s PC-FAX Receive function ............................................6-12Running PC-FAX Receiving .............................................................................6-13Setting up your PC ...........................................................................................6-13Viewing new PC-FAX messages......................................................................6-13

I Index

Section I Windows®

1 Printing

2 Scanning

3 ControlCenter2

4 Network Scanning

5 Remote Setup

6 PC-FAX software

Windows® XP in this document represents Windows® XP Professional.

1

1

1 - 1

Using the printer driverA Printer Driver is software that translates data from the format used by a computer into the format required by a particular printer, using a printer command language or page description language.

The printer drivers are on the CD-ROM we have supplied. Install the drivers first by following the Quick Setup Guide.

Windows® Printing

The dedicated printer driver for Microsoft® Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP and Windows NT®

workstation 4.0 are available on the CD-ROM supplied with your device. You can install them easily into your Windows® system using our installer program. The driver supports our unique compression mode to enhance printing speed in Windows® applications, and allows you to set various printer settings, including economy printing mode and custom paper size.

Printing a documentWhen the machine receives data from your computer, it begins printing by picking up paper from the paper tray. The paper tray can feed many types of paper and envelopes. (See the User’s Guide for information about the Paper Tray and Recommended paper.)

1 From your application, select the Print command.

If any other printer drivers are installed on your computer, select SP C210SF (XXX)* Printer as your printer driver from the Print or Print Settings menu in your software application, and then click OK to begin printing.

*(Select SP C210SF Printer if you are using a parallel cable or if you are connecting your machine via Network. Select SP C210SF USB Printer if you are using a USB cable.)

2 Your computer sends the data to the machine.

The LCD shows Receiving Data.

3 When the machine finishes printing all the data, the LCD shows the machine status.

Printing

Printing

1 - 2

1

NoteYou can select the paper size and orientation in your application software.

If your application software does not support your custom paper size, select the next larger paper size.

Then adjust the print area by changing the right and left margins in your application software.

Manual Duplex Printing

The machine prints all the even-numbered pages on one side of the paper first. Then, the Windows® driver instructs you (with a pop-up message) to reinsert the paper. Before reinserting the paper, straighten it well, or you may get a paper jam. Very thin or very thick paper is not recommended.

Simultaneous scanning, printing and faxingYour machine can print from your computer while sending or receiving a fax in memory, or while scanning a document into the computer. Fax sending will not be stopped during PC printing.

However, when the machine is copying or receiving a fax on paper, it pauses the PC printing operation, and then continues printing when copying or fax receiving has finished.

Printer operation key

Job Cancel

To cancel the current print job, press Job Cancel. If the LCD shows Data Remaining, you can clear the data that is left in the printer memory by pressing Job Cancel.

Printing

1 - 3

1

Secure Print key

Secured data is password protected. Only those people that know the password will be able to print the secured data. The machine will not print secure data until the password is entered. After the document is printed, the data will be cleared from the memory. To use this function, you need to set your password in the printer driver dialog box. (See Device Options on page 1-15 or Accessories tab on page 1-19.)

1 Press Secure Print.

NoteThe LCD displays No Data! if there is no secured data in the memory.

2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the user name.

Press Menu/Set. The LCD displays job selections.

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the job.

Press Menu/Set. The LCD prompts you to enter your four-digit password.

4 Enter your password using the control panel.

Press Menu/Set.

5 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print.

Press Menu/Set. The machine prints the data.

—OR—

If you want to delete the secured data press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete.

Press Menu/Set.

6 Press Stop/Exit.

Note■ If you turn the power switch Off, the secured data saved in memory will be cleared.

■ After you print the secured data it will be cleared from memory.

Printing

1 - 4

1

Test Print

If you are having problems with print quality, you can do a test print.


2 Press Color Start or Black Start.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteIf the problem appears on the printout, see Improving the print quality in the User’s Guide.

Restoring default printer settings

You can return the machine’s printer settings to the default settings. Fonts and macros loaded to the machine’s memory will be cleared.


2 Press 1 to restore the default settings.

—OR—

Press 2 to exit without making a change.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Printing

1 - 5

1

Calibration

The output density for each color may vary depending on the environment the machine is in such as temperature and humidity. Calibration helps you to improve the color density.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Calibrate.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press 1 to select Yes.

You can reset the calibration parameters back to those set at the factory.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Reset.

3 Press Menu/Set.


NoteIf an error message is displayed, press Stop/Exit and try again. For more information, see Troubleshooting and routine maintenance in the User’s Guide.

Printing

1 - 6

1

Status MonitorThe Status Monitor utility is a configurable software tool that allows you to monitor the status of one or more devices, allowing you to get immediate notification of errors such as paper empty or paper jam.

Turning on the status monitor

1 Click SP C210SF (XXX)* Printer located in the Start/All Programs/Multi-Function SuiteSP C210SF/Status Monitor on your computer. The Status Monitor window will appear.

*(Select SP C210SF Printer if you are using a parallel cable or if you are connecting your machine via Network. Select SP C210SF USB Printer if you are using a USB cable.)

2 Right-click on the Status Monitor window and select Load Status Monitor on Startup in the menu.

3 Right-click on the Status Monitor window and select Location, and then select the way to display the status monitor on your computer—in the taskbar, in the tasktray, in the tasktray (on Error) or on the desktop.

Monitoring and viewing the machine’s status

The Status Monitor icon will change color depending on the machine’s status.

Green icon means a normal stand-by condition.

Yellow icon means a warning.

Red icon means a printing error has occured.

Note■ You can check the device status at anytime by double-clicking the icon in the tasktray or selecting the

Status Monitor located in the Start/All Programs/Multi-Function Suite SP C210SF on your computer.■ For more information about using the Status Monitor software, right click the Status Monitor icon and

choose Help.

Printing

1 - 7

1

Printer driver settingsYou can change the following printer settings when you print from your computer:

■ Paper Size■ Multiple Page■ Orientation■ Copies■ Media Type■ Color/Mono■ Paper Source■ Print Quality■ Color Mode■ Duplex■ Watermark*1

■ Scaling*1

■ Secure Print■ Toner Save Mode■ Quick Print Setup*1

■ Status Monitor*1

■ Administrator (For Windows 98/98SE/Me Users Only)*1

■ Print Setting (For Windows XP/2000/NT Users Only)*1

■ Print Date & Time*1

■ Color Calibration*1

*1 These settings are not available with the BR-Script 3 driver.

Accessing the printer driver settings1 Select Print from the File menu in your application software.

2 Select SP C210SF (USB) Printer (If you are using a USB interface, then USB will be in the printer driver name) and click Properties or Preferences. (Document Default for Windows NT® 4.0). The Printer dialog box will appear.

NoteThe way you access the printer driver settings depends on your operating system and software applications.

Printing

1 - 8

1

Features in the Native Driver

Basic tab

1 Select the Paper Size, Multiple Page, Orientation, number of copies and Media Type.

2 Select the Color/Mono setting.

3 Select the Paper Source (First Page and Other Pages).

Note

To select Other Pages, you must select the optional Tray 2 in the Accessories tab. For more information, see Accessories tab on page 1-19.

Auto Select allows the printer driver to select a suitable tray for Paper Size automatically.

4 Click the OK button to apply your selected settings.

To return to the default settings, click the Default button, then click the OK button.

2

4

3

1

Printing

1 - 9

1

Paper Size

From the drop-down box select the Paper Size you are using.

Multiple Page

The Multiple Page selection can reduce the image size of a page allowing multiple pages to be printed on one sheet of paper or enlarging the image size for printing one page on multiple sheets of paper.

Border Line

When printing multiple pages on one sheet with the Multiple Page feature you can select to have a solid border, dash border or no border around each page on the sheet.

Orientation

Orientation selects the position of how your document will be printed (Portrait or Landscape).

Copies

The copies selection sets the number of copies that will be printed.

Collate

With the Collate check box selected, one complete copy of your document will be printed and then repeated for the number of copies you selected. If the Collate check box is not selected, then each page will be printed for all the copies selected before the next page of the document is printed.

Ex. 4 in 1 Ex. 1 in 2 x 2 pages

LandscapePortrait

Collate box checked Collate box not checked

Printing

1 - 10

1

Media Type

You can use the following types of media in your machine. For the best print quality, select the type of media that you wish to use.

NoteWhen using ordinary plain paper or recycled paper (20 to 24 lb), select Plain Paper or Recycled Paper.When using heavier weight paper for both plain and recycled paper, envelopes or rough paper select Thick Paper or Thicker Paper. For OHP transparencies, select Transparencies.

Color/Mono

You can select Full Color, Mono, Black & Cyan, Black & Magenta, and Black & Yellow from the drop down box.

Full Color

When your document contains color and you want to print it in color, select this mode.

Mono

Select this mode if your document has only black and grayscale text and/or objects. Mono mode makes the print processing speed faster than color mode. If your document contains color, selecting Mono mode prints your document in 256 levels of gray.

Black & Cyan

Select this mode when you want to print a color document in Black and Cyan. All colors apart from Black will print in Cyan.

Black & Magenta

Select this mode when you want to print a color document in Black and Magenta. All colors apart from Black will print in Magenta.

Black & Yellow

Select this mode when you want to print a color document in Black and Yellow. All colors apart from Black will print in Yellow.

Paper Source

You can choose Auto Select, Tray 1, or Tray 2 (Option). You can specify separate trays for printing the first page and for printing from the second page onwards.

Plain Paper Thin Paper Thick Paper Thicker Paper

Transparencies Recycled Paper

Printing

1 - 11

1

Advanced tab

Change the tab settings by selecting one of the following icons:

1 Print Quality

2 Duplex

3 Watermark

4 Page Setting

5 Device Options

NoteTo return to the default settings, click the Default button.

1 2 3 4 5

Printing

1 - 12

1

Print Quality

Print Quality

You can select the following print quality settings:

Normal

600 x 600 dpi. Recommended mode for ordinary printouts. Good print quality with reasonable printing speed.

Fine

2400 dpi class. The finest print mode. Use this mode to print precise images such as photographs. Since the print data is much larger than in normal mode, processing time / data transfer time and printing time will be longer.

NoteThe print speed will change depending on what print quality setting you choose. Higher print quality takes longer to print, while lower print quality takes less time to print.

ColorMode

You can change the Color Matching mode as follows:

Match Monitor

The color of all elements in the document are adjusted to match the monitor color.

Vivid/Text

The color of all elements are adjusted to become vivid color. Suitable for Graphics and Text.

Auto

The printer driver automatically selects the Color Mode type.

Improve Gray Color

You can improve the image quality of shaded areas by ticking the Improve Gray Color check box.

Enhance Black Printing

If a black graphic cannot be printed correctly, choose this setting.

Printing

1 - 13

1

Duplex

The printer driver supports manual duplex printing.

Manual Duplex

Check the Manual Duplex box. In this mode, the machine prints all the even numbered pages first. Then the printer driver stops and shows the instructions required to re-install the paper. When you click OK the odd numbered pages are printed.

Duplex Type

You can select Duplex Type. There are six types of duplex directions available for each orientation.

Flip on Left Edge

Flip on Right Edge

Flip on Top Edge

Flip on Bottom Edge

Flip on Top Edge (No Reverse)

Flip on Bottom Edge (No Reverse)

Binding Offset Check the Binding Offset option, you can specify the offset value of the binding side in inches or millimeters (0 - 8 inches) [0 - 203.2 mm].

Printing

1 - 14

1

Watermark

You can place a logo or text into your document as a Watermark. You can select one of the preset Watermarks, or you can use a bitmap file or text file that you have created.

Check Use Watermark, and then select the watermark you want to use.

Transparent

Check Transparent to print the watermarked image in the background of your document. If this feature is not checked then the Watermark will be printed on top of your document.

In Outline Text (Windows® 2000/XP/Windows NT® 4.0)

Check In Outline Text if you only want to print an outline of the Watermark.

Print Watermark

The Print Watermark feature offers the following print choices:

■ On all pages■ On first page only■ From second page■ Custom

Watermark Setting

You can change the Watermark’s size and position on the page by selecting the Watermark, and clicking the Editbutton. If you want to add a new Watermark, click the Newbutton, and then select Text or Bitmap in the Watermark Style.

■ TitleYou can select the CONFIDENTIAL, COPY or DRAFT as the standard title or enter a title you like in the field.

■ Watermark TextEnter your Watermark text into the Text Box, and then select the Font, Size, Color (Red / Green / Blue) and Style.

■ Watermark BitmapEnter the file name and location of your bitmap image in the File box, or Browse for the file location. You can also set the scaling size of the image.

■ PositionUse this setting if you want to control the position of the Watermark on the page.

Printing

1 - 15

1

Page Setting

Scaling

You can change the print size of your document with the Scaling feature.

■ Check Off if you want to print the document as it appears on your screen.

■ Check Fit to Paper Size if your document has an unusual size, or if you have only the standard size paper.

■ Check Free if you want to change the size.

You can also use the Mirror Print or Reverse Print feature for your page setting.

Device Options

You can set the following Printer Function modes in this tab:

■ Secure Print■ Toner Save Mode■ Quick Print Setup■ Status Monitor■ Administrator

(For Windows® 98/98SE/Me Users Only)

■ Print Setting(For Windows® XP/2000/NT® Users Only)

■ Print Date & Time■ Color Calibration

Secure Print

Secure documents are documents that are password protected when they are sent to the machine. Only the people who know the password will be able to print them. Since the documents are secured at the machine, you must enter the password using the control panel of the machine to print them.

To send a secured document:

1 Select Secure Print from Printer Function and check Secure Print.

2 Enter your password, user name and job name and click OK.

Printing

1 - 16

1

3 You must print the secured documents from the control panel of the machine. (See Secure Print key on page 1-3.)

To delete a secured document:

You need to use the control panel of the machine to delete a secured document. (See Secure Print keyon page 1-3.)

Toner Save Mode

You can conserve toner using this feature. When you set Toner Save Mode to On, print appears lighter. The default setting is Off.

NoteWe do not recommend Toner Save Mode for printing photo or gray scale images.

Quick Print Setup

The Quick Print Setup feature allows you to quickly select driver settings. To view settings, simply click your mouse button on the task tray icon. This feature can be set to Onor Off from the Device Options.

Status Monitor

This reports the machine status (any error that may happen with the machine) when printing. The default setting for the Status Monitor is off. If you would like to turn the Status Monitor on, go to the Advanced tab, select Device options and then select Status monitor.

Printing

1 - 17

1

Administrator (For Windows® 98/98SE/Me Users Only)

The Administrator selection permits the Copy, Scaling,Color/Mono and Watermark features to be locked and password protected.

NoteRecord your password and keep it in a safe place for future reference. If you forget your password these settings can not be accessed.

Print setting (For Windows® XP/2000/NT® Users Only)

Improve pattern printing

Select the Improve pattern printing option if printed fills and patterns are different from the patterns and fills you see on your computer.

Print Date & Time

When enabled the Print Date & Time feature, it will print the date and time on your document from your computer’s system clock.

Printing

1 - 18

1

Click the Setting button to change the Date/Time Format,Position and Font. To include a background with the Dateand Time, select Opaque. When Opaque is selected, you can set the Color of the Date and Time background by changing the percentage.

NoteThe Date and Time in the selection box shows the format that will be printed. The actual Date and Timeprinted on your document is automatically retrieved from the settings of your computer.

Color Calibration

The output density of each color may vary depending on the temperature and humidity of the environment the machine is in. This setting helps you to improve color density by letting the printer driver use the color calibration data stored in your machine.

Get device data

If you click this button, the printer driver will attempt to get the color calibration data from your machine.

Use calibration data

If the driver successfully gets the calibration data, the driver will automatically check this box. Remove the check mark if you do not want to use the data.

Printing

1 - 19

1

Accessories tab

When you install option units, you can add them and select the settings for them in the Accessories tab as follows.

1 Available Options

You can manually add or remove additional driver options and settings for use with the optional accessories you can add to your machine.

2 Paper Source Setting

This feature recognizes the paper size in each paper tray.3 Auto Detect

The Auto Detect function tries to find any installed optional accessories and then shows those accessories in the printer driver. When you click the Auto Detect button, options that are installed on the machine will be listed. You can manually add or remove options.

NoteAuto Detect function may not be available under certain printer conditions.

2

1

3

2

2

2 - 1

The scanning operations and drivers will be different depending on your operating system. The machine uses a TWAIN compliant driver for scanning documents from your applications.

■ For Windows® XP

Two scanner drivers are installed. A TWAIN compliant scanner driver (see Scanning a document using the TWAIN driver on page 2-1) and a Windows Imaging Acquisition (WIA) driver (see Scanning a document using the WIA driver (For Windows® XP only) on page 2-8). Windows® XP users can select either one of the two when you scan documents.

NoteFor ScanSoft®, PaperPort® 9.0SE and OmniPage® OCR, see Using ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE and OmniPage® OCR on page 2-14.

Scanning a document using the TWAIN driver

TWAIN compliant

The Multi-Function Suite software includes a TWAIN compliant scanner driver. TWAIN drivers meet the standard universal protocol for communicating between scanners and software applications. This means that not only you can scan images directly into the PaperPort® 9.0SE viewer that included with your machine, but you can also scan images directly into hundreds of other software applications that support TWAIN scanning. These applications include popular programs like Adobe® PhotoShop®, Adobe® PageMaker®, CorelDraw®

and many more.

Scanning

Scanning

2 - 2

2

Access the Scanner

1 Open the software application (ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE) to scan a document.

NoteThe instructions for scanning in this Guide are for when you use ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE. If you are scanning into another software application, the steps may vary.

2 Click File, then Scan. Or select the Scan button. The Scan panel appears in the left side of the screen.

3 Choose the scanner you are using from the Scanner drop-down list box.

NoteIf the machine is connected via:

Parallel cable use SP C210SF

USB cable use SP C210SF USB

LAN cable use SP C210SF LAN

If you are using Windows® XP, select TW-SP C210SF, not WIA-SP C210SF.

4 Click Scan.

The Scanner Setup dialog box will appear:

Scanning

2 - 3

2

Scanning a document into the PC

You can scan a whole page

—OR—

Scan a portion of the page after pre-scanning the document.

Scanning a whole page

1 Place the document face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

2 Adjust the following settings, if required, in the Scanner window:

• Scan (Image Type) (1)• Resolution (2)

• Scan Type (3)

• Brightness (4)• Contrast (5)

• Document Size (6)

3 Click the Start button in the scanner window.

When scanning is completed, click Cancel to return to the PaperPort® 9.0SE window.

NoteAfter you select a document size, you can adjust the scanning area further by clicking the left mouse button and dragging it. This is required when you want to crop an image when scanning. (See Settings in the Scanner window on page 2-5.)

1

2

34

5

6

Scanning

2 - 4

2

Pre-Scanning to crop a portion you want to scan

The PreScan button is used to preview an image for cropping any unwanted areas from the image. When you are satisfied with the preview, click the Start button in the scanner window to scan the image.


2 Select the settings for Image Type, Resolution, Scan Type, Brightness, Contrast and Document Size, as needed.

3 In the Scanner Setup dialog box, click the PreScanbutton.The entire document will be scanned into the PC and will appear in the Scanning Area.

4 To select the portion you want to scan, click and hold the left mouse button, then drag the mouse pointer over the area.

NoteIf you enlarge the image using button, you can then use the button to restore the image to its former size.

5 Put the document back into the ADF.

NoteIf you loaded your document onto the scanner glass in Step 1, please skip this step.

6 Click Start.

This time only the selected area of the document will appear in the PaperPort® 9.0SE window (or your software application window).

7 In the PaperPort® 9.0SE window, use the options available to refine the image.

Scanning area

Scanning area

Scanning

2 - 5

2

Settings in the Scanner window

Image Type

Select the image type of output from Photo, Web or Text. Resolution and Scan Type will be altered for each default setting.

The default settings are:

Resolution

You can change the scanning resolution from the Resolution drop down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and transfer time, but can achieve a finer scanned image. The following list shows the resolution you can choose.

■ 100 x 100 dpi

■ 150 x 150 dpi

■ 200 x 200 dpi■ 300 x 300 dpi

■ 400 x 400 dpi

■ 600 x 600 dpi■ 1200 x 1200 dpi

■ 2400 x 2400 dpi

■ 4800 x 4800 dpi■ 9600 x 9600 dpi

Image Type Resolution Scan Type

Photo Select for scanning photo images. 300 x 300 dpi 24-bit color

Web Select for attaching the scanned image to web pages. 100 x 100 dpi 24-bit color

Text Select for scanning text documents. 200 x 200 dpi Black & White

Scanning

2 - 6

2

Scan Type

Brightness

Adjust the setting (-50 to 50) to obtain the best image. The default value is 0, representing an ‘average’.

You can set the level by dragging the slide bar to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. You can also type a value in the box for the setting.

If the scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness value and scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a higher brightness value and scan the document again.

NoteThe Brightness setting is only available when Black & White or Gray (Error Diffusion) or True Gray is selected.

Contrast

You can increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slide bar to the left or right. An increase emphasizes dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more detail in gray areas. You can also type a value in the box for the setting.

NoteThe Contrast setting is only adjustable when you have selected one of the gray scale settings. It is not available when Black & White and Color settings are selected as the Scan Type.

When scanning photographs or other images for use in a word processor or other graphics application, you should try different settings for the contrast and resolution modes to see which best suits your needs.

Black & White: Set the Scan Type to Black & White for text or line art.

Gray Scale: Set the Scan Type to Gray (Error Diffusion) or True Gray for photographic images.

Colors: Set either:

256 Color, which scans up to 256 colors, or 24 bit Color which scans up to 16.8 million colors.

Although using 24 bit Color creates an image with the most accurate colors, the image file will be approximately three times larger than a file created with 256 Color.

Scanning

2 - 7

2

Document Size

Set the size to one of the following:

■ A4 210 x 297 mm

■ JIS B5 182 x 257 mm■ Letter 8 1/2 x 11 in

■ Legal 8 1/2 x 14 in

■ A5 148 x 210 mm■ Executive 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 in

■ Business Card

■ Photo 4 x 6 in■ Index Card 5 x 8 in

■ Photo L 89 x 127 mm

■ Photo 2L 127 x 178 mm■ Postcard 1 100 x 148 mm

■ Postcard 2 148 x 200 mm

■ Custom (User adjustable from 0.35 x 0.35 in. to 8.5 x 14 in or 8.9 x 8.9 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm.)

To scan business cards, select the business card size, and then place the business card face down at the center of the scanner glass.

If you selected Custom as the size, the Custom Document Size dialog box will appear.

Type the Name, Width and Height for the document.

You can choose “mm” or “inch” as the unit for Width and Height.

NoteYou can see the actual paper size you selected on the screen.

■ Width: shows the width of scanning area

■ Height: shows the height of scanning area

■ Data Size: shows the approximate data size calculated in a Bitmap format. The size will be different for other file formats such as JPEG.

Scanning

2 - 8

2

Scanning a document using the WIA driver (For Windows® XP only)

WIA compliant

Windows® XP uses Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) for scanning images from the machine. You can scan images directly into the PaperPort® 9.0SE viewer included with your machine or you can scan images directly into any other software application that supports WIA or TWAIN scanning.

Accessing the scanner

1 Open your software application to scan the document.

NoteThe instructions for scanning in this Guide are for when you use ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE. The steps for scanning from another application may vary.

2 Select Scan from the File drop-down menu or select the Scan button.

The Scan panel appears on the left of the screen.

3 Select WIA-SP C210SF from the Scanner drop-down list box.

Note■ If the machine is connected via:

Parallel cable use WIA-SP C210SFUSB cable use WIA-SP C210SF USBLAN cable use WIA-SP C210SF LAN

■ If you choose TW-SP C210SF, the TWAIN driver will run.

4 Click Scan.

The Scan dialog box will appear:

Scanning

2 - 9

2

Scanning a document into the PC

There are two ways in which you can scan a whole page. You can either use the ADF (automatic document feeder) or the Flatbed scanner glass.

If you would like to scan and then crop a portion of the page after pre-scanning the document, you will need to use the scanner glass (Flatbed). (See Pre-Scanning to crop a portion you want to scan using the scanner glass on page 2-10.)

Scanning a document using the ADF

1 Place the document face up in the ADF.

2 Select the Document Feeder from the Paper sourcedrop-down list box (A).

3 Select the picture type (B).

4 Select the Page size from the drop-down list box (D).

5 If you require advanced settings, click on the tab Adjust the quality of the scanned picture (C). You can select Brightness, Contrast, Resolution and Picture Typefrom the Advanced Properties. Click the OK button after you choose your settings.

Note■ You can select a resolution of up to 1200 dpi.

■ For resolutions greater than 1200 dpi, use the Scanner Utility. (See Scanner Utility on page 2-11.)

6 To start scanning your document, click the Scan button in the Scan dialog box.

A

B

C

D

Scanning

2 - 10

2

Pre-Scanning to crop a portion you want to scan using the scanner glass

The Preview button is used to preview an image for cropping any unwanted portions from the image. When you are satisfied with the preview, click the Scan button from the scanner window to scan the image.

1 Place the document face down on the scanner glass.

2 Select Flatbed in the Paper source pull-down box (A).

3 Select the picture type (B).

4 In the Scan dialog box, click the Preview button. The entire document will be scanned into the PC and will appear in the scanning area.

5 To select the portion you want to scan, click and hold the left mouse button, then drag the mouse pointer over the area.

6 If you require advanced settings, click on the tab Adjust the quality of the scanned picture (C). You can select Brightness, Contrast, Resolution and Picture Typefrom the Advanced Properties. Click the OK button after you choose your settings.

7 To start scanning your document, click the Scan button in the Scan dialog box. This time only the selected area of the document will appear in the PaperPort® 9.0SE window (or your software application window).

A

BScanning area

C

Scanning area

Scanning

2 - 11

2

Scanner Utility

The Scanner Utility is used for configuring the WIA scanner driver for resolutions greater than 1200 dpi and for changing the maximum scanning size. If you want to set Legal size as the default size, change the setting using this utility. You must restart your PC for the new settings to take effect.

To run the utility:

You can run the utility by selecting the Scanner Utilitylocated in the Start/All Programs/Multi-Function SuiteSP C210SF/Scanner Settings/Scanner Utility menu.

NoteIf you scan the document at a resolution of greater than 1200 dpi, the file size may be very large. Please make sure that you have sufficient memory and hard disk space for the size of the file you are trying to scan. If the memory and hard disk is not sufficient then your computer may freeze and you could lose your file.

Scanning

2 - 12

2

Using the Scan key (For USB or Parallel cable users)

NoteIf you use the Scan key on a network, see Using the Scan key on page 4-4.

You can use the Scan key on the control panel to scan documents into your word processing, graphics or E-mail applications or your computer folder. The advantage of using Scan is that you avoid the mouse clicks required to scan from your computer.

NoteBefore you can use the Scan key on the control panel, you must have connected the machine to your Windows® based computer and loaded the appropriate our drivers for your version of Windows®.For details about how to configure the ControlCenter2 buttons to launch the application of your choice using the Scan key, see ControlCenter2 on page 3-1.

Scan to E-mail

You can either scan a black and white document or color document into your E-mail application as a file attachment. You can change the scan configuration. (See E-mail on page 3-6.)


2 Press Scan.

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Scan to E-mail.

Press Menu/Set.

The machine will scan the document, create a file attachment, and launch your E-mail application, displaying the new message waiting to be addressed.

Scanning

2 - 13

2

Scan to Image

You can scan a picture into your graphics application for viewing and editing. You can change the scan configuration. (See Image (example: Microsoft Paint) on page 3-4.)


2 Press Scan.

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Scan to Image.

Press Menu/Set.

The machine will start the scanning process.

Scan to OCR

If your document is text, you can have it converted by ScanSoft® OmniPage® OCR to an editable text file and then have the result displayed in your word processing application for viewing and editing. You can change the scan configuration. (See OCR (Word Processing program) on page 3-6.)


2 Press Scan.

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Scan to OCR.

Press Menu/Set.


Scan to File

You can scan a black and white or a color document into your computer and save it as a file in the folder you choose. The file type and specific folder are based on the settings you have chosen in the Scan to File screen of ControlCenter2. (See File on page 3-8.)


2 Press Scan.

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Scan to File.

Press Menu/Set.


Scanning

2 - 14

2

Using ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE and OmniPage® OCRScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE is a document management application. You can use PaperPort® 9.0SE to view scanned documents.

PaperPort® 9.0SE has a sophisticated, yet easy-to-use, filing system that will help you organize your graphics and text documents. It allows you to combine or “stack” documents of different formats for printing, faxing or filing.

ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE can be accessed through the ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE program group.

This chapter is only an introduction to the basic operations of ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE.

The complete ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE User’s Guide, including ScanSoft® OmniPage® OCR, is in the Documentation located on the CD-ROM.

When you install Multi-Function Suite, ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE and ScanSoft® OmniPage® OCR are installed automatically.

Scanning

2 - 15

2

Viewing items

ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE provides several ways to view items:

Desktop View displays a thumbnail (a small graphic that represents each item in a Desktop or folder).

Items in the selected folder appear on the PaperPort® 9.0SE Desktop. You can see PaperPort® 9.0SE items (MAX files) and non-PaperPort® 9.0SE items (files created using other applications).

Non-PaperPort® 9.0SE items include an icon that indicates the application that was used to create the item; a non-PaperPort® 9.0SE item is represented by a small rectangular thumbnail and not an actual image.

Page View displays a close-up of a single page and you can open a PaperPort® 9.0SE item by double-clicking on it.

As long as you have the appropriate application on your computer to display it, you can also double-click a non-PaperPort® 9.0SE item to open it.

Organizing your items in folders

PaperPort® 9.0SE has an easy-to-use filing system for organizing your items. The filing system consists of folders and items that you select to view in Desktop View. An item can be a PaperPort® 9.0SE item or a non-PaperPort® 9.0SE item:

■ Folders are arranged in a “tree” structure in the Folder View.You use this section to select folders and view their items in Desktop View.

■ You can simply drag and drop an item onto a folder.When the folder is highlighted, release the mouse button and the item is stored in that folder.

■ Folders can be “nested”—that is, stored in other folders.

■ When you double-click a folder, its items (both PaperPort® 9.0SE MAX files and non PaperPort® 9.0SE files) appear on the Desktop.

■ You can also use Windows® Explorer to manage the folders and items shown in Desktop View.

Desktop View displays items as thumbnails

Page View displays each itemas a full page

Scanning

2 - 16

2

Quick links to other applications

ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE automatically recognizes many other applications on your computer and creates a “working link” to them.

The Send To Bar at the bottom of the Desktop view shows icons of those linked applications.

To use a link, drag an item onto one of the icons to start the application represented by the icon. A typical use of the Send To Bar is to select an item and then fax it.

This sample Send To Bar shows several applications with links to PaperPort® 9.0SE.

If PaperPort® 9.0SE does not automatically recognize one of the applications on your computer, you can manually create a link using the New Program Link... command. (See PaperPort® 9.0SE in the Documentation section on the CD-ROM for more information about creating new links.)

ScanSoft® OmniPage® OCR lets you convert image text into text you can edit

ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE can quickly convert the text on a ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE item (which is really just a picture of the text) into text that you can edit with a word processing application.

PaperPort® 9.0SE uses the optical character recognition application ScanSoft® OmniPage® OCR, which comes with PaperPort® 9.0SE.

—OR—

PaperPort® 9.0SE can use your preferred OCR application if it is already on your computer. You can convert the entire item, or by using the Copy Text command, you can select only a portion of the text to convert.

Dragging an item onto a word-processing link icon starts PaperPort® 9.0SE’s built-in OCR application, or you can use your own OCR application.

Importing items from other applications

In addition to scanning items, you can bring items into PaperPort® 9.0SE in a variety of ways and convert them to PaperPort® 9.0SE (MAX) files in several different ways:

■ Print to the Desktop View from another application, such as Microsoft® Excel.

■ Import files saved in other file formats, such as Windows® Bitmap (BMP) or Tagged Image File Format (TIFF).

Scanning

2 - 17

2

Exporting items in other formats

You can export or save PaperPort® 9.0SE items in several popular file formats, such as BMP, JPEG, TIFF, PDF or self-viewing.

For example, to create a file for an Internet Web site, export it as a JPEG file. Web pages often use JPEG files for displaying images.

Exporting an image file

1 Select the Save As command from the File pull-down menu in the PaperPort® 9.0SE window. The Save ‘XXXXX’ as dialog box will be displayed.

2 Select the drive and directory where you want to store the file.

3 Enter the new file name and choose the file type or select a name from the File Name text box. (You can scroll through the Directories and File Name listing for prompting.)

4 Select the Save button to save your file, or Cancel to return to the PaperPort® 9.0SE without saving it.

How to Uninstall PaperPort® 9.0SE and ScanSoft® OmniPage® OCR

For Windows® 98/98SE/Me and Windows NT® 4.0:

Select Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs and the Install/Uninstall tab.

Select PaperPort from the list and click the Add/Remove button.

For Windows® 2000 Professional:

Select Start, Settings, Control Panel and Add/Remove Programs.

Select PaperPort from the list and click the Change or Remove button.

For Windows® XP:

Select Start, Control Panel, Add or Remove Programs.

Select PaperPort from the list and click the Change or Remove button.

3

3

3 - 1

Using ControlCenter2ControlCenter2 is a software utility that allows you to quickly and easily access your frequently used applications. Using ControlCenter2 eliminates the need to manually launch the specific applications. ControlCenter2 provides the following five categories of operations:

1 Scan directly to a file, E-mail, word processor or graphics application of your choice.

2 Custom Scan buttons allow you to configure a button to meet your own application requirements.

3 Access the Copy features available via your computer.

4 Access the “PC-FAX” applications available for your device.

5 Access the settings available to configure your device.

You can select which machine ControlCenter2 will connect with from the Model pull-down list.

Also you can open the configuration window for each function by clicking the Configuration button.

ControlCenter2

ControlCenter2

3 - 2

3

Turning the AutoLoad feature off

Once you start ControlCenter2 from the Start menu, the icon will appear on the task tray. You can open the ControlCenter2 window by double-clicking on the icon.

If you do not want ControlCenter2 to run automatically each time the computer is started;

1 Right-click on the ControlCenter2 icon in the Task Tray, and select Preference.

2 The ControlCenter2 preference window appears, then uncheck the Start ControlCenter on computer startupcheck box.

3 Click OK to close the window.

SCAN

This section contains four buttons for Scan to Image, Scan to OCR, Scan to E-mail and Scan to Fileapplications.

■ Image (Default: Microsoft Paint) — enables you to scan a page directly into any graphic viewer/editor application. You can select the destination application, such as MS Paint, Corel PhotoPaint, Adobe PhotoShop, or any kind of image editing application you have installed on your computer.

■ OCR (Default: MS NotePad) — enables you to scan a page or document, automatically run the OCR application and insert the text and any graphic images into a word processing application. You have the option of selecting the target word processing application, such as WordPad, MS Word, Word Perfect or whichever word processing application is installed on your computer.

■ E-mail (Default: your default E-mail software) — enables you to scan a page or document directly into an E-mail application as a standard attachment. You have the option of selecting the file type and resolution for the attachment.

■ File — enables you to scan directly to a file and save it to disk. You can change the file type and destination folder, as needed.

ControlCenter2 gives you the ability to configure the hardware Scan key on your machine for each scan feature. Select the Device Button in the configuration menu for each of the SCAN buttons.

CUSTOM SCAN

You can configure the button name and settings for each of these buttons to meet your specific requirements by right-clicking on a button and following the configuration menus.

ControlCenter2

3 - 3

3

COPY

Copy — allows you to use the PC and any printer driver for enhanced copy operations. You can scan the page on the machine and print the copies using any of the features of the machine printer driver—OR—you can direct the copy output to any standard printer driver installed on the PC including network printers.

You can configure your preferred settings on up to four buttons.

PC-FAX

These buttons are for sending or receiving faxes using the PC-FAX application.

■ Send — enables you to scan a page or document and automatically send the image as a fax from the PC using the PC-FAX software. (See PC-FAX sending on page 6-1.)

■ Receive — By clicking this button, the PC-FAX receiving software is activated and starts receiving fax data from your machine. After running the PC-FAX receive software, this button changes to View Received to open the viewer application and see the received faxes. Before you use the PC-FAX Receive function, you must select the option of PC-FAX Receive from the control panel menu of the your machine. (See Turn on the machine’s PC-FAX Receive function on page 6-12.)

NoteWhen the machine is connected to a network, you cannot use the Receive function.

■ Address Book — enables you to open PC-FAX address book. (See Address Book on page 6-5.)

■ Setup — enables you to configure the PC-FAX sending settings. (See Sending setup on page 6-2.)

DEVICE SETTING

You can configure the machine settings.

■ Remote Setup — enables you to open the Remote Setup Program. (See Remote Setup on page 5-1.)

■ Quick-Dial — enables you to open the Set Quick-Dial window of the Remote Setup. (See Remote Setupon page 5-1.)

■ Status Monitor — enables you to open the Status Monitor utility. (See Status Monitor on page 1-6.)

NoteWhen the machine is connected to a network, you cannot use the Remote Setup and Quick-Dial functions.

ControlCenter2

3 - 4

3

SCANThis section contains four buttons for Scan to Image, Scan to OCR, Scan to E-mail and Scan to File applications.

These four selections can be accessed from ControlCenter2 or from the Scan key on the control panel of the machine. The target application, file type and scan settings are configured independently by choosing the Software Button or the Device Button tabs of ControlCenter2 configuration window.

Image (example: Microsoft Paint)

Scan to Image feature allows you to scan an image directly into your graphics application for image editing. To change the default settings, right-click on the button and select Software Button or Device Button.

If you want to scan and then crop a portion of a page after pre-scanning the document, check Show Scanner Interfacebox. For more information on pre-scanning, see Pre-Scanning to crop a portion you want to scan on page 2-4.

Change the other settings, if needed.

✓

ControlCenter2

3 - 5

3

To change the destination application, select the appropriate application from the Target Application pull down list. You can add an application to the list by clicking the Add button. Enter the Application Name (up to 30 characters) and the Application Location. You can also find the application location by clicking button. Choose the File Type from the pull-down list.

You can delete applications that you have added by selecting the Application Name and click the Delete button.

To change the file type or Scan settings make your selections from the appropriate pull down list.

NoteThe Add and Delete buttons are also available for Scan to E-mail and Scan to OCR. The window may vary depending upon the function.

ControlCenter2

3 - 6

3

OCR (Word Processing program)

Scan to OCR converts the graphic page image data into text which can be edited by any word processor program. You can change the default word processor program.

To configure Scan to OCR, right-click on the button and select Software Button or Device Button.

To change the word processing application, select the destination word processing application from the Target Application pull down list. You can add an application to the list by clicking the Add button. An application can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button.

You can also configure the other settings for this selection.

If you want to scan and then crop a portion of a page after pre-scanning the document, check Show Scanner Interfacebox.

You can also configure the other settings for Scan to OCR.

E-mail

Scan to E-mail scans a document to your default E-mail application, so you can send the scanned job as an attachment. To change the default E-mail application or attachment file type, right-click on the button and select Software Button or Device Button.

To change the E-mail application, select your preferred E-mail application from the E-mail Application pull down list. You can add an application to the list by clicking the Addbutton. An application can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button.

NoteWhen you first start ControlCenter2 a default list of compatible E-mail applications will appear in the drop-down list. If you are having trouble using a custom application with ControlCenter2, you should choose an application from this list.

You can also change the other settings used to create the file attachments.

If you want to scan and then crop a portion of a page after pre-scanning the document, check Show Scanner Interface box.

ControlCenter2

3 - 7

3

File attachments

You can choose from the following list of file types for attachment to your E-mail or for saving to a folder.

File Type — Select from the pull-down list the type of file you want the scanned images to be saved in.

Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)

JPEG (*.jpg)

TIFF - Uncompressed (*.tif)

TIFF - Compressed (*.tif)

TIFF Multi-Page - Uncompressed (*.tif)

TIFF Multi-Page - Compressed (*.tif)

Portable Network Graphics (*.png)

PDF (*.pdf)

NoteAdditional file format support is available by scanning to PaperPort® 9.0SE and then use the save as function and choose the file format. (See Using ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE and OmniPage® OCR on page 2-14.)

The additional file types supported are:

TIFF - Group 4 (*.tif)

TIFF - Class F (*.tif)

TIFF Multi Page - Group 4 (*.tif)

TIFF Multi Page - Class F (*.tif)

ControlCenter2

3 - 8

3

File

Scan to File allows you to scan an image and save it in a specific file type to any directory on your PC. This allows you to easily archive your paper documents. To configure the file type and save to directory, right-click on the button and select Software Button or Device Button.

Select the file type for the saved image by selecting from the File Type pull-down list. You can save the file to the default folder which is shown currently in the Destination Folderbox, or you can select another folder/directory by clicking button.

To show where the scanned image is saved when scanning is finished, check Show Folder box. To specify the destination of the scanned image everytime, check Show Save as Window box.

If you want to scan and then crop a portion of a page after pre-scanning the document, check Show Scanner Interface box.

NoteFor the supported file types, see File attachments on page 3-7.

ControlCenter2

3 - 9

3

CUSTOM SCANThere are four buttons from which you can set your own preferences and configuration to fit your required usage for scanning.

To configure a button, right-click on the button, and the configuration window will appear. You have four function choices of scan action, Scan to Image, Scan to OCR, Scan to E-mail and Scan to File.

Scan to Image: This setting allows you to scan a page directly into any graphic viewer/editor software. You can select any kind of image editor application you have installed on your computer as a destination application.

Scan to OCR: Scanned documents will be converted to editable text files. You can select the destination application for the editable text.

Scan to E-mail: Scanned images will be attached to an E-mail message. You can choose which E-mail application to use if you have more than one installed on your system. You can also select the file type for the attachment and create a quick send list of E-mail addresses chosen from your default E-mail address book.

Scan to File: This setting allows you to save a scanned image to any directory on a local or network hard disk. You can also select the file type to be used.

ControlCenter2

3 - 10

3

Customizing a user-defined button

To configure a button, right-click on the button, and the configuration window will appear. Please read the following guidelines to configure the button.

Scan to Image:

In the General tab

You can enter up to a 30 character name in the Name for Custom field. This name will appear as the button name.

Select the type of scan from the Scan Action field.

In the Settings tab

You can select Target Application, File Type, Resolution,Scan Type, Document Size, Brightness and Contrastsettings.

Scan to OCR:

In the General tab



ControlCenter2

3 - 11

3

In the Settings tab

You can select Target Application, File Type, Resolution,Scan Type, Document Size, Brightness and Contrastsettings.

Scan to E-mail:

In the General tab



In the Settings tab

You can select E-mail Application, File Type, Resolution,Scan Type, Document Size, Brightness and Contrastsettings.

ControlCenter2

3 - 12

3

Scan to File:

In the General tab



In the Settings tab

Select the file format from the File Type pull down list. You can either send the file to the default folder which is shown currently in the Destination Folder box or select your preferred folder by using button.

You can also select Resolution, Scan Type, Document Size, Brightness and Contrast settings.

ControlCenter2

3 - 13

3

COPYThe Copy buttons (1-4) can be customized to allow you to take advantage of the features built into the our printer drivers to do advanced copy functions such as N-in-1 printing.

Before you can use the Copy buttons you must first configure the printer driver by right-clicking on the button.

You can enter up to a 30 character name in the Name for Copy field and select the Copy Ratio.

In the Scan setting field you can select the Resolution,Scan Type, Document Size, Brightness and Contrastsettings to be used.

Before finishing the Copy button configuration, you must set the Printer Name. Then click the Print options button to display the printer driver settings.

NoteThe Print options screen will vary depending upon which model printer you have selected.

In the printer driver settings window you can choose advanced settings for printing.

NoteYou must configure each of the copy buttons before they can be used.

ControlCenter2

3 - 14

3

PC-FAXThis section allows you to easily open the software for sending or receiving a PC-FAX or edit the address book by clicking the appropriate button.

Send

The Send button allows you to scan a document and automatically send the image as a fax from the PC using the PC-FAX software. (See PC-FAX sending on page 6-1.)

To change the Send settings, right-click on the button to open the configuration window. You can change Resolution, Scan Type, Document Size, Brightness and Contrast settings.

ControlCenter2

3 - 15

3

Receive / View Received

The PC-FAX Receiving software feature lets you view and store your faxes on your PC. It is automatically installed when you install the Multi-Function Suite.

By clicking the Receive button, the PC-FAX receiving software is activated and starts receiving fax data from your machine. Before you use the PC-FAX Receive function, you must select the option of PC-FAX Receive from the control panel menu of the machine. (See Turn on the machine’s PC-FAX Receive function on page 6-12.)

To Configure the PC-FAX Receive software, see PC-FAX receiving on page 6-12.

NoteWhen the machine is connected to the network, you cannot use this function.

When the PC-FAX receiving software is running, the View Received button will appear to open the viewer application (PaperPort® 9.0SE).

NoteYou can also activate the PC-FAX Receive software from the start menu. (See PC-FAX receiving on page 6-12.)

Address Book

The Address Book button allows you to configure add/amend or delete contacts from your address book. By clicking the button, the address book window will open for your editing. (See Address Book on page 6-5.)

Setup

By clicking the Setup button, you can configure the user settings used by the PC-FAX application. (See Setting up user information on page 6-1.)

ControlCenter2

3 - 16

3

DEVICE SETTINGIn this section you can configure the machine settings by clicking the button.

NoteWhen the machine is connected to a network, you cannot use Remote Setup and Quick-Dial function.

Remote Setup

The Remote Setup button allows you to open the Remote Setup Program window with which you can configure the machine setting menus.

Quick-Dial

The Quick-Dial button allows you to open the Set Quick-Dialwindow of the Remote Setup Program, so you can easily register or change the dial numbers from your PC to the machine.

Status Monitor

The Status Monitor button allows you to monitor the status of one or more devices, allowing you to get immediate notification of errors such as paper empty or paper jam. (See Status Monitor on page 1-6.)

4

4

4 - 1

To use the machine as a Network Scanner, the machine must be configured with a TCP/IP address that matches your network. You can set or change the settings from the control panel. (Please see the Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Before using Network Scanning

Network License

SP C210SF includes the PC license for up to 5 Users.

This license supports the installation of the Multi-Function Suite including ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE on up to 5 PC’s for use on a network.

If you want to use more than 5 PCs with ScanSoft® PaperPort® 9.0SE installed, please purchase NL-5 which is a multiple PC license agreement pack for up to an additional 5 Users. To purchase NL-5, please contact your Sales Office.

Note■ Max. 25 clients can be connected to one machine on a Network. For example, if 30 clients try to connect

at a time, 5 clients will not be shown on the LCD.

■ To use Network Scanning with Windows® XP that is protected by the firewall, Network Scanning program must be excluded from the firewall setting.

■ Network Scanning is not supported in Windows NT®.

Network Scanning

Network Scanning

4 - 2

4

Configuring Network Scanning

If you need to change the machine that was registered to your PC during the installation of Multi-Function Suite (see Quick Setup Guide), follow the steps below.

1 For Windows® XP

From the Start menu, select Control Panel, Printers and Other Hardware, Scanners and Cameras (or Control Panel, Scanners and Cameras).

Right-click the Scanner Device icon and select properties to view the Network Scanner Properties dialog box.

For Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000

From the Start menu, select Control Panel, Scanners and Cameras, and then right-click Scanner Device icon and select Properties to view the Network Scanner Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Network Setting tab in the dialog box and select a method to specify the machine as a Network scanner for your PC.

Specify your machine by address

Enter the IP address of the machine in the IP Addressfield. Click Apply and then OK.

—OR—

Specify your machine by Name

Enter the machine node name in the Node Name field (or click Browse, select the appropriate device you want to use, and click OK). Click Apply and then OK.

Network Scanning

4 - 3

4

3 Click the Scan To Button tab in the dialog box and enter your PC name in the Display Name field. The machine's LCD displays the name you enter. The default setting is your PC name. You can enter any name that you like.

4 You can avoid receiving unwanted documents by setting a 4-digit Pin number. Enter your Pin number in the Pin number and Retype Pin number field. To send data to a PC protected by a Pin number, the LCD prompts to enter the Pin number before the document can be scanned and sent to the machine. (See Using the Scan key on page 4-4 to 4-7.)

Network Scanning

4 - 4

4

Using the Scan key

Scan to E-mail (PC)

When you select Scan to E-mail (PC) your document will be scanned and sent directly to the PC you designated on your network. ControlCenter2 will activate the default E-mail application on the designated PC for addressing to the recipient. You can scan a black and white (or color document) and it will be sent with the E-mail from the PC as an attachment. You can change the scan configuration. (See E-mail on page 3-6.)


2 Press Scan.


Press Menu/Set.

4 Press ▲ or ▼ to select PC.

Press Menu/Set.

5 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the destination PC you want to use for E-mailing your document.

Press Menu/Set.

If the LCD prompts you to enter a Pin number, enter the 4-digit Pin number for the destination PC on the control panel.

Press Menu/Set.


Network Scanning

4 - 5

4

Scan to E-mail (E-mail server)

When you select Scan to E-mail (E-mail server) you can scan a black and white or color document and send it directly to an E-mail address from the machine. You can choose PDF or TIFF for Black and White and PDF or JPEG for color.

Note

Scan to E-mail (E-mail server) requires SMTP/POP3 mail server support. (See Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)


2 Press Scan.


Press Menu/Set.

4 Press ▲ or ▼ to select E-mail Server.

Press Menu/Set.

5 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Quality.

Press Menu/Set.

—OR—

If you don’t have to change the quality, press ▲ or ▼ to select Enter Address.

Press Menu/Set and then go to Step 9.

6 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Color 150 dpi, Color 300 dpi, Color 600 dpi, B/W 200 dpi or B/W 200×100 dpi.

Press Menu/Set.

If you select Color 150 dpi, Color 300 dpi or Color 600 dpi, go to Step 7.

—OR—

If you select B/W 200 dpi or B/W 200×100 dpi, go to Step 8.

7 Press ▲ or ▼ to select PDF or JPEG.

Press Menu/Set and go to Step 9.

8 Press ▲ or ▼ to select PDF or TIFF.

Press Menu/Set and go to Step 9.

9 The LCD prompts you to enter an address. Enter the destination E-mail address from the dial pad or use the One-Touch key.

Press Color Start or Black Start.


Network Scanning

4 - 6

4

Scan to Image

When you select Scan to Image your document will be scanned and sent directly to the PC you designated on your network. ControlCenter2 will activate the default graphics application on the designated PC. You can change the scan configuration. (See Image (example: Microsoft Paint) on page 3-4.)


2 Press Scan.

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Scan to Image.

Press Menu/Set.

4 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the destination PC you want to send to.

Press Menu/Set.


Press Menu/Set.


Scan to OCR

When you select Scan to OCR your document will be scanned and sent directly to the PC you designated on your network. ControlCenter2 will activate ScanSoft® OmniPage® OCR and convert your document into text for viewing and editing from a word processing application on the designated PC. You can change the scan configuration. (See OCR (Word Processing program) on page 3-6.)


2 Press Scan.

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Scan to OCR.

Press Menu/Set.


Press Menu/Set.


Press Menu/Set.


Network Scanning

4 - 7

4

Scan to File

When you select Scan to File you can scan a black and white (or color document) and send it directly to a PC you designate on your network. The file will be saved in the folder and file format that you have configured in ControlCenter2 on the designated PC. You can change the scan configuration. (See File on page 3-8.)


2 Press Scan.

3 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Scan to File.

Press Menu/Set.


Press Menu/Set.


Press Menu/Set.


NoteMax. 25 clients can be connected to one machine on a Network. For example, if 30 clients try to connect at a time, 5 clients will not be shown on the LCD.

5

5

5 - 1

Remote SetupThe Remote Setup application enables you to configure many settings of the machine from a Windows® application. When you access this application, the settings on your machine will be downloaded to your PC and displayed on your computer screen. If you change the settings, you can upload them directly to the machine.

NoteYou cannot use the Remote Setup application if your machine is connected via a Network. (See Network User’s Guide.)

From the Start menu, select All Programs, Multi-Function Suite SP C210SF, Remote Setup and then SP C210SF USBor SP C210SF LAN.

■ OK

When you click OK, the process of uploading the data to the machine begins. The Remote Setup program is closed if an error message is displayed, enter the correct data again and then click OK.

■ Cancel

The Cancel button clears your changes and exits the Remote Setup application without uploading any data to the machine.

■ Apply

The Apply button uploads the data to the machine, but stays in the Remote Setup application so you can make more changes.

■ Print

The Print button prints the selected items on the machine. You cannot print the Remote Setup changes until you click the Apply button to upload the new data to the machine. Then you can click the Print button to get an up-to-date printout.

■ Export

Click the Export button to save your current settings to a file.

■ Import

Click the Import button to read the settings from your saved file into the Remote Setup screen.

Note■ You can use the Export and Import buttons to save and use several sets of settings for your machine.■ To save all your settings, highlight SP C210SF at the top of the settings list then click Export.■ To save a single setting or a group of settings, highlight each setting or function heading (for example, to

select all fax settings highlight Fax) from the setting list then click Export.

Remote Setup

6

6

6 - 1

PC-FAX sendingThe PC-FAX feature allows you to use your PC to send any application or document file as a standard fax. You can create a file in any application on your PC, and then send it as a PC-FAX. You can even attach a cover page note. All you have to do is set up the receiving parties as Members or Groups in your PC-FAX Address Book or simply enter the destination address or fax number into the User interface. You can use the Address Book Search feature to quickly find members to send your fax to.

Note■ The maximum amount of faxes that can be sent as “broadcast” using PC-FAX is 50 fax numbers.

■ If you are using Windows® XP, Windows® 2000 Professional or Windows NT®, you must log on with administrator rights.

■ PC-FAX is available in Black & White only.

Setting up user information

1 From the Start menu, select All Programs,Multi-Function Suite SP C210SF, PC-FAX Sending,and then select PC-FAX Setup.

The PC-FAX Setup dialog box will appear:

2 You must enter this information to create the Fax Header and Cover Page.

3 Click OK to save the User Information.

NoteYou can access the User Information from the FAX Sending dialog box by clicking . (See Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Facsimile style user interface on page 6-10.)

PC-FAX software

PC-FAX software

6 - 2

6

Sending setup

From the PC-FAX Setup dialog box, click the Sending tab.

Outside line access

If you need to enter a number to access an outside line, enter it here. This is sometimes required by a local PBX telephone system (for example, if you must dial 9, to get an outside line in your office).

Include header

To add header information to the top of the fax pages you send, check the Include header box.

User interface

The user has the choice of two user interfaces. To change the user interface select the interface setting you want.

You can choose the Simple Style or the Facsimile Style.

Simple style

Facsimile style

PC-FAX software

6 - 3

6

Address Book

If Outlook® Express is installed on your PC, you can select which address book to use for PC-FAX sending, Address Book or Outlook® Express from the Address Book tab.

For the Address book file, you must enter the path and file name of the database file which contains the address book information.

—OR—

Use the Browse button to find the database to select.

If you select Outlook® Express, you can use the Outlook®

Express Address book when clicking the Address Book button on the sending window.

PC-FAX software

6 - 4

6

Setting up a Cover Page

From the PC-FAX dialog box, click to access the PC-Fax Cover page setup screen.

The PC-FAX Cover Page Setup dialog box will appear:

Entering Cover Page Information

To

From

Comment

Type the comment you want to add to the cover page.

Form

Select the cover page format you want to use.

Import BMP file

You can insert a bitmap file, such as your company logo, in the cover page.

Use the browse button to select the BMP file, and then select the alignment style.

Count cover page

When the Count Cover Page box is checked, the Cover Page will be included in the page numbering. When this box is not checked, the Cover Page will not be included.

NoteIf you are sending a fax to more than one recipient, the recipient information will not be printed on the Cover Page.

PC-FAX software

6 - 5

6

Speed-Dial setupFrom the PC-FAX Setup dialog box, click the Speed-Dial tab. (To use this feature, you must select the Facsimile Style user interface.)

You can register a Member or Group on each of the ten Speed-Dial buttons.

To register an address in a Speed-Dial button:

1 Click the Speed-Dial button you want to program.

2 Click the Member or Group you want to store on the Speed-Dial button.

3 Click Add >> to save it.

To clear a Speed-Dial button:

1 Click the Speed-Dial button you want to clear.

2 Click Clear to erase it.

Address Book

From the Start menu, select All Programs, Multi-Function Suite SP C210SF, PC-FAX Sending, and then click PC-FAX Address Book.

The Address Book dialog box will appear:

PC-FAX software

6 - 6

6

Setting up a Member in the Address Book

In the Address Book dialog box you can add, edit and delete stored information of Members and Groups.

1 In the Address Book dialog box, click the icon to add a Member.

The Address Book Member Setup dialog box will appear:

2 In the Member Setup dialog box, type the Member’s information. Name is a required field. Click OK to save the information.

Setting up a Group for Broadcasting

If you often send the same PC-FAX to several recipients, you can combine them in to a Group.

1 In the Address Book dialog box, click the icon to create a Group.

The Address Book Group Setup dialog box appears:

2 Type the name of the new Group in the Group Namefield.

3 In the Available Names box, select each Member to be included in the Group, and then click Add >>.

Members you add to the Group will be added to the Group Members box.

4 After all the members you want have been added, click OK.

NoteThe maximum amount of faxes that can be sent as Broadcast using PC-FAX is 50 numbers.

PC-FAX software

6 - 7

6

Editing Member information

1 Select the Member or Group you want to edit.

2 Click the edit icon.

3 Change the Member or Group information.

4 Click OK to save your changes.

Deleting a Member or Group

1 Select the Member or Group you want to delete.

2 Click the delete icon.

3 When the Confirm Item Delete dialog box appears, click OK.

PC-FAX software

6 - 8

6

Exporting the Address Book

You can export the whole Address Book to an ASCII text file (*.csv). Or if you wish, you can select and create a Vcard that will be attached to that Member’s outgoing E-mail. (A Vcard is an electronic business card that contains the sender’s contact information.)

To export the whole current Address book:

NoteIf you are creating a Vcard, you must first select the member.

If you select Vcard in Step 1, Save as type: will be Vcard (*.vcf).

1 From the Address Book select File, point to Export, and then click Text.

—OR—

Click Vcard and go to Step 5.

2 From the Available Items column, select the data fields you wish to Export and then click Add >>.

NoteSelect the items in the order you want them listed.

3 If you are exporting to an ASCII file, select the Divide Character - Tab or Comma. This selects between a Tabor Comma to separate the data fields.

4 Select OK to save the data.

5 Type the name of the file, and then select Save.

PC-FAX software

6 - 9

6

Importing to the Address Book

You can import ASCII text files (*.csv) or Vcards (electronic business cards) into your Address Book.

To import an ASCII text file:

1 From the Address Book select File, point to Import, and then click Text.

—OR—

Click Vcard and go to Step 5.

2 From the Available Items column select the data fields you want to import, and click Add >>.

NoteFrom the Available Items list select the fields in the same order they are listed in the Import text file.

3 Select the Divide Character - Tab or Comma based on the file format you are importing.

4 To import the data, click OK.

5 Type the name of the file, and then select Open.

NoteIf you selected a text file in Step 1, the Files of type: will be Text file (*.csv).

PC-FAX software

6 - 10

6

Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Facsimile style user interface

1 Create a file in Word, Excel, Paint, Draw or any other application on your PC.

2 From the File menu, select Print.

The Print dialog box will appear:

3 Select PC-FAX as your printer, and then click Print. The Facsimile style user interface will appear, if it does not check the user interface selection setting as detailed on page 6-2. (See Sending setup on page 6-2.)

4 Enter the fax number using any of the following methods:

■ Using the dial pad enter the number.■ Click any of the 10 Speed-Dial buttons.

■ Click the Address Book button, and then select a Member or Group from the Address Book.

NoteIf you make a mistake, click Clear to delete all the entries.

5 To include a Cover Page, click Cover Page On, and then click the Cover Page icon to enter or edit the Cover Page information.

6 Click Start to send the fax.

NoteIf you want to cancel the fax, click Stop.

Redial

If you want to redial a number, click Redial to scroll through the last five fax numbers, and then click Start.

PC-FAX software

6 - 11

6

Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Simple style user interface

1 Create a file in Word, Excel, Paint, Draw or any other application on your PC.

2 From the File menu, select Print.

The Print dialog box will appear:

3 Select PC-FAX as your printer, and then click Print.

The Simple style user interface will appear; if it does not check the user interface selection setting as detailed on page 6-2. (See Sending setup on page 6-2.)

4 In the To: field, type the fax number of the recipient. You can also use the Address Book to select destination fax numbers by clicking the To: button. If you made a mistake entering a number, click the Clear button to delete all the entries.

5 To send a Cover Page, click the Cover Page On check box.

NoteYou can also click the icon to create or edit a cover page.

6 When you are ready to send your fax, click the Send icon.

7 If you want to cancel the fax, click the Cancel icon.

PC-FAX software

6 - 12

6

PC-FAX receivingThe PC-FAX Receiving software feature lets you view and store your faxes on your PC. It is automatically installed when you install the Multi-Function Suite.

When this feature is turned on, your machine will receive faxes into memory. Once it has received the fax, it will automatically send it to your PC.

Even if you have turned off your PC (at night or on the weekend, for example), your machine will receive and store your faxes in its memory. The LCD will show the number of stored faxes received, for example PC Fax Msg:001.

When you start your PC and the PC-FAX Receiving Software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.

To enable the PC-FAX Receiving Software, do the following.

■ Before you use the PC-FAX Receive function, you must select the option of PC-FAX Receive from the control panel menu of the machine.

■ Run the PC-FAX Receiving software on your PC. (We recommend you select the Add to Startup foldercheck box, so that the software automatically runs and can transfer any faxes on PC startup.)

Note■ PC-FAX receiving is only available when using the USB or Parallel connection, not a Network (LAN)

connection.

■ PC-FAX is available in Black & White only.

Turn on the machine’s PC-FAX Receive function


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select PC Fax Receive.

Press Menu/Set.


Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

NoteIf you select Backup Print:On, the machine will print the fax, so you will have a copy if there is a power failure before it is sent to the PC. The fax messages are automatically erased from your machine’s memory when they have been successfully printed and sent to your PC. When Backup Print is off, your fax messages are automatically erased from your machine’s memory when they have been successfully sent to your PC.

PC-FAX software

6 - 13

6

Running PC-FAX Receiving

From the Start menu, select All Programs, Multi-Function Suite SP C210SF, PC-FAX Receiving, and then select SP C210SF or SP C210SF USB.

The PC-FAX icon will appear on your PC Task bar for this Windows® session.

Setting up your PC

1 Right-click the PC-FAX icon on your PC Task Bar, and then click PC-Fax RX Setup.

2 The PC-Fax RX Setup dialog box will appear:

3 In Save file to, use the Browse button if you want to change the path where PC-FAX files will be saved.

4 In File Format, select .tif or .max for the format the received document will be saved in. The default format is .tif.

5 If you want to, you can check the Play wave file when receiving FAX check box, and then enter the path of the wave file.

6 To load PC FAX receiving automatically when you start up Windows®, select the Add to Startup folder check box.

Viewing new PC-FAX messages

Each time PC is receiving a PC-FAX, the icon will alternate between and .

Once the fax has been received the icon will change to .

The will change to once the received fax has been viewed.

1 Run PaperPort®.

2 Open the fax received folder.

3 Double-click any of the new faxes to open and view them.

NoteThe title of your unread PC message will be the date and time until you assign a file name. For example “Fax 2-20-2002 16:40:21.tif”

I

I

I - 1

C

ControlCenter2Windows® .................................................. 3-1

D

DriversWindows®

Native Driver ........................................... 1-8TWAIN ..................................................... 2-1WIA .......................................................... 2-8

F

FaxWindows®

PC-FAX receiving ................................ 6-12PC-FAX sending .................................... 6-1

address book ....................................... 6-5

cover page ........................................... 6-4

facsimile style .................................... 6-10group .................................................... 6-6

simple style ........................................ 6-11

P

PaperPort® (Windows®)exporting .................................................. 2-17importing .................................................. 2-16

PaperPort® 9.0SE (Windows®)and OmniPage® OCR .............................. 2-3

PrintWindows®

keys on control panel ............................ 1-2Secure Print key ..................................... 1-3

R

Remote SetupWindows® .................................................. 5-1

S

ScanWindows®

OmniPage® OCR ..................................2-16Resolution ...............................................2-5Scan key .........................................2-12, 4-4Scanner Utility .......................................2-11TWAIN Compliant ...................................2-1WIA Compliant ........................................2-8

Status MonitorWindows® ...................................................1-6

Index

Copylight © 2005

Softw

are

Use

r’s Guid

e

EN USA G157-3202

Network User’s Guide

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correctuse, be sure to read the Important Information in “User’s Guide” before using the machine.

i

Definitions of warnings, cautions, and notesWe use the following icon throughout this User’s Guide:

TrademarksUNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.

HP and Hewlett-Packard are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.

Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

BRAdmin Professional is a trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

All other terms, brand and product names mentioned in this User’s Guide are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.

Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or give tips about how the operation works with other features.

ii

Table of contents

1 Introduction

Overview............................................................................................................................................ 1-1Network function features.................................................................................................................. 1-2

Network printing........................................................................................................................... 1-2Network scanning........................................................................................................................ 1-2Network PC-FAX ......................................................................................................................... 1-2Management utility ...................................................................................................................... 1-2

BRAdmin Professional............................................................................................................. 1-2Types of Network Connections.......................................................................................................... 1-3

Network Connection Example ..................................................................................................... 1-3Peer-to-Peer printing using TCP/IP......................................................................................... 1-3Network Shared Printing.......................................................................................................... 1-4

Protocols............................................................................................................................................ 1-5TCP/IP Protocols ......................................................................................................................... 1-5

DHCP/BOOTP/RARP.............................................................................................................. 1-5APIPA...................................................................................................................................... 1-5DNS client................................................................................................................................ 1-5LPR/LPD ................................................................................................................................. 1-5Port 9100................................................................................................................................. 1-5SMTP client ............................................................................................................................. 1-6IPP........................................................................................................................................... 1-6TELNET................................................................................................................................... 1-6SNMP ...................................................................................................................................... 1-6Web server (HTTP) ................................................................................................................. 1-6

2 Configuring your network printer

Overview............................................................................................................................................ 2-1IP addresses, subnet masks and gateways ...................................................................................... 2-1

IP address ................................................................................................................................... 2-1Subnet mask................................................................................................................................ 2-2

Setting the IP address and subnet mask........................................................................................... 2-3Using the BRAdmin Professional utility and the TCP/IP protocol to configure your network printer..................................................................................................................... 2-3

BRAdmin Professional utility ................................................................................................... 2-3How to configure your machine using the BRAdmin Professional utility ................................. 2-3

Using a web browser to change the print/scan settings .............................................................. 2-4

3 Front Panel Setup

LAN Main Setup Menu....................................................................................................................... 3-1Setup TCP/IP............................................................................................................................... 3-1

BOOT Method ......................................................................................................................... 3-1IP Address............................................................................................................................... 3-3Subnet Mask ........................................................................................................................... 3-4Gateway .................................................................................................................................. 3-4Node Name ............................................................................................................................. 3-4WINS Config............................................................................................................................ 3-5WINS Server............................................................................................................................ 3-5

iii

DNS Server ............................................................................................................................. 3-6APIPA...................................................................................................................................... 3-6

Setup Internet .............................................................................................................................. 3-7Making corrections: ................................................................................................................. 3-7Repeating letters: .................................................................................................................... 3-8SMTP Server ........................................................................................................................... 3-8POP3 Server ........................................................................................................................... 3-8POP3 Server address.............................................................................................................. 3-8Mailbox Name.......................................................................................................................... 3-9Mailbox Pwd ............................................................................................................................ 3-9

Setup Mail RX............................................................................................................................ 3-10Auto Polling ........................................................................................................................... 3-10Poll Frequency....................................................................................................................... 3-10Header................................................................................................................................... 3-10Del Error Mail......................................................................................................................... 3-10Notification............................................................................................................................. 3-11

Setup Mail TX............................................................................................................................ 3-11Sender Subject ...................................................................................................................... 3-11Size Limit ............................................................................................................................... 3-11Notification............................................................................................................................. 3-12

Setup Relay ............................................................................................................................... 3-12Rly Broadcast ........................................................................................................................ 3-12Relay Domain........................................................................................................................ 3-13Relay Report.......................................................................................................................... 3-13

Setup Misc................................................................................................................................. 3-14Ethernet ................................................................................................................................. 3-14Time Zone ............................................................................................................................. 3-14Windows® Time Zone Setting................................................................................................ 3-14

Scan to E-mail (E-mail server)................................................................................................... 3-15Black and White File Type for Scan to E-mail (E-mail server)............................................... 3-15Color File Type for Scan to E-mail (E-mail server)................................................................ 3-15

Restoring the network settings to factory default....................................................................... 3-15Printing the Network Configuration List ..................................................................................... 3-16

4 Network printing from Windows® basic TCP/IP Peer-to-Peer printingOverview............................................................................................................................................ 4-1For Windows® 2000/XP users ........................................................................................................... 4-1

Configuring the standard TCP/IP port ......................................................................................... 4-2Printer driver not yet installed.................................................................................................. 4-2Printer driver already installed................................................................................................. 4-3

For Windows NT® 4.0 users .............................................................................................................. 4-3Installing the TCP/IP protocol ...................................................................................................... 4-3Installing the Peer-to-Peer software ............................................................................................ 4-4Associating to the printer ............................................................................................................. 4-5Adding a second LPR port........................................................................................................... 4-6

For Windows® 98/Me users ............................................................................................................... 4-6Installing the Peer-to-Peer software ............................................................................................ 4-6Associating to the printer ............................................................................................................. 4-7Adding a second LPR port........................................................................................................... 4-8

Other sources of information ............................................................................................................. 4-8

iv

5 Internet printing

Internet Printing Installation ............................................................................................................... 5-1Overview...................................................................................................................................... 5-1

Quick Tips................................................................................................................................ 5-1Internet Print General Information ............................................................................................... 5-1Internet Print: Configuring the Print Server.................................................................................. 5-2

Print Server Configuration Checklist........................................................................................ 5-2Internet Print: Using the BRAdmin Professional utility to Configure the Print Server .................. 5-3Internet Print: Using a Web Browser to Configure the Print Server............................................. 5-4Internet Print: Installing the BIP software on Windows® 98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0 ................................................................................................................. 5-4

Setup from CD-ROM ............................................................................................................... 5-4Adding a Second Internet Port .................................................................................................... 5-6Windows® 2000/XP IPP printing.................................................................................................. 5-7Specifying a different URL........................................................................................................... 5-9

Other sources of information ............................................................................................................. 5-9

6 Web Based Management

How to use a Web Browser to manage your Device ......................................................................... 6-1Overview...................................................................................................................................... 6-1How to connect to your machine using a Browser ...................................................................... 6-1Password Information.................................................................................................................. 6-1

7 Internet FAX

Overview............................................................................................................................................ 7-1Getting Connected .................................................................................................................. 7-1Front Panel Key Functions ...................................................................................................... 7-2

Sending an Internet Fax .............................................................................................................. 7-2Manually Entering Text................................................................................................................ 7-3

Making corrections: ................................................................................................................. 7-3Repeating letters: .................................................................................................................... 7-3Special characters and symbols.............................................................................................. 7-4

Receiving E-mail or Internet Fax ................................................................................................. 7-4Receiving an Internet Fax to a PC............................................................................................... 7-5Forwarding Received E-mail and Fax Messages........................................................................ 7-5Relay Broadcasting ..................................................................................................................... 7-5

Relay Broadcast from a machine ............................................................................................ 7-6Sending to multiple phone numbers: ....................................................................................... 7-6Outlook 97/98/2000/2002/2003: .............................................................................................. 7-7

TX Verification Mail...................................................................................................................... 7-7Setup Mail (TX)............................................................................................................................ 7-8Setup Mail (RX) ........................................................................................................................... 7-8Error mail ..................................................................................................................................... 7-8Important information on Internet Fax ......................................................................................... 7-9

v

8 Troubleshooting

Overview............................................................................................................................................ 8-1General problems .............................................................................................................................. 8-1

CD-ROM is inserted, but does not start automatically............................................................. 8-1How to reset the print server to factory default........................................................................ 8-1

Network print software installation problems ..................................................................................... 8-1The print server is not found during setup of the network print software installation or from the printer driver of the machine in Windows®. ......................................... 8-1

Printing problems............................................................................................................................... 8-3Print job is not printed.............................................................................................................. 8-3

Protocol-specific troubleshooting....................................................................................................... 8-3Windows® 98/98SE/Me and Windows NT® 4.0 Peer-to-Peer print (LPR) troubleshooting.......... 8-3Windows® 2000/XP IPP troubleshooting..................................................................................... 8-4

Want to use a different Port number other than 631. .............................................................. 8-4Get More Info option in Windows® 2000 not working .............................................................. 8-4

Web browser troubleshooting (TCP/IP)....................................................................................... 8-4

A Appendix A

Using services ...................................................................................................................................A-1Other ways to set the IP address (for advanced users and Administrators)......................................A-1

Using DHCP to configure the IP address ....................................................................................A-1Using BOOTP to configure the IP address..................................................................................A-2Using RARP to configure the IP address ....................................................................................A-2Using APIPA to configure the IP address....................................................................................A-3Using ARP to configure the IP address .......................................................................................A-3

Windows® systems..................................................................................................................A-3UNIX®/Linux systems ..............................................................................................................A-4

Using the TELNET console to configure the IP address .............................................................A-4Installation when using a Network Print Queue or Share (printer driver only)...................................A-6Multi-function Print Server specifications...........................................................................................A-7Function Table and Default Factory Settings.....................................................................................A-8

I Index

1

1 - 1

1 Introduction

Overview

The machine can be shared on a 10/100 MB wired Ethernet network using the internal network print server. The print server supports various functions and methods of connection depending on the operating system you are running on a network supporting TCP/IP. These functions include printing, scanning, PC-FAX send, and Status Monitor. The following chart shows what network features and connections are supported by each operating system.

To use the machine through a network, you need to configure the print server, and set up the computers you use.

In this chapter, you will learn the basic concept of the network function, connection and protocols. In Chapter 2, you will read information on network configuration. In Chapter 3, you will learn how to configure the print server using the control panel. Chapter 4 through Chapter 5 describe how to configure your print server with your operating system:

Chapter 2: Configuring your network printer

Chapter 3: Front Panel Setup

Chapter 4: Network printing from Windows® basic TCP/IP Peer-to-Peer printing

Chapter 5: Internet printing

OperatingSystems

10/100BASE-TX Wired Ethernet (TCP/IP)

Printing Scanning PC-Fax Send Status Moitor

Windows®

98/98SE/Me/2000/XP

√ √ √ √ √

Windows NT®4.0 √ √ √ √

Introduction

1 - 2

1

Network function features

SP C210SF has the following basic network function.

Network printing

The print server provides printing services for Windows® 98/98SE/Me/NT®/2000/XP supporting the TCP/IP protocols.

Network scanning

You can scan documents over the network to your computer (See Chapter 4 of the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM).

Network PC-FAX

You can directly send a PC file as a PC-FAX on your network (See Chapter 6 of the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM for complete description).

Management utility

BRAdmin Professional

The BRAdmin Professional utility provides powerful, easy to use configuration and management of fax and network settings.

Introduction

1 - 3

1

Types of Network Connections

Generally speaking, there are two types of network: A Peer-to-Peer network and a shared Network.

Network Connection Example

Peer-to-Peer printing using TCP/IP

In a Peer-to-Peer environment, each computer directly sends and receives data to each device. There is no central server controlling File access or Printer sharing.

■ In a smaller network of 2 or 3 computers, we recommend the Peer-to-Peer printing method as it is easier to configure than the Network Shared Printing method described on the following page. See Network Shared Printing on page 1-4.

■ Each computer must use the TCP/IP Protocol.

■ The machine needs an appropriate IP address configuration.

■ If you are using a router, the Gateway address must be configured on the computers and the machine.

Windows®Windows®

TCP/IPTCP/IP

Windows®

Network printer (your machine)

Switch or Router

Introduction

1 - 4

1

Network Shared Printing

In a Network Shared environment, each computer sends data via a centrally controlled computer. This type of computer is often called a “Server” or a “Print Server”. Its job is to control the printing of all print jobs.

■ In a larger network, we recommend a Network Shared printing environment.■ The “Server” or the “Print Server” must use the TCP/IP Print Protocol.

■ The machine needs an appropriate IP address configuration unless the machine is shared via the parallel port or USB port of the server.

Network printer (your machine)Also known as “Server” or “Print Server”

Windows®

Windows®

Windows®

TCP/IP

Network Shared

Windows®

Introduction

1 - 5

1

Protocols

TCP/IP Protocols

Protocols are the standardized sets of rules for transmitting data on a network. Protocols allow users to gain access to network-connected resources.

The print server used on this product supports the TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocols.

TCP/IP is the most popular set of protocols and can be used in almost all operating systems such as Windows® and Linux.

The following TCP/IP protocols are available on this product.

DHCP/BOOTP/RARP

By using the DHCP/BOOTP/RARP protocols, the IP address can be automatically configured.

NoteTo use the DHCP/BOOTP/RARP protocols, please contact your Network Administrator.

APIPA

If you do not assign an IP address manually (using the Multi-Function Suite Installation or BRAdmin software) or automatically (using a DHCP/BOOTP/RARP server), the Automatic Private IP Addressing (APIPA) protocol will automatically assign an IP address from the range 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255.

DNS client

The print server supports the Domain Name Service (DNS) client function. This function allows the print server to communicate with other devices by using its DNS name.

LPR/LPD

Commonly used printing protocol on a TCP/IP network.

Port 9100

Another commonly used printing protocol on a TCP/IP network.

Introduction

1 - 6

1

SMTP client

The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) allows the machine to send and receive e-mails.

IPP

The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP Version 1.0) allows you to print documents via the internet.

TELNET

The print server supports TELNET server for command line configuration.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is used to manage network devices including computers, routers and network ready machines.

Web server (HTTP)

The print server is equipped with a built in web server that allows you to monitor its status or change of its configuration settings.

NoteWe recommend Internet Explorer 6.0 (or higher) or Netscape Navigator 7.1 (or higher). If a different web browser is used, make sure it is compatible with HTTP 1.0 and HTTP 1.1.

2

2 - 1

2 Configuring your network printer

Overview

Before you can use your machine on your network, you need to install the software and also configure the appropriate TCP/IP network settings on the machine itself. To do this, we recommend that you use the automatic installer on the CD-ROM as this will guide you through the software and network installation.

If you do not wish to use the automatic installer, or you do not understand some of the terms used by the automatic installer, refer to the remainder of this chapter for more information.

NoteIf you do not wish to, or are unable to use the automatic installer or any of software tools, you can also use the machine’s control panel to change network settings. For more information, see Front Panel Setup on page 3-1.

IP addresses, subnet masks and gateways

To use the machine in a networked TCP/IP environment, you need to configure its IP address and subnet mask. The IP address you assign to the print server must be on the same logical network as your host computers. If it is not, you must properly configure the subnet mask and the gateway address.

IP address

An IP address is a series of numbers that identifies each device connected to a network. An IP address consists of four numbers separated by dots. Each number is between 0 and 255.

Example: In a small network, you would normally change the final number.

192.168.1.1, 192.168.1.2, 192.168.1.3

If you have a DHCP/BOOTP/RARP server in your network (typically a UNIX®/Linux or Windows® 2000/XP network) the print server will automatically obtain its IP address from the DHCP server.

NoteOn smaller networks, the DHCP server may be the Router.

Configuring your network printer

2 - 2

2

Subnet mask

Subnet masks restrict network communication.

Example: PC1 can talk to PC2

PC1 IP Address:192.168.1.2Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

PC2 IP Address:192.168.1.3Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

In the above example, we can communicate with anything that has an IP address that begins with 192.168.1.X

For more information on DHCP, BOOTP and RARP, see Using DHCP to configure the IP address on page A-1, Using BOOTP to configure the IP address on page A-2 and Using RARP to configure the IP address on page A-2.

If you do not have a DHCP/BOOTP/RARP server, the Automatic Private IP Addressing (APIPA) protocol will automatically assign an IP address from the range 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255. For more information on APIPA, see Using APIPA to configure the IP address on page A-3.

If the APIPA protocol is disabled, the default IP address of a print server is 192.0.0.192. However, you can easily change this IP address number to match with the IP address details of your network. For information on how to change the IP address, see Setting the IP address and subnet mask on page 2-3.


2 - 3

2

Setting the IP address and subnet mask

Using the BRAdmin Professional utility and the TCP/IP protocol to configure your network printer

BRAdmin Professional utility

The BRAdmin Professional utility is designed to allow you to manage your network connected machines in a TCP/IP environment.

How to configure your machine using the BRAdmin Professional utility

Note• Please use the BRAdmin Professional utility that was supplied on the CD-ROM of your product.

• If you are using Personal Firewall software (e.g. the Internet Connection Firewall available in Windows® XP), disable it. Once you are sure that you can print, re-start your Personal Firewall software.

• The default password for print servers is “access”.

1 Start the BRAdmin Professional utility (from Windows® 98/98SE/Me, Windows NT® 4.0 and Windows®

2000/XP), by clicking Start / Programs / Administrator Utilities / BRAdmin Professional Utilities /BRAdmin Professional.

2 Select TCP/IP in the left frame of the main BRAdmin window.

3 Select Search Active Devices from the Devices menu. BRAdmin Professional will search for new devices automatically.


2 - 4

2

Note• If the print server is set to its factory default settings without using a DHCP/BOOTP/RARP server, the

device will appear as an APIPA device in the BRAdmin Professional utility screen.• You can find the node name and Ethernet address by printing the Network Configuration List. See

Printing the Network Configuration List on page 3-16 for information on how to print the Network Configuration List on your print server.

4 Double-click the unconfigured device.

5 Enter the IP address, Subnet Mask and Gateway (if needed) of your print server.

6 Click OK.

7 With the correctly programmed IP address, you will see the print server in the device list.

Using a web browser to change the print/scan settings

A standard web browser (we recommend Microsoft Internet Explorer® version 6.0 or later, or Netscape Navigator® version 7.1 or later) can be used to change your print server settings using the HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol). To use a web browser, you must have assigned an IP address to the print server.

1 Type http://printer_ip_address/ into your browser. (Where printer_ip_address is the IP address or the print server name)

For example: http://192.168.1.2/ (if the printer’s IP address is 192.168.1.2.)

NoteIf you have edited the hosts file on your computer or are using Domain Name System, you can also enter the DNS name of the print server. As the print server supports TCP/IP and NetBIOS names, you can also enter the NetBIOS name of the print server. The NetBIOS name can be seen in the Network Configuration List. See Printing the Network Configuration List on page 3-16 for information on how to print the Network Configuration List on your print server. The NetBIOS name assigned is the first 15 characters of the node name and by default it will appear as BRN_xxxxxx where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the Ethernet address.

2 Click Network Configuration.

3 Enter a user name and a password. The User Name is “admin” and the default Password is “access”.

4 Click OK.

5 Click Configure TCP/IP.

6 You can now change the printer server settings.

3

3 - 1

3 Front Panel Setup

LAN Main Setup Menu

The control panel LAN menu section can be used to configure network settings.

Press Menu/Set, then press number, 6 for LAN and then proceed to the menu selection you wish to configure.

Please note that the machine is supplied with the BRAdmin Professional Windows® software, which also can be used to configure network settings.

Setup TCP/IP

This menu has nine sections: Boot Method, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Node Name, WINS Config, WINS Server, DNS Server and APIPA.

BOOT Method


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto, Static, RARP, BOOTP or DHCP.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Static mode

In this mode the machine’s IP address must be manually assigned. Once entered the IP address is locked to the assigned address.

Auto mode

In this mode, the machine will scan the network for a DHCP server, if it can find one, and if the DHCP server is configured to allocate an IP address to the machine, then the IP address supplied by the DHCP server will be used. If no DHCP server is available, the machine will scan for a BOOTP server. If a BOOTP server is available, and it is configured correctly, the machine will take its IP address from the BOOTP server. If a BOOTP server is not available, the machine will scan for a RARP server. If a RARP server also does not answer, the machine will use an APIPA address, see Using APIPA to configure the IP address on page A-3. This whole process can take 2 to 3 minutes so we recommend printing a Network Configuration List to confirm the network settings are set correctly.

Front Panel Setup

3 - 2

3

RARP mode

The print server IP address can be configured using the Reverse ARP (RARP) facility on your host computer. This is done by editing the /etc/ethers file (if this file does not exist, you can create it) with an entry similar to the following:

00:80:77:31:01:07 BRN_310107

Where the first entry is the Ethernet address of the print server and the second entry is the name of the print server (the name must be the same as the one you put in the /etc/hosts file).

If the RARP daemon is not already running, start it (depending on the system the command can be rarpd, rarpd -a, in.rarpd -a or something else; type man rarpd or refer to your system documentation for additional information). To verify that the RARP daemon is running on a Berkeley UNIX-based system, type the following command:

ps -ax | grep -v grep | grep rarpd

For AT&T UNIX-based systems, type:

ps -ef | grep -v grep | grep rarpd

The print server will get the IP address from the RARP daemon when it is powered on.

BOOTP mode

BOOTP is an alternative to RARP. However, unlike RARP, it is able to configure the subnet mask and gateway. In order to use BOOTP to configure the IP address make sure that BOOTP is installed and running on your host computer (it should appear in the /etc/services file on your host as a real service; type man bootpd or refer to your system documentation for information). BOOTP is usually started up via the /etc/inetd.conf file, so you may need to enable it by removing the “#” in front of the bootp entry in that file. For example, a typical bootp entry in the /etc/inetd.conf file would be:

#bootp dgram udp wait /usr/etc/bootpd bootpd -i

NoteDepending on the system, this entry might be called “bootps” instead of “bootp”.

In order to enable BOOTP, simply use an editor to delete the “#” (if there is no “#”, then BOOTP is already enabled). Then edit the BOOTP configuration file (usually /etc/bootptab) and enter the name, network type (1 for Ethernet), Ethernet address and the IP address, subnet mask and gateway of the print server. Unfortunately, the exact format for doing this is not standardized, so you will need to refer to your system documentation to determine how to enter this information (many UNIX® systems also have template examples in the bootptab file that you can use for reference). Some examples of typical /etc/bootptab entries include:

BRN_310107 1 00:80:77:31:01:07 192.189.207.3

and:

BRN_310107:ht=ethernet:ha=008077310107:\ip=192.189.207.3:

Front Panel Setup

3 - 3

3

Certain BOOTP host software implementations will not respond to BOOTP requests if you have not included a download filename in the configuration file; if this is the case, simply create a null file on the host and specify the name of this file and its path in the configuration file.

As with RARP, the print server will load its IP address from the BOOTP server when the printer is powered on.

DHCP mode

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is one of several automated mechanisms for IP address allocation. If you have DHCP server in your network (typically a UNIX®, Windows® 2000/XP network) the print server automatically obtains its IP address from DHCP server and register its name with any RFC 1001 and 1002-compliant dynamic name services.

NoteIf you do not want your print server to be configured using DHCP, BOOTP or RARP, you must set the BOOT METHOD to static, this will prevent the print server from trying to obtain an IP address from any of these systems. To change the BOOT METHOD, use the control panel, Web browser or by using the BRAdmin application.

IP Address

This field displays the current IP address of the machine. If the BOOT Method is set to Static, enter the IP address that you wish to assign to the machine (check with your network manager for the IP address to use). If you have selected a method other than Static, the machine will attempt to determine its IP address using the DHCP, RARP or BOOTP protocols. The default IP address of your machine will probably be incompatible with the IP address numbering scheme of your network. We recommend that you contact your network manager for the correct IP address settings.


2 Select 1 to change. Enter the IP address.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Front Panel Setup

3 - 4

3

Subnet Mask

This field displays the current subnet mask used by the machine. If you are not using DHCP or BOOTP to obtain the subnet mask, enter the desired subnet mask. Check with your network manager for the subnet mask to use.


2 Select 1 to change. Enter the Subnet Mask address.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Gateway

This field displays the current gateway or router address used by the machine. If you are not using DHCP or BOOTP to obtain the gateway or router address, enter the address you wish to assign. If you do not have a gateway or router, leave this field blank. Check with your network manager if you are unsure.


2 Enter the Gateway address.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Node Name

You can register the machine name on the Network. This name is often referred to as a NetBIOS name; and is the name that is registered by the WINS server on your network. We recommend the name BRN_XXXXXX (where XXXXXX is the last six digits of the Ethernet address) (up to 15 characters).


2 Select 1 to change. Enter the Node Name.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Front Panel Setup

3 - 5

3

WINS Config

This selection controls how the machine obtains the IP address of the WINS server.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto or Static.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Auto

Automatically uses a DHCP request to determine the IP addresses for the primary and secondary WINS servers. You must set the BOOT Method to Auto for this feature to work.

Static

Uses a specified IP address for the primary and secondary WINS servers.

WINS Server


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Primary or secondary.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Enter the WINS Server address.

5 Press Menu/Set.

6 Press Stop/Exit.

Primary WINS Server IP Address

This field specifies the IP address of the primary WINS (Windows® Internet Naming Service) server.

Secondary WINS Server IP Address

This field specifies the IP address of the secondary WINS server. It is used as a backup to the Primary WINS server address. If the Primary server is unavailable, the machine still can register itself with a secondary server. If you have a primary WINS server, but no secondary WINS server, simply leave this field blank.

Front Panel Setup

3 - 6

3

DNS Server


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Primary or Secondary.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Enter the DNS Server address.

5 Press Menu/Set.

6 Press Stop/Exit.

Primary DNS Server IP Address

This field specifies the IP address of the primary DNS (Domain Name Service) server.

Secondary DNS Server IP Address

This field specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. It is used as a backup to the Primary DNS server address. If the Primary server is unavailable, the machine will contact the Secondary DNS server.

APIPA

When enabled, the print server will automatically allocate a IP address in the range (169.254.1.0 - 169.254.254.255) when the print server cannot obtain an IP address through the BOOT Method you have set (Menu/Set, 6, 1, 1). Selecting Off means the IP address doesn’t change, when the print server cannot obtain an IP address through the BOOT Method you have set.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select On or Off.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Front Panel Setup

3 - 7

3

Setup Internet

This menu has five selections: Mail Address, SMTP Server, POP3 Server, Mailbox Name and Mailbox Pwd. As this section requires you to enter a lot of text characters, you may find that it is more convenient to use your favorite web browser to configure these settings. (See Web Based Management on page 6-1. For more details about Internet Fax, see Internet FAX on page 7-1.)

Mail Address


2 Select 1 to change. Enter the mail address. Press Menu/Set.

3 Press Stop/Exit.

Entering textYou can access the character you want by repeatedly pressing the appropriate number key.

To switch between upper and lower case, press Shift and 3.

Making corrections:

If you entered a letter incorrectly and want to change it, use or to position the cursor under the character you want to change, and then type over it.

If you want to erase the whole number or whole name, press Stop/Exit when the cursor is under the first digit or letter. The characters above and to the right of the cursor will be deleted.

Key Once Twice Three times Four times

1 @ . / 1

2 A B C 2

3 D E F 3

4 G H I 4

5 J K L 5

6 M N O 6

7 P Q R S

8 T U V 8

9 W X Y Z

▲

▲

Front Panel Setup

3 - 8

3

Repeating letters:

If you need to repeat a character, press move the cursor to the right.

As you enter the E-mail address, it will appear character by character on the LCD panel.

If you specify more than 16 characters, the LCD panel will scroll the name to the left, character by character. You can enter up to 60 characters.

SMTP Server

This field displays the Node Name or IP address of an SMTP mail server (outgoing E-mail Server) on your network.

(Ex, mailhost.spmail.net -or- 192.000.000.001)


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Name or IP Address.

3 Enter the SMTP SERVER Address.

4 Press Menu/Set.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

POP3 Server

1 Press Menu/Set 6, 2, 3.

2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Name or IP Address.

3 Enter the POP3 Server Address.

4 Press Menu/Set.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

POP3 Server address

This field displays the Node Name or IP address of the POP3 server (incoming E-mail server) used by the machine. This address is necessary for the Internet Fax features to function correctly.(Ex, mailhost.spmail.net -or- 192.000.000.001)

▲

Front Panel Setup

3 - 9

3

Mailbox Name


2 Enter the user account name assigned to the machine that will login to the POP3 Server.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Mailbox Pwd


2 Enter the user password assigned to the machine that will login to the POP3 Server. Please note that this password is case sensitive.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Menu/Set again to verify the password.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

Front Panel Setup

3 - 10

3

Setup Mail RX

This menu has five selections Auto Polling, Poll Frequency, Header, Del Error Mail and Notification.

Auto Polling

When set to On the machine automatically checks the POP3 server for new messages. “No Mail” will be displayed if there are no E-mail messages when the POP3 server is polled.



3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Poll Frequency

Sets the interval for checking for new messages on the POP3 server (default is 10Min).


2 Enter the polling frequency.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Header

This selection allows the contents of the mail header to be printed when the received message is printed (Subject+From+To or All or None).


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select All or Subject+From+To or None.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Del Error Mail

When set to On, the machine automatically deletes error mails that the machine can not receive from the POP server.



Front Panel Setup

3 - 11

3

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Notification

The notification feature allows a confirmation of receipt message to be transmitted to the sending station When the I-Fax has been received.

This feature only works on I-Fax machines that support the “MDN” specification.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select On or MDN or Off.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Setup Mail TX

This menu has three selections Sender Subject, Size Limit and Notification.

Sender Subject

This field displays the subject that is attached to the Internet Fax data being sent from the machine to a PC (default is “Internet Fax Job”).


2 Select 1 to change the Sender Subject—OR—2 to exit.

3 Enter the subject information.

4 Press Menu/Set.

5 Press Stop/Exit.

Size Limit

Some E-mail servers do not allow you to send large E-mail documents. (the System Administrator will often place a limit on the maximum E-mail size). With this function enabled, the machine will display Out of Memory when trying to send E-mail documents over 1Mbyte in size. The document will not be sent and an error report will be printed. The document you are sending should be separated into smaller documents that will be accepted by the mail server. (For your information, a 42 page document based on the ITU-T Test Chart#1 test chart is approximately 1Mbyte in size).


Front Panel Setup

3 - 12

3


3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Notification

The notification feature allows a confirmation of receipt message to be transmitted to the sending station When the I-Fax has been received.

This feature only works on I-Fax machines that support the “MDN” specification.



3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Setup Relay

This menu has three selections Rly Broadcast, Relay Domain and Relay Report. For more information on Relay Broadcast, see Relay Broadcasting on page 7-5 of this User’s Guide.

Rly Broadcast

This function allows the machine to receive a document over the Internet, and then relay it to other fax machines through conventional analog landlines



3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Front Panel Setup

3 - 13

3

Relay Domain

You can register the Domain Names (Max.10) that are allowed to request a Relay Broadcast.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Relay Domain (01 - 10).

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Enter the Relay Domain name for the Domain that is being allowed to request a Relay Broadcast.

5 Press Menu/Set.

6 Press Stop/Exit.

Relay Report

A Relay Broadcast Report can be printed at the machine that will act as a Relay Station for all Relay Broadcasts. When the machine is used with the Network PC Fax software the machine is also acting as a Relay Station for fax transmissions from the network. This means that a Relay Report can also be printed for confirmation of sent network faxes. (For US / Canada only)

Its primary function is to print reports of any relayed broadcasts that have been sent through the machine. Please note: in order to use this function, you must assign the relay domain in the "Trusted Domains" section of the Relay function settings.



3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Front Panel Setup

3 - 14

3

Setup Misc.

Ethernet

Ethernet link mode. Auto allows the print server to operate in 100BaseTX full or half duplex, or in 10BaseT full or half duplex mode.

100BaseTX Full Duplex (100B-FD) or Half Duplex (100B-HD) and 10BaseT Full Duplex (10B-FD) or Half Duplex (10B-HD) fix the print server link mode. This change is valid after the print server has been reset (default is Auto).

NoteIf you incorrectly set this value, you may not be able to communicate with your print server.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto/100B-FD/100B-HD/10B-FD/10B-HD.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Time Zone

This field displays your country time zone. The time shown is the time difference between your country and Greenwich Mean Time. For example, the Time Zone for Eastern Time in the USA and Canada is GMT-05:00.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select the time.

3 Press Menu/Set to accept the selection.

4 Press Stop/Exit to exit the configuration menu.

Windows® Time Zone Setting

You can see the time difference for your country by using the Time Zone setting in Windows®.

1 Click on Start.

2 Select Settings / Control Panel.

3 Double click on Date/Time.

4 Select Time Zone. Change the date and time. Verify your time zone setting from the pull-down menu (this menu displays the time difference from GMT).

Front Panel Setup

3 - 15

3

Scan to E-mail (E-mail server)

Black and White File Type for Scan to E-mail (E-mail server)

You can select the default Black and White file type for the Scan to E-mail (E-mail server) function.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select PDF or TIFF.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Color File Type for Scan to E-mail (E-mail server)

You can select the default color file type for the Scan to E-mail (E-mail server) function.


2 Press ▲ or ▼ to select PDF or JPEG.

3 Press Menu/Set.

4 Press Stop/Exit.

Restoring the network settings to factory default

If you wish to reset the print server back to its default factory settings (resetting all information such as the password and IP address information), please follow these steps:

1 Make sure the machine is not operating, then disconnect all the cables from the machine (except power cable).


3 Press 1 to select Reset.


5 The machine will re-start, re-connect cables once this is complete.

Front Panel Setup

3 - 16

3

Printing the Network Configuration List

NoteNode Name: Node Name appears in the Network Configuration List. The default Node Name is "BRN_xxxxxx" ("xxxxxx" is the last six digits of Ethernet address.).

The Network Configuration List prints a report listing all the current network configuration including the network print server settings.



4

4 - 1

4 Network printing from Windows®

basic TCP/IP Peer-to-Peer printing

Overview

If you are a Windows® user and want to print using the TCP/IP protocol in a Peer-to-Peer environment, please follow the instructions in this chapter. This chapter explains how to install the network software and the printer driver which you will need to be able to print using your network printer.

Note• You must configure the IP address on your machine before you proceed with this chapter. If you have

not configured the IP address, see Configuring your network printer on page 2-1 first.

• Verify the host computer and print server are either on the same subnet, or that the router is properly configured to pass data between the two devices.

• The default password for print servers is “access”.

• If you are connecting to a Nework Print Queue or Share (printing only), see Installation when using a Network Print Queue or Share (printer driver only) on page A-6 for installation details.

For Windows® 2000/XP users

By default, Windows® 2000/XP systems install with all the necessary software required for you to be able to print. This section describes the most commonly used configuration, Standard TCP/IP Port printing. Windows® 2000/XP users can also print via Internet using the IPP protocol. For more information, see Internet printing on page 5-1.

If you have already installed the printer driver, jump to Printer driver already installed on page 4-3.

4 - 2

4

Configuring the standard TCP/IP port

Printer driver not yet installed

1 For Windows® 2000: Go to the Start button, select Settings and then Printers.For Windows® XP: Go to the Start button and select Printers and Faxes.

2 For Windows® 2000: Double click the Add Printer icon to get the Add Printer Wizard.For Windows® XP: Double-click Add a printer to get the Add Printer Wizard.

3 Click Next when you see the Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen.

4 Select Local printer and deselect the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printeroption.

5 Click Next.

6 You must now select the correct Network printing port. Select Create a new port and select Standard TCP/IP Port port from the pull-down window.

7 Click Next.

8 The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard will now appear. Click Next.

9 Enter the IP address, or the print server name you wish to configure. The Wizard will automatically enter the Port name information for you.

10 Click Next.

11 Windows® 2000/XP will now contact the printer that you specified. If you did not specify the correct IP address or name then you will receive an error message.

12 Click Finish to complete the Wizard.

13 Now that you have configured the port, you must specify which printer driver you wish to use. Select the appropriate driver from the list of supported printers. If you are using a driver supplied with the machine on CD-ROM then select the Have Disk option to browse to the CD-ROM.

14 For example, select the “X:\your language\W2K\Addprt” folder (where X is your drive letter). Click Open,and then OK. Select your printer, then click Next.

15 Specify a name and select Yes or No if you want this driver to be default printer, and then click Next.

16 Now specify if you wish to share the printer, enter the share name and click Next.

17 Select Yes and Next to print a test page.

18 Continue through the Wizard clicking Finish when complete.

4 - 3

4

Printer driver already installed

If you have already installed the printer driver and wish to configure it for network printing, follow these steps:

1 Select the printer driver you wish to configure.

2 Select File and then Properties.

3 Click the Ports tab of the driver and click Add Port.

4 Select the port that you wish to use. Typically this would be Standard TCP/IP Port. Then click the New Port... button.

5 The Standard TCP/IP Port Wizard will start. Follow steps 8 to 12 of Printer driver not yet installed on page 4-2.

6 Close Add Port and Properties dialog box.

For Windows NT® 4.0 users

Windows NT® 4.0 users can send print job using Peer-to-Peer Print software provided on the CD-ROM supplied with the machine.

Installing the TCP/IP protocol

If you did not install the TCP/IP protocol during the installation of your Windows NT® 4.0 system (either workstation or server) follow these steps. If you have already installed the TCP/IP protocol, proceed to the next section, Installing the Peer-to-Peer software on page 4-4.

1 Go to the Start button, select Settings, and then Control Panel.

2 Run the Network applet by double clicking the Network icon and then click the Protocols tab.

3 Select Add, and double click TCP/IP Protocol.

4 Insert the requested disk(s), or CD-ROM, to copy the required files.

5 Click Close. The Windows NT® 4.0 system will review protocol bindings and then you will see the TCP/IP Properties dialog.

6 Configure the host IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address in that dialog. Consult your system manager for these addresses.

7 Click OK to exit (your Windows NT® 4.0 workstation or server will need to be re-booted).

4 - 4

4

Installing the Peer-to-Peer software

1 Start the CD-ROM installation menu program according to the Quick Setup Guide.

2 Select the model name and your language (if necessary), and then click Install Optional Applications.

3 Click Network Print Software.

4 Click Next in response to the Welcome message. Follow the on-screen instructions.

5 Select Peer-to-Peer Print (LPR).

6 Select the desired directory to install the Peer-to-Peer Print (LPR) files and click Next. The installation program will create the directory for you if it does not already exist on your disk.

7 Enter the Port name that you wish to use and click OK. The default port name is BLP1. Whichever name you choose, it must be unique and it MUST begin with BLP.

8 You must now enter the actual IP address of the print server and the print server name. If you have edited the hosts file on your computer or are using Domain Name System, you can also enter the DNS name of the print server. As the print server supports TCP/IP and NetBIOS names, you can also enter the NetBIOS name of the print server. The NetBIOS name can be seen in the Network Configuration List. The NetBIOS name assigned is the first 15 characters of the node name and by default it will appear as BRN_xxxxxx where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the Ethernet address.

Note• The node name and the NetBIOS name is printed on the Network Configuration List. To learn how to

print the Network Configuration List, see Printing the Network Configuration List on page 3-16.• You can use the Browse button to search for the print server in Step 8. Click Browse and then select

the Node Name/IP Address from the list. If you search for the device using the Browse button in Step 8, temporarily disable any Personal Firewall software you may be using. Once you are sure that you can print, re-start your Personal Firewall software.

9 Click OK. When prompted you must re-boot your computer.

4 - 5

4

Associating to the printer

You must now create a printer on your Windows® system using the standard Windows® printer setup procedure.

1 To do this, go to the Start button, select Settings and then Printers.

2 Double click the Add Printer icon to get the Add Printer Wizard.

3 Select My Computer (not Network Printer) and click Next.

4 Select the LPR Port (the port name you assigned in step 7 of the “Installing Peer-to-Peer Software” section in this chapter) and click Next.

5 Select the desired printer model. If the correct model is not displayed, click the Have Disk option and insert the CD-ROM supplied with your machine.

6 If the driver already exists, select Keep Existing Driver (if it does not exist, this step will be skipped), and then click Next.

7 If desired, change the name of the printer and select Yes or No if you want this driver to be default printer, and then click Next.

8 If desired, make the printer shared (so other user can access it), and select the operating system(s) that these other computers will be running. Click Next.

9 Select Yes when you asked Would you like to print a test page?. Click Finish to complete the installation. You may now print to the printer as if it were a local printer.

4 - 6

4

Adding a second LPR port

You do not need to re-run the install program to add a new LPR port. Instead, go to the Start button, select Settings, and open the Printers window. Click the icon of the printer that you wish to configure, select Filefrom the menu bar, and then Properties. Click the Ports tab and then the Add Port button. In the Printer Ports dialog, highlight LPR Port. Click the New Port button and enter the port name. The default port name is BLP1. If you have already used this name, you will get an error message if you try to use it again, in which case use BLP2, etc... Once you have specified the port name, click OK. You will then see the Port Settingsdialog.

Enter the IP address of the printer that you wish to print to and click OK. And then click Close in the Printer Ports dialog. You should now see the port that you have just created in the Print to the following port(s)setting of the printer driver.

For Windows® 98/Me users

Windows® 98/Me users can send print job using Peer-to-Peer Print software provided on the CD-ROM which we have supplied with the machine.

Installing the Peer-to-Peer software

NoteIf you already installed the driver from the supplied CD-ROM with the machine Installer and you selected “Peer-to-Peer Network Printer” during the installation then you do not need to install the Network Print Software again.



3 Click Network Print Software.


5 Select Peer-to-Peer Print (LPR).

6 Select the desired directory to install the Peer-to-Peer Print (LPR) files and click Next. The installation program will create the directory for you if it does not already exist on your disk.

7 Enter the Port name that you wish to use and click OK. The default port name is BLP1. Whichever name you choose, it must be unique and it MUST begin with BLP.

4 - 7

4

8 You must now enter the actual IP address of the print server and the print server name. If you have edited the hosts file on your computer or are using Domain Name System, you can also enter the DNS name of the print server. As the print server supports TCP/IP and NetBIOS names, you can also enter the NetBIOS name of the print server. The NetBIOS name can be seen in the Network Configuration List. The NetBIOS name assigned is the first 15 characters of the node name and by default it will appear as BRN_xxxxxx where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the Ethernet address.

Note• The node name and the NetBIOS name is printed on the Network Configuration List. To learn how to

print the Network Configuration List, see Printing the Network Configuration List on page 3-16.

• You can use the Browse button to search for the print server in Step 8. Click Browse and then select the Node Name/IP Address from the list. If you search for the device using the Browse button in Step 8, temporarily disable any Personal Firewall software you may be using. Once you are sure that you can print, re-start your Personal Firewall software.

9 Click OK. When prompted you must re-boot your computer.

Associating to the printer

You must now create a printer on your Windows® system using the standard Windows® printer setup procedure.

1 To do this, go the Start button, select Settings and then Printers.

2 Double click the Add Printer icon to get the Add Printer Wizard.

3 Click Next when you get the Add Printer Wizard window.

4 Select Local Printer when you are asked how the printers are connected to your computer, and then click Next.

5 Select the desired printer model. If the correct model is not displayed, click the Have Disk option and insert the CD-ROM supplied with your machine.

6 If you have selected a printer driver that is already being used, you have the option of either keeping the existing driver (recommended) or replacing it. Select the desired option and click Next.

7 Select the LPR port (the port name you assigned in step 7 of the Installing the Peer-to-Peer software on page 4-6) and click Next.

8 Enter any desired name for the printer. For example, you could call the printer “Networked Printer”. Select Yes or No if you want this driver to be default printer, and then click Next.

9 Windows® will now ask you if you wish to print out a test page, select Yes and then select Finish. You have now finished installing the Peer-to-Peer Print (LPR) software.

4 - 8

4

Adding a second LPR port

You do not re-run the install program to add a new LPR port. Instead, go to the Start button, select Settings,and open the Printers window. Click the icon of the printer that you wish to configure, select File from the menu bar, and then Properties. Click the Details tab and then the Add Port button. In the Add Port dialog, select the Other radio button and then highlight LPR port. Click OK and enter the port name. The default port name is BLP1. If you have already used this name, you will get an error message if you try to use it again, in which case use BLP2, etc... Once you have specified the port name, click OK. You will then see the Port Properties dialog.

Enter the IP address of the printer that you wish to print to and click OK. You should now see the port that you have just created in the Print to the following port setting of the printer driver.

Other sources of information

See Configuring your network printer on page 2-1 to learn how to configure the IP address of the printer.

5

5 - 1

5 Internet printing

Internet Printing Installation

Overview

Internet Print (BIP) software, for Windows® 98/Me and Windows NT® 4.0, allows a PC user at one location to send a print job to a printer at a remote location via the Internet. For example, a user on a PC in New York could print a document directly from their Microsoft Excel application program to a printer in Paris.

Windows® 2000/XP users can also use this BIP software, but are recommended to use the IPP protocol support that is part of the Windows® 2000/XP operating systems. Skip to the “Windows® 2000 IPP Printing” section of this document.

Quick Tips

1 Windows® 2000/XP users can print using TCP/IP using the standard Network Printing software and IPP protocol software built into any Windows® 2000/XP installation.

2 Windows® 98/Me users can send print jobs using the IPP protocol via a Windows® 2000 computer, provided that the Microsoft Internet Print Services software is installed on the client PC, Internet Information Server (IIS) is installed and running on the server and that the client PC is using version 4 or later of Microsoft Internet Explorer.

Internet Print General Information

The BIP software is installed using a standard Windows® 98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0 Installation Wizard. It creates a virtual port on the Windows® 98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0 PC that operates in a similar way to the standard LPT1 printer port from the application program point of view. The user can use the Windows® 98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0 Print Manager to create a printer that uses this port along with a standard Windows® 98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0-compatible printer. Any Windows®

98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0 applications program can therefore print to this printer (and hence to the virtual port) without modification or operational procedure.

When a job is printed to the BIP virtual port, it is actually MIME-encoded (converted to a standard Internet E-mail message) and sent out to a print server at the remote location. This means that BIP is compatible with most common E-mail software packages. The only requirement is that the E-mail server be capable of sending E-mail message over the Internet.

In more detail, the procedure works in the following way:

■ If you are connected to a Local Area Network, the E-mail message is passed to the E-mail server, which in turn transmits the message out over the Internet using the SMTP protocol (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) to the remote print server.

Internet printing

5 - 2

5

■ If you are connecting via a modem directly to an Internet Service Provider (ISP), the ISP handles the routing of the E-mail to the remote print server.

■ At the remote site, an E-mail server receives the E-mail message. The remote Print/Fax server, which has its own E-mail address, uses the POP3 protocol (Post Office Protocol 3) to download the E-mail message from the E-mail server. It then decodes the attachment and prints it out on the printer.

NoteIf an E-mail is received that has not been configured to use the BIP virtual port driver, the printer will print the E-mail out as a text document.

Internet Print: Configuring the Print Server

The print server can be configured using BRAdmin Professional utility, the Web BRAdmin software or by using a web browser.

Print Server Configuration Checklist

NoteBefore configuring the print server to receive BIP jobs, be sure that the E-mail server at the remote site (the receiving end) is configured to handle the TCP/IP POP3, and SMTP protocols (SMTP is only required if the notification feature is enabled).

1 Configure the POP3 server on the E-mail server at the remote site with a mail account (Mailbox name) and password for the print server (generally, the mail account name will be the first part of the Email address; for example, if you assign the E-mail address [email protected], then the mail account name would be emailprinter).

2 Make sure that the print server is installed and running with TCP/IP enabled and has a valid IP address assigned to it.

Because access to the E-mail server on most networks is usually restricted, you may need to have your Network Administrator check the configuration and add the mail account.

Internet printing

5 - 3

5

Internet Print: Using the BRAdmin Professional utility to Configure the Print Server

NoteSkip this section if you wish to use the Web Browser to configure the print server.

Using the BRAdmin Professional utility, you can configure the print server using the TCP/IP protocol.

The steps required to configure the print server to receive print jobs from a Windows® 98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0 PC running the BIP software are as follows.

1 Start the BRAdmin Professional utility.

2 Select the Node Name of the desired print server from the list and double click on it. (the default node name is usually BRN_xxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the Ethernet address (MAC address)). You will be prompted for a password; the default password is “access”.

NoteYou can find the node name and MAC address by printing out the machine configuration page. For information on how to print the configuration page on your print server, see Printing the Network Configuration List on page 3-16.

3 Click on the POP3/SMTP tab.

4 Enter the address of the POP3 server (consult your Network Administrator if you do not know this address).

5 Enter the POP3 Account Name for the remote print server. Usually this will be the first part of the E-mail address (for example, if the E-mail address of the print server is [email protected], then the POP3 Account Name would be emailprinter).

6 Enter the password for the mailbox, if any.

7 The print server is configured by default to poll the POP3 server every 10 minutes. You may change this value, if desired.

8 If you have enabled notification, enter the address of your SMTP server (consult your Network Administrator if you do not know this address).

9 Press the OK button and save the changes. Now exit the BRAdmin Professional utility. You have now configured the print server to receive print jobs.

Internet printing

5 - 4

5

Internet Print: Using a Web Browser to Configure the Print Server

1 Connect to the printer server IP address using your web browser.

2 When you reach the Network Configuration screen, you will be prompted for a User name and a password. The default settings are User name “admin” and the password “access”.

3 Select the Configure POP3/SMTP option. Enter the address of the POP3 server (consult your Network Administrator if you do not know this address). For more information, see Internet Print: Using the BRAdmin Professional utility to Configure the Print Server on page 5-3.

4 You should see a Segmented Message Timeout option. If a print job is separated into multiple E-mail messages using the Partial E-mail Print feature of the BIP, this value indicates how long the print server will wait for all of the segments of the message to arrive.

5 Select Submit to save the changes. Exit from the web browser. You have now configured the print server to receive print jobs.

Internet Print: Installing the BIP software on Windows® 98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0

To install the BIP software on a Windows® 98/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0 PC, execute the following steps:

NoteBe sure that the PC is running an E-mail program (for example, Microsoft Outlook) that is capable of sending E-mail message using Winsock.

Be sure that your E-mail server is capable of sending messages across the Internet.

Setup from CD-ROM


2 Select the proper model and Install Optional Applications menu. Then select Network Print Softwareinstallation program.

3 Click the Next button in response to the Welcome message.

4 Select the Internet Print button.

5 Select the desired directory to install the BIP files and then click Next. The installation program will create the directory for you if it does not already exist.

Internet printing

5 - 5

5

6 You will then be asked for a port name. Enter the name of the port. The port name must begin with the BIP and end with a number, for example, BIP1.

7 Press OK to continue.

8 You will then be asked to enter the port settings for the remote print server:

Enter any unique legal Internet E-mail address for the remote print server (for example [email protected]). Note that Internet E-mail addresses cannot have spaces in them.

Enter your E-mail address and the IP address of your SMTP E-mail server (consult your Network Administrator if you do not know this address). Also specify if you are going to use the Partial E-mail Print option and the Notification type.

9 Press OK to continue. You will then be asked to re-start your computer.

10 Once your computer has re-started you must create a printer on your Windows® 98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0 system using the standard Windows® 98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0 printer setup procedure. To do this, go the Start button, select Settings and then Printers (Windows®

98/Me/2000 and Windows NT® 4.0). For Windows® XP users, go to the Start button, select Printers and Faxes.

11 Select Add Printer (or Add a Printer for Windows® XP) to begin the printer installation.

12 Click Next when you get the Add Printer Wizard window.

<For Windows® 98/Me users>

13 Select Local Printer when you are asked how the printers are connected to your computer and click Next.

<For Windows NT® 4.0 users>

13 Select My Computer, and then Click Next.

<For Windows® 2000/XP users>

13 Select Local Printer, and delete the check mark in Plug and Play check box. Then click Next.

<For Windows® 98/Me users>

14 Select the desired model of the remote printer. If necessary, click Have Disk to load the driver from the CD-ROM. Click Next when you are done.

15 If you have selected a printer driver that is already being used, you have the option of either keeping the existing driver (recommended) or replacing it. Select the desired option and press Next.

16 Select the Internet port (BIP...) which you selected in step 6 and press Next.

Internet printing

5 - 6

5

<For Windows NT® 4.0 and Windows® 2000/XP users>

14 Select the Internet port (BIP...) which you selected in step 6 and press Next.

15 Select the desired model of the remote printer. If necessary, click Have Disk to load the driver from the CD-ROM. Click Next when you are done.

16 If you have selected a printer driver that is already being used, you have the option of either keeping the existing driver (recommended) or replacing it. Select the desired option and press Next.

17 Enter any desired name for the BIP remote printer and press Next. Note that this name does not need to match the port name that you assigned in step 6, or E-mail address that you assigned in step 9.

18 Select No when asked if you want to print a test page, unless you have already configured the remote print server to receive BIP print jobs.

You have now finished installing the BIP software. If you need to configure another remote print server, go to the next section, “Adding a Second Internet Port”.

Adding a Second Internet Port

You should not re-run the install program to add a new Internet Port. Instead, press the Start button, select Settings, and open the Printers window. Click on the icon of a printer that is using BIP, select File from the menu bar, and then choose Properties. Click on the Details (Ports on Windows® 2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0) tab and click the Add Port button.

In the Add Port dialog, select the Other radio button (Windows® 98/Me only) and then Internet Port. Click OK (New Port on Windows® 2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0) and it will give you the Port Name text box. Any unique name can be given here as long as it starts with “BIP” and another port does not already exist with the same name.

Internet printing

5 - 7

5

Windows® 2000/XP IPP printing

Use the following instructions if you wish to use the IPP printing capabilities of Windows® 2000/XP.

Note• You must configure the IP address on your machine before you proceed with this section. If you have

not configured the IP address, see Configuring your network printer on page 2-1 first.

• Verify the host computer and print server are either on the same subnet, or that the router is properly configured to pass data between the two devices.

• The default password for print servers is "access".

1 For Windows® 2000: Go to the Start button, select Settings and then Printers.For Windows® XP: Go to the Start button and select Printers and Faxes.

2 For Windows® 2000: Double click the Add Printer icon to get the Add Printer Wizard.For Windows® XP: Double-click Add a printer to get the Add Printer Wizard.

3 Click Next when you see the Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen.

4 Select Local printer or Network printer. For Windows® 2000: Make sure that you select Network Printer.For Windows® XP: Make sure that you select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer.

5 Click Next.

6 For Windows® 2000: Select Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intranet and then enter the following in the URL field: http://printer_ipaddress:631/ipp (Where printer_ipaddress is the IP address or the print server name).

For Windows® XP: Select Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home or office network and then enter the following in the URL field: http://printer_ipaddress:631/ipp (Where printer_ipaddress is the IP address or the print server name).

Internet printing

5 - 8

5

NoteIf you have edited the hosts file on your computer or are using Domain Name System, you can also enter the DNS name of the print server. As the print server supports TCP/IP and NetBIOS names, you can also enter the NetBIOS name of the print server. The NetBIOS name can be seen in the Network Configuration List. The NetBIOS name assigned is the first 15 characters of the node name and by default it will appear as BRN_xxxxxx where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the Ethernet address.

7 When you click Next, Windows® 2000/XP will make a connection with the URL that you specified.

If the printer driver has already been installed:

If the appropriate printer driver is already installed on your PC, Windows® 2000/XP will automatically use that driver for use. In this case, you will simply be asked if you wish to make the driver the default driver, after which the Driver installation Wizard will complete. You are now ready to print.

If the printer driver has NOT been installed:

One of the benefits of the IPP printing protocol is that it establishes the model name of the printer when you communicate with it. After successful communication you will see the model name of the printer automatically. This means that you do not need to inform Windows® 2000 the type of printer driver to be used.

8 Click OK. You will then see the printer selection screen in the Add Printer Wizard.

9 If your printer is not in the list of supported printers, click Have Disk. You will then be asked to insert the driver disk.

10 Click Browse and select the CD-ROM or network share that contains the appropriate printer driver.

11 Now specify the model name of the printer.

12 If the printer driver that you are installing does not have a Digital Certificate you will see a warning message. Click Yes to continue with the installation. The Add Printer Wizard will then complete.

13 Click the Finish button and the printer is now configured and ready to print. To test the printer connection, print a test page.

Internet printing

5 - 9

5

Specifying a different URL

Please note that there are several possible entries that you can enter for the URL field.

http://ipaddress:631/ipp

This is the default URL and we recommend that you use this URL. Please note the Get More Info option will not display any printer data.

http://ipaddress:631/ipp/port1

This is for HP® Jetdirect® compatibility. Please note the Get More Info option will not display any printer data.

http://ipaddress:631/

If you forget the URL details, you can simply enter the above text and the printer will still receive and process data. please note the Get More Info option will not display any printer data.

If you are using the built in service names that the print server supports, you can also use the following: (However, please note the Get More Info option will not display any printer data).

http://ipaddress:631/brn_xxxxxx_p1

http://ipaddress:631/binary_p1

http://ipaddress:631/text_p1

http://ipaddress:631/filter1_p1

http:/ipaddress:631/filter2_p1

http://ipaddress:631/brn_xxxxxx_p1_at

Where ipaddress is the IP address or the print server name.

Other sources of information

See Configuring your network printer on page 2-1 to learn how to configure the IP address of the printer.

6

6 - 1

6 Web Based Management

How to use a Web Browser to manage your Device

Overview

A standard Web Browser (we recommend Microsoft Internet Explorer® version 6.0 or later, or Netscape Navigator® version 7.1 or later) can be used to manage your machine using the HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol). You can get the following information from a printer on your network using a web browser:

■ Printer status information.

■ Change Fax configuration items, such as General Setup. Quick-Dial settings and Remote Fax.

■ You can also change network settings such as TCP/IP information.■ Software version information of the machine and print server.

■ Change network and machine configuration details.

You must use the TCP/IP protocol on your network and have a valid IP address programmed into the print server and your computer.

1 To learn how to configure the IP address on your machine, see Configuring your network printer on page 2-1.

2 The default password for print servers is “access”.

3 You can use a web browser on most computing platforms, for example, UNIX® users are also able to connect to the machine and manage it.

4 You can also use the BRAdmin Professional or the BRAdmin Light utilities to manage the printer and its network configuration.

How to connect to your machine using a Browser

Type http://printer’s IP Address / into your browser (you can also use the NetBIOS name of the print server, if you are in a Microsoft Windows domain/Workgroup environment). Enter the DNS name of the machine if connecting to a network that uses the DNS protocol.

Password Information

Web Based Management offers two levels of password access. Users are able to access to the General Setup, Fax settings and Lists and Reports. The default user name for Users is “user” (case sensitive) and the default password is “access”.

Administrators are able to access all settings. The login name for the Administrator is “admin” (case sensitive) and the default password is “access”.

7

7 - 1

7 Internet FAX

Overview

Internet Faxing (I-Fax) allows you to send and receive FAX documents using the Internet as the transport mechanism. Documents are transmitted in E-mail messages as attached TIFF-F files. This means that PC's are also able to receive and send documents, providing that the PC has as an application that can generate and view TIFF-F files, you can use Microsoft® Imaging or a TIFF-F viewer application. Any documents sent via the machine will automatically be converted into a TIFF-F format. If you wish to send and receive messages to and from your machine, your mail application on the PC must be able to support the MIME format.

Getting Connected

Before sending or receiving an Internet Fax you must configure your machine to communicate with your network and mail server. You must ensure the following: a correctly configured IP address for your machine, an E-mail address for your machine, the mail server(s) IP address, mailbox name and password for your machine. If you are unsure of any of these items, please contact your systems Administrator. For details of how to configure this information, see Web Based Management on page 6-1.

E-mail

Internet

E-mail

InternetFax

RelayE-mail

Internet

RelayFax (G3 TX)

Internet FAX

7 - 2

7

Front Panel Key Functions

Shift + 1Used to change input mode. You can use Dial Pad keys as Standard alphabet character keys.

Dial PadUsed to enter Standard Alpha characters (28 letters), as well as @. space ! “ # % & ’ () + / : ; < > = ? [ ] ^ - $ , * _ and Numbers.

Shift + 3To change between upper case and lower case when entering the e-mail / I-Fax address.

or Moves the LCD cursor to the left or right when you enter text.

Menu/SetUsed to store multiple numbers.

Black Start

Begins transmitting the document.

Stop/ExitDeletes entered data and stops the scanning or transmitting process.

Search / Speed-DialThese functions work the same way as with conventional machine’s.

However, please note that you cannot use chain dialling for E-mail addresses.

Shift + Black StartUsed to receive E-mail from the POP3 server manually.

Sending an Internet Fax

Sending an Internet Fax is the same as sending a normal Fax. If you have already programmed the addresses of the destination Internet Fax machines as Speed-Dial locations, you can send the Internet Fax by loading the document into the machine, use the Fax Resolution key to set the preferred resolution and select a Speed-Dial number and pressing Black Start.

If you wish to manually enter the Internet Fax Address load the document into the machine and press Shiftand 1 simultaneously to change into the “alphabet” dialling mode.

To manually enter the Internet Fax address, see Manually Entering Text on page 7-3.

▲

▲

Internet FAX

7 - 3

7

Manually Entering Text

Press Shift and 1 simultaneously to change into the “alphabet” dialling mode.

You can now use the Dial Pad to dial the E-mail address. Refer to the following table: Most number keys have three or four letters printed above them. The keys for 0, #, * don’t have printed letters because they are used for special characters.

By pressing the appropriate number key the correct number of times, you can access the character you want.

If you want to enter a blank space, press twice.

If you specify more than 16 characters, the LCD panel will scroll the name to the left character by character. You can enter up to 60 characters.

Making corrections:

If you entered a letter incorrectly and want to change it, use or to position the cursor under the character you want to change, and then type over it.

If you want to erase the whole number or whole name, press Stop/Exit when the cursor is under the first digit or letter. The characters above and to the right of the cursor will be deleted.

Repeating letters:

If you need to enter a character assigned to the same key as the previous character, press move the cursor to the right.

As you enter the E-mail address, it will appear character by character on the LCD panel.

If you specify more than 16 characters, the LCD panel will scroll the name to the left, character by character. You can enter up to 60 characters.

Please note that also you can connect to the machine using a web browser and specify the E-mail address information through Web Based Management. See Web Based Management on page 6-1 for more information.

Key Once Twice Three times Four times

1 @ . / 1

2 A B C 2

3 D E F 3

4 G H I 4

5 J K L 5

6 M N O 6

7 P Q R S

8 T U V 8

9 W X Y Z▲

▲

▲

▲

Internet FAX

7 - 4

7

Special characters and symbols

As you enter the Internet Fax address, the address will appear character by character on the LCD panel. If you specify more than 16 characters, the LCD panel will scroll the name to the left character by character. You can enter up to 60 characters.

1 Press Black Start to send the document.

After the document is scanned, it is transmitted to the Recipient Internet Fax Machine automatically via your SMTP server. You can cancel the send operation by pressing the Stop/Exit button during scanning. After the transmission is finished, the machine will return to standby mode.

Some E-mail servers do not allow you to send large E-mail documents (the System Administrator will often place a limit on the maximum E-mail size). You can enable the Limit Size of the Sent Mail feature. The machine will display Out of Memory when trying to send E-mail documents over 1Mbyte in size. The document will not be sent and an error report will be printed. The document you are sending should be separated into smaller documents that will be accepted by the mail server. You can enable this feature through the Web Management utility or the LAN function mode.

Receiving E-mail or Internet Fax

There are 2 ways you can receive E-mail messages:

■ POP3 receiving at regular intervals

■ POP3 receiving (manually initiated)

Using POP3 receiving the machine must poll the E-mail server to receive the print jobs. This polling can occur at set intervals (for example, you can configure the machine to poll the E-mail server at 10 minute intervals) or you can manually poll the server by pressing the Shift + Black Start button.

If your machine starts to receive E-mail print jobs, the LCD panel will reflect this activity. For example, you will see Receiving on the LCD panel followed by “xx E-mail(S)”. If you press the Shift + Black Start buttons to manually poll the E-mail server for E-mail print jobs and there are no mail documents waiting to be printed, the machine will display No Mail on the LCD panel for two seconds.

If your machine is out of paper when receiving data, the received data will be held in the machine's memory. This data will be printed automatically after paper is re-inserted into the machine. (For European, Asian and Oceanian machines, Memory receive must be switched “ON”.)

If the received mail is not in a plain text format or an attached file is not in the TIFF-F format, the following error message will be printed: ATTACHED FILE FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED. FILE NAME:XXXXXX.docIf the received mail is too large, the following error message will be printed: E-MAIL FILE TOO LARGE. If Delete POP Receive Error Mail is ON (default) then error mail is automatically deleted from the E-mail Server.

Press * for (space) ! “ # $ % & ’ () * + , - . /

Press # for : ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^ _

Press Ø for É À È Ê Î Ç Ë Ö 0 (For US and Canada users)

Ä Ë Ö Ü À Ç È E 0 (For other users)

Internet FAX

7 - 5

7

Receiving an Internet Fax to a PC

When a PC receives an Internet Fax document, the document is attached to a mail message that informs the PC that it has received a document from an Internet Fax. This is notified in the Subject field of the received mail message.

If the PC to which you wish to send a document is not running Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP or Windows NT® 4.0 operating system, please inform the PC's owner that they must install some software that can view TIFF-F files.

You can use “Microsoft® Imaging” that is supplied with Windows® 98/Me/2000/XP and Windows NT® 4.0.

Forwarding Received E-mail and Fax Messages

You can forward received E-mail or standard fax messages to another E-mail address or fax machine. Received messages can be forwarded via E-mail to a PC or Internet Fax. They can also be forwarded via standard phone lines to another machine.

The setting can be enabled using the Web browsers or through the machine front panel. The steps for configuring Fax Forward can be found in the User’s Guide supplied with your machine.

Please see the User’s Guide included with the machine to check that this feature is supported. This function is not available for color fax documents.

Relay Broadcasting

This function allows the machine to receive a document over the Internet, and then relay it to other fax machines through conventional telephone lines.

If you wish to use your machine as a relay broadcast device, you must specify the domain name that you trust at the machine, in other words, the portion of the domain after the ‘@’ sign.

A trusted domain refers to the E-mail address. For example, if the other party’s address is [email protected], then we identify the domain as xxx.com. If the E-mail address is [email protected], then we identify the domain as xxx.co.uk.

Use care in selecting a trusted domain since any user on a trusted domain will be able to send a Relay Broadcast. You can register up to 10 domain names.

Relay Broadcast can support the relay of a document up to a maximum of 48 fax machines through conventional telephone lines.

Internet FAX

7 - 6

7

Relay Broadcast from a machine

In this example, your machine has an E-mail address of [email protected], you wish to send a document from this machine to another machine in England with an E-mail address of [email protected], this machine will then forward the document to a standard fax machine using a conventional telephone line. If your E-mail address is [email protected], you must configure a trusted domain name of xxx.com on the machine in England that will broadcast the document to the conventional fax machine. If you do not enter the domain name information, then the machine in the middle (the machine that will broadcast the document) will not trust any internet jobs that it receives from the machine in the @xxx.com domain.

After the trusted domain is set you can send the document from your machine [I.E. [email protected]] by entering the E-mail address of the machine [I.E. [email protected]] that will forward the document followed by the phone number of the fax that will receive the document. The following is an example of how to enter the E-mail address and phone number.

Sending to multiple phone numbers:

If you want to have the document relayed to more than one standard fax machine the address can be entered using the following method:

1 Enter the phone number of the first Fax machine [email protected](Fax#123).

2 Press Menu/Set.

3 Enter the phone number of the second Fax machine [email protected](Fax#456).


[email protected] [email protected] 123456789

[email protected] (fax#123456789)

INTERNET

[email protected](fax#123456789)

E-mail address Fax Phone Number

The word “fax#” must be included with the phone number inside the parenthesis.

Internet FAX

7 - 7

7

Relay Broadcast from a PC

You can also send E-mail from your PC and have it relayed to a conventional FAX machine. The method of entering the phone number of the conventional FAX machine that will receive the relayed E-mail will vary depending on the mail application you are using. The following are some examples of different mail applications:

Some E-mail applications do not support sending to multiple phone numbers. If your E-mail application cannot support multiple phone numbers you will only be able to relay to one Fax machine at a time.

Enter the address of the relay machine and phone number of the FAX in the “TO” box using the same method used when sending from an machine.

[email protected](fax#123456789)

Outlook 97/98/2000/2002/2003:

For Outlook 97/98/2000/2002 and 2003 the address information must be entered into the address book as follows:Name: fax#123456789E-mail Address: [email protected]

TX Verification Mail

Transmission Verification Mail supports two separate functions. Verification Mail for sending allows you request notification from the receiving station that the I-Fax or E-mail was received and processed. Verification Mail for receiving allows you to transmit a default report back to the sending station after successfully receiving and processing an I-Fax or E-mail.

To use this feature you must set the Notification option within the Setup Mail RX and Setup Mail TX options.

Your PC [email protected] 123456789

[email protected] (fax#123456789)

INTERNET

Internet FAX

7 - 8

7

Setup Mail (TX)

You can set the Notification option in the Setup Mail TX option to either ON or OFF. When switched to ON an additional field of information is sent with the image data. This field is named MDN.

MDNMail Disposition Notification - This field requests the status of the I-Fax / E-mail message after delivery through the SMTP (Send Mail Transfer Protocol) transport system. Once the message has arrived at the Receiving station this data is used when the machine or user reads or prints the received I-Fax or E-mail. For example, if the message is opened for reading or is printed the receiving station sends back a notification to the original sending machine or user.

The receiving station must support the MDN field in order to be able to send a notification report, otherwise the request will be ignored.

Setup Mail (RX)

There are three possible settings for this option ON/MDN/OFF.Receive Notification “ON”When switched to “ON” a fixed message is sent back to the sending station to indicate successful reception and processing of the message. These fixed messages depend on the operation requested by the sending station.

Report messages consist of

SUCCESS : Received From <mail address>

Receive Notification “MDN”When switched to “MDN” a report as described above is sent back to the sending station if the originating station sent the “MDN” field to request confirmation.

Receive Notification “OFF”OFF - Switches all forms of receive notification OFF, no messages are send back to the sending station regardless of the request.

Error mail

If there is a mail delivery error while sending an Internet Fax, the mail server will send an error message back to the machine and the error message will be printed. If there is an error while receiving mail, an error message will be printed (Example: “The message being sent to the machine was not in a TIFF-F format.”).

Internet FAX

7 - 9

7

Important information on Internet Fax

Internet Fax Communication on a LAN system is basically the same as communication via E-mail; however, it is different from Fax communication using standard phone lines. The following is important information for using Internet Fax:

■ Factors such as the receiver’s location, structure of the LAN system, and how busy the circuit (such as the internet) is, may cause the system to take a long time to send back an error mail. (normally 20 sec. to 30 sec.).

■ In the case of transmission through the Internet, due to its low level of security, we recommend that you use standard phone lines to send confidential documents.

■ If the receiver’s mail system is not compatible with the MIME format, you cannot transmit a document to the receiver. Depending on receiver’s server, there may be some cases in which the error mail will not be sent back.

■ If the size of a document’s image data is huge, there is a possibility of unsuccessful transmission.■ You cannot change font and character size of Internet mail that you received.

8

8 - 1

8 Troubleshooting

Overview

This chapter describes procedures for troubleshooting problems you may encounter with a print server, it is divided into the following sections:

■ General problems

■ Network print software installation problems

■ Printing problems■ Protocol-specific troubleshooting

General problems

CD-ROM is inserted, but does not start automatically

If your computer does not support Autorun, the menu will not start automatically after inserting the CD-ROM. In this case, execute setup.exe in the root directory of the CD-ROM.

How to reset the print server to factory default

You can reset the print server back to its default factory settings (resetting all information such as the password and IP address information). See Restoring the network settings to factory default on page 3-15.

Network print software installation problems

The print server is not found during setup of the network print software installation or from the printer driver of the machine in Windows®.

Make sure you have completed the IP address setting of the print server according to Chapter 2 or Chapter 3 of this User’s Guide before installing the network print software or printer driver. Check the following:

1 Make sure that the machine is powered on, is on-line and ready to print.

Troubleshooting

8 - 2

8

2 Check to see if there is any LED activity. The print servers have two LEDs on the back panel of the machine. The upper green LED shows Link/Activity (Received/Transmit) status. The lower orange LED shows Speed status.

• No light: If the upper LED is off, then the print server is not connected to the network.

• The upper LED is green: The Link/Activity LED will be green if the print server is connected to a Ethernet network.

• The lower LED is orange: The Speed LED will be orange if the print server is connected to a 100 Base TX Fast Ethernet network.

• The lower LED is off: The Speed LED will be off if the print server is connected to a 10 Base T Ethernet network.

3 Print the Network Configuration List and check if the settings such as IP address settings are correct for your network. The problem may be the result of mismatched or duplicate IP address. Verify that the IP address is correctly loaded into the print server. And make sure that no other nodes on the network have this IP address. For information on how to print the Network Configuration List, see Printing the Network Configuration List on page 3-16.

4 Verify that the print server is on your network as follows:

Try pinging the print server from the host operating system command prompt with the command:

ping ipaddress

Where ipaddress is the print server IP address (note that in some instances it can take up to two minutes for the print server to load its IP address after setting the IP address).

Troubleshooting

8 - 3

8

Printing problems

Print job is not printed

Make sure the status and configuration of the print server. Check following:

1 Make sure that the machine is powered on, is on-line and ready to print. Print the Network Configuration List of the machine and check if the settings such as IP address settings are correct for your network. See Printing the Network Configuration List on page 3-16 for information on how to print the Network Configuration List on your print server.

2 The problem may be the result of mismatched or duplicate IP address. Verify that the IP address is correctly loaded into the print server. And make sure that no other nodes on the network have this IP address.

3 Verify that the print server is on your network as follows:

(1) Try pinging the print server from the host operating system command prompt with the command:

ping ipaddress

Where ipaddress is the print server IP address (note that in some instances it can take up to two minutes for the print server to load its IP address after setting the IP address).

(2) If a successful response is received, then proceed to Windows® 98/98SE/Me and Windows NT® 4.0 Peer-to-Peer print (LPR) troubleshooting on page 8-3, and Windows® 2000/XP IPP troubleshootingon page 8-4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 4.

Protocol-specific troubleshooting

Windows® 98/98SE/Me and Windows NT® 4.0 Peer-to-Peer print (LPR) troubleshooting

If you are having trouble printing on a Windows® 98/98SE/Me, Windows NT® 4.0 or later Peer-to-Peer network (LPR method), check the following:

1 Make sure that the LPR Port driver is correctly installed and configured according to the Windows®

98/98SE/Me or Windows NT® 4.0 Peer-to-Peer chapters.

2 Try to turn the Byte Count on in the Configure port area of printer driver properties.

You may find that during the installation of BLP software, the screen that prompts you for a Port name is not displayed. This may happen on some Windows® 98/98SE/Me and Windows NT® 4.0 computers. Press the ALT and TAB keys to make it appear.

Troubleshooting

8 - 4

8

Windows® 2000/XP IPP troubleshooting

Want to use a different Port number other than 631.

If you are using Port 631 for IPP printing, you may find that your firewall may not let the print data through. If this is the case, use a different port number (port 80), or configure your Firewall to allow Port 631 data through.

To send a print job using IPP to a printer using Port 80 (the standard HTTP port) enter the following when configuring your Windows® 2000/XP system.

http://ipaddress/ipp

Get More Info option in Windows® 2000 not working

If you are using a URL of:

http://ipaddress:631 or http://ipaddress:631/ipp,

the Get More Info option in Windows® 2000 will not function. If you wish to use the Get More Info option, use the following URL:

http://ipaddress

This will then force Windows® 2000/XP to use Port 80 to communicate with the print server.

Web browser troubleshooting (TCP/IP)

1 If you can not connect to the print server using your web browser it may be worth checking the Proxy Settings of your browser. Look in the Exceptions setting and if necessary, type in the IP address of the print server. This will stop your PC from trying to connect to your ISP or proxy server every time you wish to look at the printer server.

2 Make sure that you are using the proper web browser, we recommend Netscape Navigator® version 7.1 or later/ Microsoft Internet Explorer® version 6.0 or later.

A

A - 1

A Appendix A

Using services

A service is a resource that can be accessed by computers that wish to print to the print server. The print server provides the following predefined services (do a SHOW SERVICE command in the print server remote console to see a list of available services): Enter HELP at the command prompt for a list of supported commands.

Where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the Ethernet address (for example, BRN_310107_P1).

Other ways to set the IP address (for advanced users and Administrators)

For information on how to configure your network printer using the BRAdmin Professional utility or a web browser, see Setting the IP address and subnet mask on page 2-3.

Using DHCP to configure the IP address

The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is one of several automated mechanisms for IP address allocation. If you have a DHCP server in your network, the print server will automatically obtain its IP address from DHCP server and register its name with any RFC 1001 and 1002-compliant dynamic name services.

NoteIf you do not want your print server configured via DHCP, BOOTP or RARP, you must set the BOOT METHOD to static so that the print server has a static IP address. This will prevent the print server from trying to obtain an IP address from any of these systems. To change the BOOT METHOD, use the BRAdmin Professional utility.

Service (Example) Definition

BINARY_P1 TCP/IP binary, NetBIOS service

TEXT_P1 TCP/IP text service (adds carriage return after each line feed)

BRN_xxxxxx_P1 TCP/IP binary

Appendix A

A - 2

A

Using BOOTP to configure the IP address

BOOTP is an alternative to RARP that has the advantage of allowing configuration of the subnet mask and gateway. In order to use BOOTP to configure the IP address make sure that BOOTP is installed and running on your host computer (it should appear in the /etc/services file on your host as a real service; type man bootpd or refer to your system documentation for information). BOOTP is usually started up via the /etc/inetd.conf file, so you may need to enable it by removing the “#” in front of the bootp entry in that file. For example, a typical bootp entry in the /etc/inetd.conf file would be:

#bootp dgram udp wait /usr/etc/bootpd bootpd -i

Depending on the system, this entry might be called “bootps” instead of “bootp”.

NoteIn order to enable BOOTP, simply use an editor to delete the “#” (if there is no “#”, then BOOTP is already enabled). Then edit the BOOTP configuration file (usually /etc/bootptab) and enter the name, network type (1 for Ethernet), Ethernet address and the IP address, subnet mask and gateway of the print server. Unfortunately, the exact format for doing this is not standardized, so you will need to refer to your system documentation to determine how to enter this information (many UNIX® systems also have template examples in the bootptab file that you can use for reference). Some examples of typical /etc/bootptab entries include:

BRN_310107 1 00:80:77:31:01:07 192.168.1.2and:

BRN_310107:ht=ethernet:ha=008077310107:\ip=192.168.1.2:

Certain BOOTP host software implementations will not respond to BOOTP requests if you have not included a download filename in the configuration file; if this is the case, simply create a null file on the host and specify the name of this file and its path in the configuration file.

As with RARP, the print server will load its IP address from the BOOTP server when the printer is powered on.

Using RARP to configure the IP address

The print server’s IP address can be configured using the Reverse ARP (RARP) facility on your host computer. This is done by editing the /etc/ethers file (if this file does not exist, you can create it) with an entry similar to the following:

00:80:77:31:01:07 BRN_310107

Where the first entry is the Ethernet address of the print server and the second entry is the name of the print server (the name must be the same as the one you put in the /etc/hosts file).

Appendix A

A - 3

A

If the RARP daemon is not already running, start it (depending on the system the command can be rarpd, rarpd -a, in.rarpd -a or something else; type man rarpd or refer to your system documentation for additional information). To verify that the RARP daemon is running on a Berkeley UNIX®-based system, type the following command:

ps -ax | grep -v grep | grep rarpd

For AT&T UNIX®-based systems, type:

ps -ef | grep -v grep | grep rarpd

The print server will get the IP address from the RARP daemon when the printer is powered on.

Using APIPA to configure the IP address

The print server supports the Automatic Private IP Addressing (APIPA) protocol. With APIPA, DHCP clients automatically configure an IP address and subnet mask when a DHCP server is not available. The device chooses it's own IP address in the range 169.254.1.0 through to 169.254.254.255. The subnet mask is automatically set to 255.255.0.0 and the gateway address is set to 0.0.0.0.

By default, the APIPA protocol is enabled. If you want to disable the APIPA protocol, you can disable it using control panel of the machine. For more information, see APIPA on page 3-6.

If the APIPA protocol is disabled, the default IP address of a print server is 192.0.0.192. However, you can easily change this IP address number to match with the IP address details of your network.

Using ARP to configure the IP address

If you are unable to use the BRAdmin application and your network does not use a DHCP server, you can also use the ARP command. The ARP command is available on Windows® systems that have TCP/IP installed as well as UNIX® systems. To use arp enter the following command at the command prompt:

arp -s ipaddress ethernetaddress

Where ethernetaddress is the Ethernet address (MAC address) of the print server and ipaddress is the IP address of the print server. For example:

Windows® systems

Windows® systems require the hash "-" character between each digit of the Ethernet address.

arp -s 192.168.1.2 00-80-77-31-01-07

Appendix A

A - 4

A

UNIX®/Linux systems

Typically, UNIX® and Linux systems require the colon ":" character between each digit of the Ethernet address.

arp -s 192.168.1.2 00:80:77:31:01:07

NoteYou must be on the same Ethernet segment (that is, there cannot be a router between the print server and operating system) to use the arp -s command. If there is a router, you may use BOOTP or other methods described in this chapter to enter the IP address.If your Administrator has configured the system to deliver IP addresses using BOOTP, DHCP or RARP your print server can receive an IP address from any one of these IP address allocation systems. In which case, you will not need to use the ARP command. The ARP command only works once. For security reasons, once you have successfully configured the IP address of a print server using the ARP command, you cannot use the ARP command again to change the address. The print server will ignore any attempts to do this. If you wish to change the IP address again, use a web browser, TELNET (using the SET IP ADDRESS command) or factory reset the print server (which will then allow you to use the ARP command again).To configure the print server and to verify the connection, enter the following command ping ipaddresswhere ipaddress is the IP address of the print server. For example, ping 192.189.207.2.

Using the TELNET console to configure the IP address

You can also use the TELNET command to change the IP address.

Using TELNET is effective way, when you change the IP address. But a valid IP address must already be programmed into the print server.

Type TELNET ipaddress at the command prompt of the system prompt, where ipaddress is the IP address of the print server. When you are connected, push the Return or Enter key to get the “#” prompt, enter the password “access” (the password will not appear on the screen).

You will be prompted for a user name. Enter anything in response to this prompt.

You will then get the Local> prompt. Type SET IP ADDRESS ipaddress, where ipaddress is the desired IP address you wish to assign to the print server (check with your network manager for the IP address to use). For example:

Local> SET IP ADDRESS 192.168.1.3

You will now need to set the subnet mask by typing SET IP SUBNET subnet mask, where subnet maskis the desired subnet mask you wish to assign to the print server (check with your network manager for the subnet mask to use). For example:

Appendix A

A - 5

A

Local> SET IP SUBNET 255.255.255.0

If you do not have any subnets, use one of the following default subnet masks:

255.0.0.0 for class A networks

255.255.0.0 for class B networks

255.255.255.0 for class C networks

The leftmost group of digits in your IP address can identify the type of network you have. The value of this group ranges from 1 through 127 for Class A networks (e.g., 13.27.7.1), 128 through 191 for Class B networks (e.g.,128.10.1.30), and 192 through 223 for Class C networks (e.g., 192.168.1.4).

If you have a gateway (router), enter its address with the command SET IP ROUTER routeraddress,where routeraddress is the desired IP address of the gateway you wish to assign to the print server. For example:

Local> SET IP ROUTER 192.168.1.4

Type SET IP METHOD STATIC to set the method of IP access configuration to static.

To verify that you have entered the IP information correctly, type SHOW IP.

Type EXIT or Ctrl-D (i.e., hold down the control key and type "D") to end the remote console session.

Appendix A

A - 6

A

Installation when using a Network Print Queue or Share (printer driver only)

Note• You must configure the IP address on your machine before you proceed with this chapter. If you have

not configured the IP address, see Chapter 2 first.• Verify the host computer and print server are either on the same subnet, or that the router is properly

configured to pass data between the two devices.• Before installation, if you are using Personal Firewall software (e.g. the Internet Connection Firewall

available in Windows XP), disable it. Once you are sure that you can print, re-start your Personal Firewall software.



3 Click Printer Driver (Only).


5 Select Standard Installation and click Next.

6 Select Network Shared Printer, and then click Next.

7 Select your printer’s queue, and then click OK.

NoteContact your administarator if you are not sure about the location and name of the printer in the network.

8 Click Finish.

Appendix A

A - 7

A

Multi-function Print Server specifications

Operating system support Windows® 98/98SE/Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000/XP

Protocol support TCP/IP ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP), NetBIOS Name Resolution, WINS, DNS Resolver, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, SMTP Client, POP3, IPP, FTP Server, mDNS, TELNET, SNMP, HTTP

Network type 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet network

Network printing Windows® 98/98SE/Me Peer-to-Peer printingWindows NT® 4.0 and Windows® 2000/XP TCP/IP printing

Computer requirements(for drivers, BRAdmin Professional, Peer-to-Peer software, etc.)

Processor Minimum Speed

Intel® Pentium® II or equivalent for Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP and Windows NT® 4.0

Minimum RAM 32MB for Windows® 98/98SE/Me64MB for Windows® 2000 Professional and Windows NT® 4.0128MB for Windows® XP

Recommended RAM

64MB for Windows® 98/98SE/Me128MB for Windows® 2000 Professional and Windows NT® 4.0256MB for Windows® XP

Appendix A

A - 8

A

Function Table and Default Factory Settings

LEVEL ONE

LEVEL TWO

LEVEL THREE OPTIONS OPTIONS FACTORY SETTING

6.LAN 1.Setup TCP/IP

1.BOOT Method Auto/ Static/ RARP/ BOOTP/ DHCP Auto

2.IP Address [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255] [169].[254].[001-254].[000-255] *1

3.Subnet Mask [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255] 255.255.0.0 *1

4.Gateway [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255] 000.000.000.000

5.Node Name BRN_XXXXXX=(last 6 figures of Ethernet address)(up to 15 characters)

BRN_XXXXXX BRN_XXXXXX

6.WINS Config Auto/ Static Auto

7.WINS Server (Primary) [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

(Secondary) [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

000.000.000.000

8.DNS Server (Primary) [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

(Secondary) [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255]

000.000.000.000

9.APIPA On/Off On

2.Setup Internet

1.Mail Address (60 characters)

2.SMTP Server [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255] Name

(up to 30 characters)

000.000.000.000

3.POP3 Server [000-255].[000-255].[000-255].[000-255] Name(up to 30 characters)

000.000.000.000

4.Mailbox Name (up to 20 characters)

5.Mailbox Pwd Password:****** Verify:******

3.Setup Mail RX

1.Auto Polling On/ Off

2.Poll Frequency xxMin On/ 10 Min

3.Header All/ Suject+From+To/ None None

4.Del Error Mail On/ Off On

5.Notification On/ MDN/ Off Off

4.Setup Mail TX

1.Sender Subject Internet Fax Job

2.Size Limit On/ Off Off

3.Notification On/ Off Off

5.Setup Relay

1.Rly Broadcast On/ Off Off

2.Relay Domain RelayXX: Relay01*YYYYY XX=01-10 YYYYY=(up to 30 characters)

3.Relay Report On/ Off Off

6. Setup Misc.

1.Ethernet Auto/ 100B-FD/ 100B-HD/ 10B-FD/ 10B-HD

Auto

2.Time Zone GMTXXX:XX GMT-5:00

Appendix A

A - 9

A*1: The factory setting for IP Address and Subnet Mask may be changed by the APIPA setting.

7.Scan to E-mail

1.B/W File Type TIFF/PDF TIFF

2.ColorFile Type PDF/JPEG JPEG

0.Factory Reset

-

I

I - 1

I Index

A

APIPA ....................................... 1-5, 3-6, A-3ARP .........................................................A-3

B

BINARY_P1 ............................................A-1BIP .......................................................... 5-1BOOTP ..................................... 1-5, 3-2, A-2BRAdmin Professional ............................ 2-3BRN_xxxxxx_P1 .....................................A-1Browser ................................................... 6-1

D

DHCP ....................................... 1-5, 3-3, A-1DNS ......................................................... 6-1DNS Client .............................................. 1-5DNS Server ............................................. 3-6Domain .............................. 2-4, 4-4, 4-7, 5-8

E

E-mail ...................................................... 5-1Ethernet ................................................. 3-14

G

Gateway ...........................................2-3, 3-4

H

HTTP .........................................1-6, 2-4, 6-1Hyper Text Transfer Protocol ...........2-4, 6-1

I

Internet .................................................... 5-1Internet Printing ....................................... 5-1IP Address ........................................2-1, 3-3IPP .................................... 1-6, 5-1, 5-7, 8-4ISP .......................................................... 5-1

L

LAN menu ............................................... 3-1LED (Print Server) ................................... 8-2LPR Port ...........................................4-6, 4-8LPR/LPD ................................................. 1-5

M

MIME ....................................................... 5-1

N

Network Configuration List .................... 3-16Network Printing ...................................... 4-1Network Shared Printing ......................... 1-4

P

Password .........................................4-1, 5-7Peer to Peer Software ............................. 4-6Peer-to-Peer ............................................ 1-3Ping ..................................................8-2, 8-3POP3 ....................................................... 5-2Port9100 .................................................. 1-5Protocol ................................................... 1-5

R

RARP ....................................... 1-5, 3-2, A-2Restoring the network settings .............. 3-15RFC 1001 ................................................A-1

S

Service ....................................................A-1Simple Mail Transport Protocol ............... 5-1SMTP ...............................................5-1, 5-5SMTP Client ............................................ 1-6SNMP ...................................................... 1-6Specifications ..........................................A-7Subnet Mask ....................................2-2, 3-4

T

TCP/IP ..............................................1-5, 3-1TCP/IP Printing ....................................... 4-1TELNET .......................................... 1-6, A-4TEXT_P1 .................................................A-1Trademarks ................................................. i

W

Web Based Management ........................ 6-1Web Browser ....................................2-4, 6-1Web Server ............................................. 1-6Windows NT® 4.0 Printing ....................... 4-3

Index

I - 2

I

Windows® 2000 ................. 4-1, 5-1, 5-7, 8-4Windows® 2000/XP Printing .................... 4-1Windows® 98/Me ..................................... 8-3Windows® 98/Me Printing ........................ 4-6Windows® XP .................... 4-1, 5-1, 5-7, 8-4WINS Config ........................................... 3-5WINS Server ........................................... 3-5

Copylight © 2005

Netw

ork U

ser’s Guid

e

EN USA G157-3302